JP6508115B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, there is known a configuration in which a player is given a profit by shifting the gaming state to a special control state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

  About a pachinko machine Specifically, the composition which shifts to a special control state by becoming a winning result by internal lottery based on the game ball entering the ball entry section provided in the game area, or a predetermined ball entry A configuration is known that shifts to a special control state based on the game ball entering the unit. And when it shifts to the special control state, for example, opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on entering the ball into the ball entry device (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2015-009055, A

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, the first state in which the game ball can enter or the game ball is easy to enter, and the game ball enters the ball Impossible or variable ball entry means provided so as to be switchable to the second state in which the game ball is hard to enter the ball,
Special control means for executing special control to bring the variable entering means into the first state after putting the variable entering means into the first state;
Special ball entering means capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Trigger ball entering means which becomes a ball entry possible state where ball entering of the game ball is possible based on the game ball entering the special ball entering means,
Grant determination means for executing a grant determination based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entry means;
The special control state is shifted to the special control state in which the special control is executed based on the result of the awarding determination being the first grant correspondence result, and the gaming state after the end of the special control state is the start of the special control state A means capable of providing a gaming state different from the previous gaming state;
Based on that the application of the determination result becomes the second grant corresponding result, the is shifted to a predetermined gaming state special control is executed, initiate game state after completion of the predetermined gaming state of the predetermined gaming state A means for maintaining the previous gaming state,
Equipped with
The configuration in which the probability of the second assignment response result in the assignment determination is higher than the probability of the first assignment response result,
The target ball entry means, which is either the variable ball entry means or another ball entry means,
The ball entry part where the game ball can enter the ball,
It is possible for a game ball flowing down from the upstream side to be placed, and a guiding state capable of guiding the placed game ball onto the ball entry portion, and a game ball flowing down from the upstream side forward Guiding means switchably provided in each of the non-inducing states which do not lead to the writing ball;
Equipped with
When the guiding means is in the guiding state, the special ball is placed at a position where the gaming ball placed on the guiding means can flow in a different area different from the ball entering area. Characterized in that means are provided .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view which disassembles and shows the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is an explanatory view for explaining composition concerning discharge of a game ball which flowed down a game field. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the etc. lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the low probability non-performing table for 1st special figures, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the high probability non-performing table for 1st special figures, (c) The 1st 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a low probability of failure table for the special figure, (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high probability of failure table for the second special figure. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 1st special figures, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 2nd special drawings. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by main side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining composition which makes a main CPU detect a detection result of a ball entering detection sensor. It is a flowchart which shows the ball | bowl detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of various apparatuses which communicate between a payout control apparatus and the said payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by delivery side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of management IC. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of an input port of a management side I / F. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of memory for correspondence. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of memory for history. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed by management side CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of the 1st-15th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in memory for correspondence. It is a flowchart which shows the output process for management performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed by management side CPU. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that historical information is stored in memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the process for data output performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed by management side CPU. It is a front view of a game board which expands and shows the field in which a special electric power winning device was provided. It is a perspective view of an opening and closing member. (A), (b) It is a perspective view of the channel | path formation body which shows a mode that the inlet_port | entrance part of a 4th discharge channel | path part is opened and closed by an opening / closing member, and an opening / closing member. It is a top view of an opening-and-closing member and a drive part for electric power. (A), (b) It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the prize-winning to a 2nd operation opening generate | occur | produces in opening / closing execution mode. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution aspect of open / close execution mode. (A1)-(b3) It is a time chart for demonstrating the execution aspect of the opening-and-closing execution mode performed triggered by having become a small hit result. It is a flowchart which shows the general-purpose-general-power control processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure electric power control process performed by main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows acquisition processing of pending information performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure change start process performed by main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing under special figure decision performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power start process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in the electric power open which is performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during a special power closing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process performed by main side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining composition of an input port of management side I / F in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed by management side CPU. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of a 1st-12th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in memory for correspondence. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of IC for management in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of an input port of a management side I / F. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the failure response process performed by the management side CPU in 4th Embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the opportunity specific process performed by the main side CPU in 5th Embodiment, It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed by (b) management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the opportunity specific process performed by the main side CPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed by management side CPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed by management side CPU in 8th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of memory for history in a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed by management side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of MPU of the main control unit in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball | bowl detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of the main control unit in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of an input port of a management side I / F. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of memory for history. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter management process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path which transmits the detection result of each ball | bowl detection sensor in 12th Embodiment to main side CPU and management IC. It is a time chart for explaining the execution mode of the opening and closing execution mode in a 13th embodiment (a1)-(c2). It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power start process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in the electric power open which is performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during a special power closing performed by main side CPU. It is a front view of the game board in a 14th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball | bowl detection process performed by main side CPU. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a game ball enters a 1st special ball entry or 2nd special ball entry in opening / closing execution mode. FIG. 35 is a front view of the gaming board in the fifteenth embodiment. (A), (b) It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. (A) It is a BB sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 78, (b) It is an AA sectional view taken on the line of FIG. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the low probability non-performing table for 1st special figures, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the high probability non-performing table for 1st special figures, (c) The 1st 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a low probability of failure table for the special figure, (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high probability of failure table for the second special figure. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution aspect of open / close execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the release setting process for special powers performed by main side CPU. It is a front view of a game board in a sixteenth embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the release setting process for special powers performed by main side CPU, It is a flowchart which shows the closure setting process for special powers performed by (b) main side CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a 1st special electric power winning device and a 2nd special electric power winning device are opened and closed. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the game board for demonstrating the structure of the special electric winning a prize apparatus in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the downflow prevention control processing performed by main side CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart for demonstrating the relationship between the opening-and-closing state of each special electric power winning device, and the operation position of the downflow prevention member. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the opening-and-closing state of each special electric power winning device, and the operation position of the downflow prevention member. FIG. 68 is a front view of the gaming board in the eighteenth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows acquisition processing of reservation information on the side of a drawing which is executed by main side CPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a symbol display apparatus. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the reservation information by the side of a common drawing is acquired. It is a front view of the game board in a nineteenth embodiment. (A), (b) It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 2, the structure in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is abbreviate | omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. Have. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plate members to four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential component, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on an island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 is pivotable forward with the left side as the pivoting base end and the right side as the pivoting tip side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be pivoted forward with the left side as a pivoting base end and the right side as a pivoting tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated backward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip end side in a front view.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function to lock the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened, and The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 mainly includes a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is removably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. As shown in FIG.

  The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide means Guide rails are configured as. The game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window holes 23 in the resin base 21 are guided to the top of the game area PA by the guide rails.

  Incidentally, the game ball firing mechanism 27 includes a firing rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying game balls stored in an upper tray 55a described later onto the firing rail 27a, and a firing rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that causes the game ball supplied to the control unit to shoot toward the guide rail. By rotating the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the gaming ball is fired.

  The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operation opening 33, a second operation opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a drawing unit 38, etc. ing. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and the others are provided one by one.

  Even if the ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when entering the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of winning balls, when one game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or when one game ball entering the second operation opening 34 occurs. When one prize ball is paid out and when one game ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, the payout of ten prize balls is executed, and the special electric prize device 32 is sent. When one game ball enters, a payout of 15 prize balls is executed.

  The number of winning balls is arbitrary. For example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of winning balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may be a first operating port. The number of balls may be greater than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls which did not enter the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are implanted to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are disposed.

  Here, entering the ball means that the gaming ball passes through the predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being ejected from the gaming area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the gaming area PA after passing through the opening Also included is an aspect of continuing the flow of the game area PA without being discharged. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 24 a clearly, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 The entry of the game ball to the is also expressed as a winning.

  The variable display unit 36 includes a symbol display device 41 having a rectangular display surface, and also includes a center frame 36 a so as to surround the periphery of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. In the center frame 36a, portions along the upper side, left side and right side of the display surface of the symbol display device 41 project forward beyond the board of the game board 24, and the variable display unit 36 is at the center of the game area PA. It is provided. As a result, the game area PA includes the upper area PA1 located above the variable display unit 36, the left area PA2 located left of the variable display unit 36, and the right area PA3 located right of the variable display unit 36. And a lower area PA4 located below the variable display unit 36. That is, although the game ball fired in the game area PA first reaches the upper area PA1, the game ball which reaches the upper area PA1 is in the order of the upper area PA1 → left side area PA2 → lower side area PA4. The game balls flowing down or in the order of the upper area PA1 → the right area PA3 → the lower area PA4 and flowing down one of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3 do not flow down the other.

  The first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are disposed in the lower area PA4 which is an area under the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. The lower area PA4 is continuous with the left area PA2 which is the area to the left of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA and downstream thereof, and is the area to the right of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA It is continuous with the right side area PA3 and its downstream. Therefore, even if it is the game ball which flowed out from any position of upper field PA1 which is a field above variable display unit 36 in game field PA, it can reach the 1st operation opening 33 or the 2nd operation opening 34 . For example, the game ball can reach the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 even when the rotation operation of the launch operation device 28 is performed to achieve the maximum operation amount. In addition, when the shooting operation is performed aiming at winning in the first operation opening 33, not only winning in the first operation opening 33 can occur but also winning in the second operation opening 34 can occur. When the shooting operation is performed aiming at winning in the second operation opening 34, not only winning in the second operation opening 34 may occur but also winning in the first operation opening 33 may occur.

  The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device in a state in which the first operating port 33 is vertically juxtaposed with the upper operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 downward. There is. The first operation port 33 is not provided with a member for making the ball entry frequency of the game ball into the first operation port 33 different, and the left side area PA2 is compared in a predetermined mode in which the game ball flows down The probability of entering the gaming ball to the first operation opening 33 in the is the same regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, the player can perform the firing operation aiming at the entry of the gaming ball into the first operation opening 33 in any situation.

  In the lower frame portion 36b which is a lower portion of the display surface of the symbol display device 41 in the center frame 36a, a stage portion 36c is provided so as to extend laterally above the first operation port 33, Warp passage that enables the game ball flowing down the left region of the variable display unit 36 to be guided to the stage portion 36 c in the left frame portion 36 d which is the left portion of the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36 The inlet 36e of the And, the central part in the lateral direction of the stage part 36c exists vertically above the first operation opening 33, and a lead-out part 36f for guiding the gaming ball to the lower part of the stage part 36c by its own weight in the central part Is formed. In this case, it is difficult for the gaming ball led to the stage portion 36c to be led downward from the area other than the leading portion 36f to the first operation opening 33, but the leading portion 36f The game ball led out to the lower side of the stage portion 36c enters the first operation opening 33 with high probability.

  The second operating port 34 is provided with a general-purpose utility product 34 a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the commercial power item 34a, the gaming ball can not win in the second operation port 34, and when the common electric symbol 34a is in the open state, it is possible to win the second operating port 34.

  A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the flow direction of the game ball from the second operation opening 34, more specifically, on the right side area PA3. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the gaming ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning. Thereby, it is possible for the game ball that has won the through gate 35 to win the second operation port 34.

  Based on the winning on the through gate 35, the utility power supply 34a of the second operation port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed triggered by the winning on the through gate 35, and a common drawing display of the drawing unit 38 provided in the lower right corner which is an area where the gaming ball does not pass in the gaming area PA The variation display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electronic combination open winning, the result of the stop corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the common view display unit 38a is ended, the state shifts to the general electric power transmission open state. In the general-purpose open state, the general-purpose utility item 34a is open in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, although the common view display part 38a is comprised by the segment display which a some segment light emission part is arranged in a predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display , Or a display device such as a CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed in the common view display unit 38a, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed may be considered.

  In the common drawing unit 38, a common drawing suspension display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the common drawing display unit 38a. The number of game balls winning through the through gate 35 is held at a maximum of four, and the number of the held balls is displayed by lighting of the common drawing hold display unit 38b.

  A lottery is triggered by winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly indicated through display effects in the special display unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36.

  In detail, the special drawing unit 37 is provided with a first special drawing display unit 37a and a second special drawing display unit 37b. In the first special view display unit 37a, the winning display in the first operation port 33 is used as a trigger to perform lottery, whereby variable display of patterns is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special view display unit 37b, the winning of the second operation port 34 is used as a trigger, and the lottery is performed, whereby the variation display of the pattern is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Although the first special view display unit 37a and the second special view display unit 37b are configured of segment displays in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as the design displayed on the first special view display unit 37a and the second special view display unit 37b, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a plurality of types of characters May be displayed, or a plurality of different colors may be displayed.

  In the special drawing unit 37, a first special view holding display unit 37c and a second special drawing holding display unit 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special drawing display unit 37a and the second special view display unit 37b. . The number of game balls having won in the first operation opening 33 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of the held reserved is displayed by the lighting of the first special view held display portion 37c. In addition, the number of game balls winning in the second operation opening 34 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of the held reserved is displayed by lighting of the second special view held display portion 37d.

  In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be

  In the symbol display device 41, when the variable display of the symbol is performed on the first special view display unit 37a based on the winning on the first operation port 33, the variable display of the symbol is performed accordingly, and the second operation opening When the variation display of the pattern is performed on the second special figure display unit 37b based on the winning to 34, the variation display of the pattern is performed accordingly. In the symbol display device 41, not only display effects triggered by winning in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, but also display effects in the open / close execution mode to be shifted after winning are won. It will be.

  Display contents in the case where the variable display of symbols is performed by the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a view individually showing the symbols variably displayed by the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 5 is a view showing the display surface of the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to 4 (j), a pattern, which is a type of pattern, consists of nine types of main designs, each of which has a numeral of "1" to "9", and a shell-shaped picture It is constituted by the sub pattern. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers of "1" to "9" to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols and the sub symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower figure pattern row Z3, nine types of main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1" The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged in each, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, ten main symbols are arranged and are configured by twenty symbols. Then, on the display surface, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), on the display surface, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine 3 × 3 symbols are stopped and displayed. It has become. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set on the display surface.

  When variable display of symbols is performed on the display surface based on winning on the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity The variable display is started. Then, it is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 and finally the predetermined symbol is displayed in a stationary display in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 and is ended. . Also, when the variation display of symbols is finished, if the result of the internal lottery is the 16R high-accuracy result described later, a combination of “7” symbols is formed on any of the activated lines, and the result of the internal lottery is If the 2R high probability result, the 4R high probability result, the 6R high probability result or the 10R high probability result, which will be described later, is one of the combinations of the same odd symbols other than the '7' symbol on any valid line. If the result of the internal lottery is either 2R low probability result, 4R low probability result, 6R low probability result, 10R low probability result or 16R low probability result, which will be described later, on any valid line If the same combination of even symbols is formed, and the result of the internal lottery is one of the first small hitting result, the second small hitting result and the third small hitting result which will be described later, on any valid line Not a combination of the same symbols and The combination of predetermined symbol nor a combination of switch symbols (e.g., "3, 4 and 1 ') is formed.

  The display is started on any of the special view display portions 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41 based on the winning on any of the operation openings 33, 34, and the predetermined result is displayed until the process is ended. Is equivalent to one game play. In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  When a big hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first operation port 33, it shifts to the open / close execution mode in which winning to the special power winning device 32 is possible. Also, when the big win or the small hit is won by the lottery based on the winning to the second operation port 34, transition to the open / close execution mode in which winning to the special power winning device 32 is possible. As shown in FIG. 3, the special power prize device 32 is provided in the right area PA3 in the game area PA. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 is not able to win the special power winning device 32, and for example, the right side area as in the case where the rotation operation of the firing operation device 28 is performed to achieve the maximum operation amount. When the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down PA3, winning on the special power winning device 32 becomes possible. The configuration of the special power winning device 32 will be described in detail later.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view for explaining a configuration regarding the discharge of gaming balls having flowed down the gaming area PA.

  As described above, the game balls entered in any of the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34 and the out opening 24a are discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the gaming ball which is fired from the gaming ball firing mechanism 27 and flows into the gaming area PA is any of the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34 and the out opening 24a. The player is discharged from the game area PA by entering the ball. The game ball entered in any of the general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34 and out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

  At the back of the game board 24, discharge passage parts 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34 and out opening 24a respectively. . The game ball having flowed into the discharge passage portion 42 to 48 is led to the lower end portion of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the discharge passage portion 42 to 48 which has flowed into the discharge ball collecting portion not shown. Be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collection unit are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

  Each of the discharge passage portions 42 to 48 is provided with various detection sensors 42 a to 48 a for detecting a game ball. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since four general winning openings 31 are provided as described above, discharge passage portions 42 to 44 are provided corresponding to the four, respectively. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 adjacent to the right thereof. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided such that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is provided in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 43. A second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided to be present. The game ball having entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a on the way through the first discharge passage portion 42, and the game is entered into the general winning opening 31 next to the right The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43 a while passing through the second discharge passage 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to merge at an intermediate position with respect to the two right side general winning a prize openings 31 is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an inlet side region corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and the outlet side regions merge to have one outlet side region. doing. A third winning opening detection sensor 44 a is provided such that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the exit side area of the third discharge passage portion 44. The game ball having entered the right two normal winning openings 31 is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44 a while passing through the third discharge passage 44.

  A fourth discharge passage portion 45 is provided corresponding to the special power winning device 32. A special power detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the fourth discharge passage 45, and the gaming ball entering the special power winning device 32 passes the fourth discharge passage 45 on the way It is detected by the special charge detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage 46 is provided corresponding to the first operation port 33. The first operation port detection sensor 46 a is provided so that the detection range exists at an intermediate position of the fifth ejection passage portion 46, and the gaming ball having entered the first operation port 33 is the fifth ejection passage portion 46. While passing through, it is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second operation port 34. The second operation port detection sensor 47a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the sixth discharge passage section 47, and the gaming ball entering the second operation port 34 is the sixth discharge passage section 47. While passing through, it is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. The out-port detection sensor 48a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the seventh discharge passage 48, and the gaming ball entering the out-port 24a passes the seventh discharge passage 48 halfway It is detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a.

  The game ball detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a is not detected by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a while flowing down the game area PA.

  Although an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as each of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, any sensor may be used as long as it can individually detect the game balls. The various detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are electrically connected to a main control device 60 described later, and detection results of the various detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal in a state in which the gaming ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal in a state in which the gaming ball is detected. The relationship between HI and LOW is not limited to this, and may be reversed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 formed by attaching the gaming board 24 of the above configuration to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 that enables the player to view substantially the entire game area PA from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is formed to be colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin, and the game area PA may be made through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 If it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  The display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 to which sound effects and the like according to the game state are output are provided. Further, below the window 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56 bulging toward the front side are vertically juxtaposed. An upper plate 55a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a opening similarly upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper tray 55a has a function for temporarily storing the gaming balls paid out from the later-described payout device 76 and guiding the gaming balls to the gaming ball shooting mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. Further, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing the game balls which become surplus in the upper tray 55a.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 60 which controls the main control of the game is mounted. The main control device 60 is configured such that the main control substrate 61 is accommodated in the substrate box 60a. The substrate box 60a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 60a can not be separably joined and the structure of the joining portion which requires destruction of a predetermined portion upon the separation thereof, or the adhesive layer remains as the adhesion target upon peeling off A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of peeling off is applied across the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between several case bodies which comprise the board | substrate box 60a can be considered.

  A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and the delivery mechanism 73 and the control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

  The payout mechanism section 73 includes a tank 75 to which the gaming balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the gaming balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. In addition, for example, a main pack power of, for example, 24 AC, is supplied to the dispensing mechanism portion 73, and a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing an ON operation and an OFF operation of the power is mounted.

  The control device assembly unit 74 generates and outputs a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices and the like as a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and is accompanied by the operation of the discharge operation device 28 by the player. A power supply and launch control device 78 is provided to control the launch of the game balls. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / discharge control device 78 are disposed so as to be stacked back and forth so that the payout control device 77 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 60 comprises a main control board 61 which controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 67 which monitors the power supply. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 incorporates a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to the main CPU 63 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and various counter circuits as a random number generator.

  The main ROM 64 is a memory (i.e., non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply for storing and holding such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read only memory. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs to be executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

  The main RAM 65 is a memory (i.e., volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply for storing data, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 is capable of random access and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data in response to the execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

  The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the ball entry mode of the game balls in the game area PA based on the information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although details will be described later, while the general IC card opening 31, the special electric power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34 and the out opening 24 a are grasped by the management IC 66, The frequency of entering the ball into the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 is grasped in accordance with the held ball entry history.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The power failure monitoring board 67 and the payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The power and emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67, and the operation power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67.

  Various sensors such as various ball entry detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, the various ball entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a are the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the electric power detection sensor 45a, and the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, a second operation port detection sensor 47a, an out port detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a. Based on the detection results of the ball entering detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 performs the ball entering determination on each ball entering part. Further, the main CPU 63 executes various lottery based on the winning on the first operation port 33 and executes various lottery based on the winning on the second operating port 34.

  The power failure monitoring board 67, the payout control device 77, and the sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. A payout ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on, for example, the game ball entering the prize ball corresponding ball portion corresponding to the payout of the game ball among the above ball portions Ru. The voice light emission control device 81 outputs various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a drive unit 32b for special power, which opens and closes an opening and closing member 202 of the special power winning device 32 described later, and a drive unit 34b for generalization, which opens and closes a common , The special drawing unit 37 and the drawing unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special drawing unit 37 is provided with a first special drawing display unit 37a, a second special drawing display unit 37b, a first special drawing reservation display unit 37c, and a second special drawing reservation display unit 37d. All are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the common drawing unit 38 is provided with a common drawing display unit 38 a and a common drawing reservation display unit 38 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control substrate 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various driving units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the open / close execution mode, drive control of the drive unit 32b for the special power is performed in the main CPU 63 so that the special power prize device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when it becomes the common power open state winning state of the general purpose power products 34a, the drive control of the drive section 34b for the general power is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the general power public objects 34a are opened and closed. . In addition, display control of the special view display unit 37a is executed in the main CPU 63 at each game play. Further, when the lottery result as to whether or not the general electric utility product 34a is to be opened is specified, the display control of the common drawing display unit 38a is executed in the main CPU 63. Also, when a winning on the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs, or when the variable display is started on the special view display units 37a and 37b, the special view reserve display unit 37c, and the main CPU 63 When the display control of 37d is executed and a winning on the through gate 35 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the common view display unit 38a, the display control of the common view suspension display unit 38b is executed in the main CPU 63 Be done.

  The power failure monitoring board 67 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply and emission control device 78, and monitors the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 performs the payout control of the winning balls and the rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the winning ball command received from the main control device 60.

  The power supply and launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc. generate necessary operation power for each, and supply the generated operation power. Incidentally, the power supply / discharge control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for powering off such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the powering unit for powering off mainly The main RAM 65 of the control device 60 and the payout control device 77 are supplied with storage power. Further, the power source and launch control device 78 is responsible for the launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

  The sound emission control device 81 controls the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60 and controls the display control device 82. It is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery in main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main CPU 63 uses the various counter information during the game to set the jackpot occurrence lottery, the setting of the display of the special view display portions 37a, 37b, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the setting of the display of the common drawing display portion 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a random number counter C1 used for lottery of hit occurrence, a big hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 41 Reach display random number counter C3 used for reach occurrence lottery at the time of out of fluctuation, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of per random number counter C1, and fluctuation display in special view display parts 37a, 37b and symbol display device 41 And a variation type counter CS that determines a period. Further, a general-purpose random number counter C4 used in the lottery for determining whether the general-purpose utility 34a of the second operation port 34 is to be put into the general-purpose open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0". Each counter is updated at short intervals. The information corresponding to the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as an acquisition information storage means in the main side RAM 65 when a winning on the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs. It is stored in the stored special map reservation area 65a. The special drawing reservation area 65a includes a first special drawing reservation area 85, a second special drawing reservation area 86, and a special drawing execution area 87.

  The first special view reservation area 85 includes a first area 85a, a second area 85b, a third area 85c, and a fourth area 85d. Each numerical value information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 85a to 85d as hold information on the special view side. In this case, the first area 85a to the fourth area 85d successively receive a plurality of winnings in the first operation opening 33, and the first area 85a → the second area 85b → the third area 85c → the fourth Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 85d. As described above, by providing the four areas 85a to 85d, the winning history of the gaming ball to the first operation opening 33 is reserved and stored up to four at maximum. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in first special view reserved area 85 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three or five or more. , May be singular.

  The second special view reserve area 86 includes a first area 86a, a second area 86b, a third area 86c and a fourth area 86d, and the random number counter C1, Each numerical value information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 86a to 86d as hold information on the special view side. In this case, if winnings to the second operation port 34 occur in a plurality of consecutive times in the first area 86a to the fourth area 86d, the first area 86a → the second area 86b → the third area 86c → the fourth Each numerical value information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 86 d. As described above, by providing the four areas 86a to 86d, the winning history of the gaming ball to the second operation port 34 is reserved and stored up to four at maximum. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in second special view reserved area 86 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three or five or more. , May be singular.

  In the special drawing execution area 87, when the variable display is started in any of the special drawing display portions 37a and 37b, the holding information of the target to be subjected to the special drawing judgment, distribution judgment, etc. is stored. It is an area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special view display portion 37a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 85a of the first special view hold area 85 is moved to the special view execution area 87. Be done. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special view display unit 37b is started, the hold information stored in the first area 86a of the second special view hold area 86 is moved to the special view execution area 87.

  The information corresponding to the common charge random number counter C4 is stored in the common drawing reservation area 65c when a winning on the through gate 35 occurs. The common drawing reservation area 65c is provided with a first area 88a, a second area 88b, a third area 88c and a fourth area 88d, and numerical information of the common charge random number counter C4 according to the winning history on the through gate Are stored in one of the areas 88a to 88d as the holding information on the side of the common drawing. In this case, if winnings on the through gate 35 occur a plurality of times consecutively in the first area 88a to the fourth area 88d, the first area 88a → the second area 88b → the third area 88c → the fourth area Numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of 88 d. By providing four areas 88a to 88d as described above, the winning history of the game ball to the through gate 35 is reserved and stored up to four. Note that the number that can be reserved and stored in the common drawing reservation area 65c is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another plural such as two, three or five or more, and a single It may be The common drawing reservation area 65 c is provided with a common drawing execution area 89. The execution area 89 for common drawing is an area in which the suspension information of the target to be subjected to the common use open lottery processing is stored when the variable display is started in the common drawing display unit 38a. Specifically, when the variable display of the common drawing display unit 38a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 88a of the common drawing reservation area 65c is moved to the common drawing execution area 89.

  The respective counters will be described in detail.

  First, the common charge random number counter C4 will be described. For example, the common charge random number counter C4 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The common charge random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the common drawing reservation area 65c of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether the general-purpose utility 34a is to be controlled to the open state by the value of the stored general-purpose random number counter C4.

  The pachinko machine 10 has only one support mode. Therefore, the probability of becoming a common power open state winning in the common charge open lottery process using the common charge random number counter C4 and the determination mode of the variable display period when the variable display of the pattern is executed in the common drawing display portion 38a is It is constant regardless of the gaming state, and the number of times the common power utility item 34a is opened in the common power open condition, the number of times the common power utility item 34a is opened and the common voltage common component 34a in the common open condition The execution mode of the drive control of the common use utility 34a such as the closing period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state when the open state occurs multiple times is also constant regardless of the game state It is. As a result, there is no need to change the mode of display control of the common view display unit 38a and the mode of drive control of the general purpose utility unit 34a according to the type of support mode. And the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, since the support mode is only one type, the normal gaming state in the present embodiment is a gaming state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the high probability state in the present embodiment is the high probability of the success or failure lottery mode. It is a game state which is a mode.

  Next, the per-random number counter C1 will be described. The per-random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one, for example, within the range of 0 to 599, and return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the per-random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random-number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the per-random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the per random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special view holding area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. Then, the determination of success or failure is performed using the value of the stored random number counter C1.

  The value of the random number to be won in the determination of the success or failure is stored in the main ROM 64 as a success or failure table. In the pass / fail table, as a pass / fail result, a big hit result, a small hit result, and an out result are set. The jackpot result is a success or failure result that can be a transition trigger to the open / close execution mode in which the special power prize device 32 is controlled to open / close, as well as a transition trigger to the pass / fail lottery mode. The small hit result is a success or failure result that does not become a transition trigger of the success or failure lottery mode while it becomes a transition trigger to the open / close execution mode in which the special power prize device 32 is controlled to open / close. The out result is a success or failure result that does not become a transition opportunity for the success or failure lottery mode without becoming a transition timing to the open / close execution mode.

  The opening / closing execution mode executed when the jackpot result is obtained is a round number defining mode which is executed with the predetermined number of round games as the upper limit. The round game continues until one of the conditions that the number of opening and closing times of the special power prize device 32 becomes the upper limit number and that a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls wins the special power prize device 32 is satisfied It is a game. In the present embodiment, the special power winning device 32 is opened and closed once in one round game, and the open continuation period in each round game is set to 29 seconds. Further, the number of winning prizes to the special power winning device 32 is set to ten. In the situation where the launch operation device 28 is being operated by the player, the game ball emission mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is emitted toward the game area PA in 0.6 seconds, so the round game The open continuation period of is set to a time longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the upper limit number of prizes for one round game. Therefore, in each round game, it can be expected that the game ball more than the winning upper limit number is won in the special power winning device 32. Further, the number of round games executed in the round number defining mode is different depending on the type of the jackpot result.

  In the opening and closing execution mode executed when a small hit results, round game is not set, the number of times of opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 is the upper limit number, and the game balls of the predetermined upper limit number This is an opening / closing number regulation mode which is ended based on satisfaction of one of the conditions for winning the special power winning device 32. A plurality of types of open continuation periods in one open cycle of the special power winning device 32 in the opening / closing number regulation mode are set. These open durations are set longer than the firing cycle of the game balls (specifically, 0.6 seconds), but the firing cycle of the game balls and the number of winning prizes (specifically, 10) There is a less-than-product period, a game ball firing cycle, and a more than product period of the winning upper limit number (specifically, ten). In the opening / closing execution mode executed when the small hit result is obtained, although the number is smaller than the opening / closing execution mode performed when the big hit result, it is possible to increase the player's possession.

  As the success or failure table, as shown in the explanatory views of FIG. 9A to FIG. 9D, of the first holding information stored in the first special view holding area 85 based on the winning on the first operation port 33. The second special information table used in the determination of the first special figure used in the determination of the second special information used in the determination of the second holding information stored in the second special view reserve area 86 based on the winning in the second operation port 34 A special drawing pass / fail table is set. Furthermore, the low probability table and the high probability table exist in the first special drawing success table, and similarly, the low probability table and the high probability table for the second special drawing There is a pass / fail table. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 refers to the different hit / fail tables different for the first hold information and the second hold information, and in either case, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are selected as the pass / fail lottery modes in the pass / fail determination. Existing.

  Specifically explaining each success or failure table, as shown in FIG. 9A, in the low probability of failure table for the first special figure, the number of random numbers to be the jackpot result is two (for example, “5”, “305” "), And the other is a value of a random number which is an outlier. That is, when the pass / fail determination is performed on the first hold information in the low probability mode and the pass / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, there is no small hit result of what may be either the jackpot result or the outlier result.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (b), in the high probability of failure table for the first special figure, the number of random numbers resulting in the jackpot is set larger than in the case of the low probability of failure table for the first special figure. Specifically, the number is 20 (for example, “5”, “34”, “65”, “130”, “163”, “192”, “220”, “245”, “276”, “305”. “334”, “365”, “392”, “420”, “470”, “495”, “520”, “558”, “575”, “599”). In this case, the value group of the per-random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the per random number counters C1 that is the big hit in the high probability mode. The other random numbers are outliers. That is, in the case where the pass / fail determination is performed on the first hold information in the pass / fail lottery mode being the high probability mode, there is no small hit result of one of the jackpot result and the outlier result.

  In the low probability of failure table for the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 9C, the value of the random number resulting in the big hit is the same as the case of the low probability of failure table for the first special figure. On the other hand, the value of the random number other than the random number that is the jackpot result is the value of the random number that is the small hit result. That is, in the case where the success or failure determination process is performed on the second hold information in the low probability mode in which the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, either the jackpot result or the small hitting result is obtained. Further, as the small hitting result, the first small hitting result, the second small hitting result, and the third small hitting result are set. Although the first small hitting result, the second small hitting result, and the third small hitting result will be described later in detail, the execution mode of the open / close execution mode is different. In addition, the winning probability of the first to third small hitting results is 199/600, which is the same.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (d), the high probability nonconforming table for the second special figure is the same as the high probability nonconforming table for the first special figure. Therefore, the number of random number values resulting in the jackpot will be greater than in the case of the low probability table for the second special view. On the other hand, the value of the random number other than the random number that is the jackpot result is the value of the random number that is the small hit result. That is, in the case where the pass / fail determination is performed on the second hold information with the pass / fail lottery mode being the high probability mode, either the jackpot result or the small hit result is obtained. As in the low probability pass / fail table for the second special drawing, the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result are set as the small hit results. The winning probability of the first to third small hitting results is almost the same at 193/600 or 194/600.

  As described above, when the second hold information serves as a trigger for the determination of the success or failure, a small hit result can be generated, thereby achieving a win for the second operation port 34, thereby responding to the small hit result. It becomes easy to generate the open / close execution mode. Then, the player can increase the ball a little by generating the open / close execution mode corresponding to the small hit result.

  In addition, if the probability that the high probability mode will be a big hit result is higher than the low probability mode, the number and the value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the low probability mode The value group of the per-random-number counter C1 may be configured to be partially included or not included in the value group of the per-random-number counter C1 that will be a big hit in the high probability mode. .

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29 and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special view reserve area 65a at the timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These jackpot results are set by making a difference in two conditions of the number of times of execution of the round game in the opening and closing execution mode, and the lottery condition in the lottery means after the opening and closing execution mode ends, a plurality of jackpot results There is.

  As shown in the explanatory views of FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b), 2R low probability results, 2R high probability results, 4R low probability results, 4R The high probability result, 6R low probability result, 6R high probability result, 10R low probability result, 10R high probability result, 16R low probability result, and 16R high probability result are set.

  2R low probability result and 2R high probability result is 2 rounds of round game execution in open / close execution mode, 4R low probability result and 4R high probability result is 4 round round execution in open / close execution mode, 6R low Probable results and 6R highly probable results show that the number of round game executions in the opening / closing execution mode is 6 times, and 10R unreliable results and 10R highly probable results show that the round games executed in the opening / closing execution mode is 10 times, 16R unreliable results The 16R high probability result is that the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is 16 times. In addition, 2R low probability result, 4R low probability result, 6R low probability result, 10R low probability result and 16R low probability result, the success or failure lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode Anyway, it becomes a low probability mode. This low probability mode will be the next big hit result, and will continue at least until it shifts to the open / close execution mode. On the other hand, the 2R high probability result, the 4R high probability result, the 6R high probability result, the 10R high probability result and the 16R high probability result indicate that the success or failure lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode Either way is the high probability mode. This high probability mode will be the next big hit result, and will continue at least until it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  As the distribution table, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the first feature used in the distribution determination of the first hold information acquired based on the winning on the first operation port 33 A distribution table for illustration and a distribution table for second special drawing used for distribution determination of the second hold information acquired based on the winning on the second operation port 34 are set.

  The distribution table for the first special figure, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), will be described in detail for each distribution table, as the type of jackpot result to be distributed, 2R low probability result, 2R high probability As a result, 4R low result, 4R high result, 6R low result, 6R high result, 10R low result, 10R high result, 16R low result and 16R high result are set. In the first special view sorting table, "0-1" corresponds to the 2R low probability result, "2-5" corresponds to the 2R high probability result, and "6 to 7" is 4R. "8 to 11" corresponds to the 4R high probability result, "12 to 13" corresponds to the 6R low probability result, and "14 to 17" corresponds to the 6R high probability It corresponds to the result, “18 to 19” corresponds to the 10R low probability result, “20 to 23” corresponds to the 10R high probability result, “24 to 25” corresponds to the 16R low probability result It corresponds, and "26-29" correspond to the 16R high probability result. In this case, 2R low probability result, 4R low probability result, 6R low probability result, 10R low probability result and 16R low probability result probability is about 6.7% respectively, 2R high probability result, 4R high probability result, The probability of the 6R high probability result, the 10R high probability result and the 16R high probability result is about 13% respectively. On the other hand, in the second special view distribution table, as shown in FIG. 10B, the 16R low probability result and the 16R high probability result are set as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. In the second special view distribution table, "0 to 9" corresponds to the 16R low probability result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the 16R high probability result. In this case, the probability of the 16R low probability result is about 33%, and this probability is 2R low probability result in the first special distribution table, 4R low probability result, 6R low probability result, 10R low probability result and It has the same probability that one of the 16R low probability results is selected. In addition, the probability of achieving 16R high probability result is about 67%, and this probability is 2R high probability result in the first special chart distribution table, 4R high probability result, 6R high probability result, 10R high probability result and 16R It is equal to the probability that one of the highly probable results is selected.

  In the first special view distribution table and the second special view distribution table, the probability of becoming the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode is the same when the jackpot is won. On the other hand, the average number of times the round game is executed is larger in the second special view distribution table than in the first special view distribution table. Therefore, as a type of jackpot result which can be selected when a jackpot is won, a prize in the second operation port 34 occurs than when a prize in the first operation port 33 occurs and an internal lottery is performed. It is advantageous for the player to perform the internal lottery.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect in the symbol display device 41. An expected effect includes the symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in the gaming machine that results in a predetermined jackpot, the symbol display device 41 in the gaming machine in which the final stop result is the corresponding result. Before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol in is started, it means the display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which the above-mentioned correspondence with correspondence result is likely to be obtained. In addition, specifically, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol in which the same number was attached | subjected on one effective line is stopped-displayed.

  In the expectation effect, two types of reach display and advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the occurrence of the response to an assignment in a stage before the reach display and the like are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying symbols for a part of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. The display state which performs the variation display of the symbol in the column is included. Also, while displaying combinations of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effects by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, or Also, it is possible to perform reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display surface after reducing or non-displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  In the advance notice display, after the variable display of the symbols is started on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows, or a part of the symbol rows is a plurality of symbols. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row. In addition, the background screen is a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, and the pattern on the symbol array is the predetermined mode different from the previous modes. Such advance notice may occur at any of the game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but it is higher when reach display is performed than when reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. In addition, in the game times corresponding to the small hitting result, it is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the game times corresponding to the out result are executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the main side ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. .

  On the other hand, the main control unit 60 does not determine whether to display the advance notice, but the sound emission control unit 81 determines. In this case, in the voice light emission control device 81, the game display corresponding to any of the big hit results is more likely to generate a notice display than the game play corresponding to the out result, and the notice display having a low appearance rate A lottery process for displaying a notice is performed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that are likely to occur. By the way, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed by the symbol display device 41.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the main CPU 63 determines the fluctuation display period in the special view display portions 37 a and 37 b and the fluctuation display period of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is repeatedly updated and acquired at the time of the start of the fluctuation display in the special view display portions 37a and 37b and the time of the fluctuation pattern determination at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process performed in order to advance a game in main side CPU63 is explained. The processes of the main CPU 63 can be roughly classified into a main process activated upon power-on and a timer interrupt process activated periodically (in a cycle of 4 msec in the present embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, power on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until the predetermined time for wait (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. The operation start and initialization of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the execution period of the power on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main CPU 63 is set (step S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power / fire control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and whether the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" or not It determines (step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum stored at power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data ( Step S107).

  In the pachinko machine 10, when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the start of business operation of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. In addition, when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set, or when the abnormality of the data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly shifts to the process of step S108. At step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, the process in step S108 is not performed under the condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Go to In step S109, power on setting processing is performed. In the power on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. In addition, after the process of step S109 is performed, a recognition process (step S110) for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and a data output for outputting various data to the reading device connected to the MPU 62. A process is performed (step S111). The details of the recognition process and the data output process will be described later.

  Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited at the stage when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is inhibited is canceled at the timing before the process of step S112 is completed and the process of step S112 is performed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process of step S111 ends, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S112 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 will not start processing for advancing the game until the situation is reached.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of step S112 to step S115. That is, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Although this remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining processes of step S112 to step S115 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining process of the step S112 to the step S115 is a non-periodic process which is executed non-periodically.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S112, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt disable setting is performed. In the following step S113, the random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S114, the variation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the present numerical value information is read out from the corresponding counter of the main side RAM 65, and the process of adding one to the read out numerical value information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S115, interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from the state where the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state where it is permitted. If the process of step S115 is performed, it will return to step S112 and will repeat the process of step S112-step S115.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, 4 msec cycle).

  First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption is received from the power interruption monitoring board 67, and when the occurrence of the power interruption is identified, the processing at power failure is executed and Become. In the power failure process, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, and the checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored.

  Thereafter, a lottery random number updating process is executed (step S202). In the random number updating process for drawing, the update of the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4 is executed. Specifically, after the current numerical information is sequentially read out from the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the general electric random number counter C4, and the read out numerical information is added one by one. Execute processing to overwrite the counter of reading source. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value updating process is performed as in step S113, and in step S204, the variation counter updating process is performed as in step S114.

  Thereafter, the fraud detection process is performed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred (step S205). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of plural types of events is monitored, and it is confirmed that a predetermined event has occurred, thereby setting “1” to the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65. In the subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set to the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, processing in step S207 and subsequent steps is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is performed. In the port output process, when setting of output information is performed in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing an output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32 b and 34 b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special power winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special power is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information to switch the common use utility 34 a in the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34 b for general use should be started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  Thereafter, the reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, reading of signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal is executed, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Thereafter, the ball entering detection process is executed (step S209). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from the respective ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read results, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 , And the presence or absence of the ball entering the second operation port 34 and the through gate 35. The details of the ball entering detection process will be described later.

  Thereafter, a timer update process is performed to collectively update numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 (step S210). In this case, the timer counter is stored in which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated, but both the update of the subtraction type timer counter and the update of the addition type timer counter are collectively performed. It is good also as composition.

  Thereafter, launch control processing for executing launch control of the gaming balls is executed (step S211). In the situation where the firing operation to the firing control device 28 is continued, one gaming ball is fired in 0.6 sec which is a predetermined firing cycle. In the following step S212, as input state monitoring processing, disconnection confirmation of each ball detection sensor 42a to 49a or opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 based on the information read in the reading processing of step S208. I do.

  Thereafter, special power control processing for executing execution control of game times and execution control of open / close execution mode is executed (step S213), and display control of the common view display unit 38a and drive control of the common control product 34a. The routine diagram general control control process to be performed is executed (step S214). The processing contents of the special view special power control process and the general view general control process will be described in detail later.

  In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the suspension information related to the special view display portions 37a, 37b in the special view hold display portions 37c, 37d The setting is performed, and the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the common drawing display unit 38 a on the common drawing reservation display unit 38 b is set. Further, in step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, the output information for updating the display contents of the special view display portions 37a and 37b is set, and the display of the common view display portion 38a Set the output information to update the content.

  Thereafter, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S216). Further, a payout output process for setting a winning ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Also, an external information setting process is performed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing result of various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time (step S218). Thereafter, a management output process is performed to output information corresponding to the ball entry result of the gaming ball in the gaming area PA to the management IC 66 (step S219). Details of the management output process will be described later.

<Set ball detection process>
Next, based on the detection result of each ball detection sensor 42a to 49a in the main CPU 63, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34 and the through The configuration for specifying the presence or absence of the game ball entering the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration for causing the main CPU 63 to receive detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a.

  The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. And, according to the voltage of each signal, the area where the information of “0” or “1” is stored is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, 0th bit D0-7th bit D7 are provided as the said area. Also, although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a, in order to limit the targets to be input simultaneously to eight types, the group of signals to be input to the input port 63a is determined by the driver IC. Switching is performed through switching control.

  In the entering detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), a signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set as a signal group from each entering detection sensor 42a to 49a. In such a setting, information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is stored in the zeroth bit D0, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the electric power detection sensor 45a. The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first operation port detection sensor 46a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second operation port detection sensor 47a. The 6-bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the out-port detection sensor 48a, and the seventh bit D7 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a. It is.

  Each of the above-mentioned ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal indicating that no detection is in progress as a detection signal when the passage of the game balls is not detected, and detects the passage of the game balls In this case, an HI level signal indicating that detection is in progress is output as a detection signal. Then, the input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when the LOW level signal is received, and "1" for the corresponding bit when the HI level signal is received. Store information. That is, in the situation where passage of the game ball is not detected in the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored for the corresponding bit, and passage of the game ball is In the detected situation, "1" information corresponding to the information indicating that the corresponding bit is being detected is stored.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the ball entering detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0, one first winning opening detection sensor 42a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S301: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S302), and the value of the ten prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S303). . The first output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42 a should be executed on the management IC 66. It is a flag. The ten prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the payout of ten game balls should be executed by the main CPU 63. When the value of the 10-prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10-prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) and When the command is output once, the value of the 10-prize ball counter is decremented by one. The payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that ten gaming balls are paid out when the ten prize ball command is received.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the first bit D1, one second winning opening detection sensor 43a is used. It is determined that a gaming ball has been detected (step S304: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S305), and the value of the 10-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S306) . The second output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be executed on the management IC 66. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the second bit D2, one third winning opening detection sensor 44a is used. It is determined that a gaming ball has been detected (step S307: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S308), and the value of the 10-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S309) . The third output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be executed on the management IC 66. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the third bit D3, one game ball is detected by the electric power detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S310: YES). In this case, the special power winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S311), and the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S312). The value of the 15-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S313). The special power winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that one gaming ball has entered the special power winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode. In the special figure special power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), it is confirmed that “1” is set to the special power prize flag, thereby entering one gaming ball to the special power prize device 32. It identifies that a ball has been generated, and subtracts 1 from the remaining number of ball that can be entered into the special power winning device 32 in the round game or opening / closing execution mode. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of ball that can enter the ball is executed, the special electric power winning flag is cleared to “0”. The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special power detection sensor 45 a should be executed to the management IC 66 . The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the payout of the 15 game balls should be executed by the main CPU 63. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the 15 prize balls are output. When the command is output once, the value of the 15-prize ball counter is decremented by one. The payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that fifteen gaming balls are paid out when the fifteen winning ball command is received.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information “1” is stored from the state in which the information “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4, one first operation port detection sensor 46a is used. It is determined that a gaming ball has been detected (step S314: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S315), and the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S316). Further, the value of the one-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S317). The first operation winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that one gaming ball has entered the first operation opening 33. In the special figure special power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), by confirming that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag, the reserve area RE of the special figure reserve area 65a is displayed. The processing of newly storing the suspension information is executed on condition that the number of the stored suspension information is less than four, which is the upper limit number. In the special power control process (step S213), it is confirmed that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag, and the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed to clear the first operating winning flag "0". Do. The fifth output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the management IC 66 should execute information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a. It is a flag. The one winning ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the payout of one gaming ball should be executed by the main CPU 63. When the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the one prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the one-prize ball counter is decremented by one. The payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one gaming ball is paid out, when the one winning ball command is received.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information “1” is stored from the state in which the information “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5, one second operation port detection sensor 47a is used. It is determined that a gaming ball has been detected (step S318: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S319), and the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S320). Further, the value of the one-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S321). The second operation winning flag is a flag for specifying that the main game CPU 63 has entered one game ball into the second operation opening 34. In the special view special power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), by confirming that "1" is set in the second operation prize flag, the reserve area RE of the special view reserve area 65a is displayed. The processing of newly storing the suspension information is executed on condition that the number of the stored suspension information is less than four, which is the upper limit number. Confirm that the second operation winning flag is set to "1" in the special electric power control process (step S213), and clear the second operation winning flag to "0" when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed. Do. The sixth output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the management IC 66 should execute information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6, one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. Is determined (step S322: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a should be executed to the management IC 66. is there.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It determines with having been detected (step S324: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the program control routine (step S214) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), it is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to “1”, whereby the general view stored in the program stop area 65c Execute processing to store the numerical value information of the current common charge random number counter C4 as the common drawing side holding information in the common drawing holding area 65c on condition that the number of holding information on the side is less than 4 which is the upper limit number. Do. It is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to “1” in the routine drawing control process (step S214), and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to “0”.

  Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is activated at a cycle of 4 msec as described above, when detection of one game ball is started by one ball detection sensor 42a to 49a, the ball is detected. In the situation where detection of one game ball is continued with detection sensors 42a-49a, it is specified that main game CPU 63 that one game ball is detected with the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a. To be done. Therefore, it is sufficient if one each of the first to seventh output flags is provided.

<Structure for Paying Out the Game Ball>
Next, the contents of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configurations of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 incorporates a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit and the like in addition to the payout side CPU 92 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit.

  The payout side ROM 93 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage unit) which does not require an external power supply to store and hold a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used as a read only memory. The dispensing side ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the dispensing side CPU 92 and fixed value data.

  The payout side RAM 94 is a memory (i.e., volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to store and retain the SRAM, DRAM, etc., and is used for both reading and writing. The dispensing side RAM 94 is capable of random access and has a faster reading time than the dispensing side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like in response to the execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

  The payout CPU 92 can perform two-way communication with the main CPU 63. The payout CPU 92 receives an award ball command from the main CPU 63, and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of gaming balls corresponding to the award ball command is dispensed. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the gaming balls can be properly paid out, and if it is determined that the gaming balls can not normally be paid out, the payout side RAM 94 Even in the situation where the number information of the number of unpaid winning balls is stored, the payout device 76 is stopped. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits to the main CPU 63 a payout restriction command indicating that it is not possible to properly pay out as described above. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 execute notification indicating that the gaming ball can not be properly paid out. The notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 as described above. In a state where it is not possible to pay out gaming balls normally, a full state in which the lower plate 56a is full with gaming balls, a ball non-supply state in which gaming balls are not replenished in the tank 75, and a payout device 76 Does not operate normally, there is a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. .

  A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided at an intermediate position of the gaming ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming ball is continuously detected in the full tank detection sensor as being full, and the state in which the gaming ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is canceled. In the case, it is specified that the full condition has been released.

  A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided at an intermediate position in the gaming ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that the ball is in the non-ball state when the game ball is not detected continuously by the non-ball detection sensor, and the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the non-ball detection sensor is released. Identify that the no-ball condition has been released.

  The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one gaming ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the gaming ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Further, the payout side CPU 92 determines that the payout abnormal state is in the case where the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor despite the drive control of the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. When the state where the gaming ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released, it is specified that the payout abnormal state is released.

  A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. When the dispensing side CPU 92 receives the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, it specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door open command to the main CPU 63 at the timing when it is determined that the front door frame 14 is opened from the closed state, and it is specified that the front door frame 14 is closed from the open state. The front door close command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing described above. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when the front door open command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when the front door closing command is received.

  A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11. If there is, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when the closing detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96, and the gaming machine when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It specifies that the main body 12 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at a timing when it is determined that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the opening state from the closing state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closing state from the opening state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the opening state when the main body opening command is received, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closing state when the main body closing command is received.

  The timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly activated in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  First, a full tank process is executed (step S401). In the full tank process, as described above, it is specified based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor whether or not it is full, and in the case of the full tank process, the process for stopping the payout of gaming balls And a command indicating that the tank is full is sent to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the full tank state is canceled, the processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state is canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the ball useless process is executed (step S402). In the ball useless processing, as described above, it is specified whether or not the ball is in the non-ball state based on the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor, and the process for stopping the payout of the game ball Along with execution, a command indicating that the ball is in a non-ball state is sent to the main CPU 63. Further, when the non-ball state is released, a process for making it possible to pay out the gaming ball is executed, and a command indicating that the non-ball state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the payout abnormality monitoring processing, as described above, whether or not the payout abnormal state is identified based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor is executed, and in the case of the payout abnormal state, processing for stopping the payout of the gaming ball is executed. At the same time, the main CPU 63 transmits a command indicating that it is in a payout abnormal state. In addition, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, a process of enabling the payout of the gaming ball is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state is canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S404). In the front door opening monitoring process, whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state is specified based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 as already described, and in the case where the front door frame 14 is in the open state A process of stopping the payout of the game balls is executed, and a front door open command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for making it possible to pay out the game balls is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S405). In the main body opening monitoring process, whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state is specified based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 as already described, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the opening state The main CPU 63 transmits a main body opening command to the main CPU 63 while executing processing for stopping the payout of the main CPU 63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, processing for enabling payout of gaming balls is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, command reading processing is executed (step S406). In the command reading process, the main CPU 63 executes a process of reading the award ball command transmitted. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S407), the payout of the gaming ball by the payout device 76 is performed. A payout control process is performed to control the execution of (step S408). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 has a value of 1 or more, drive control of the payout device 76 is performed, and one gaming ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. When it is determined, the value of the winning balls number information is decremented by one. Then, when the value of the winning balls number information becomes “0”, the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, an external information setting process is performed to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time (step S409).

<Configuration for External Output to Hall Computer HC>
Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97. The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, and is a part of external terminals, and a plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and a part of external terminals A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. By electrically connecting each of the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 with the external terminal board 97 in this manner, as shown in FIG. 15, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 externally transmit information to the hall computer HC. It is possible to output.

  One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. In detail, regarding the configuration of the electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided at an intermediate position of the signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is branched from the signal path SL1 directed from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92, and a branch path SL2 is provided. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal for opening the front door in the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 97. As a result, it is possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state, to the hall computer HC without the control by the payout side CPU 92.

  More specifically, the main body opening sensor 96 is provided with a branch path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 directed from the main body opening sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92 on the signal relay board 98. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result in the main body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for main body opening in the external terminal plate 97. As a result, it is possible to externally output a signal indicating whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without the control by the payout side CPU 92.

  Next, the contents of information externally output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

  In the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), the main CPU 63 performs the output setting of the information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 in the external terminal board 97. As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the pass / fail lottery mode is in the high probability mode, and one game cycle ended Information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls are out of the game area PA through any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 Information indicating that the game ball has been ejected, information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operation opening 33, and information indicating that the game ball has entered the second operation opening 34 are included. .

  The payout side CPU 92 performs output setting of information to each external terminal allocated to the payout side CPU 92 in the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S409) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16). Information that is output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that payout of ten gaming balls has been performed.

In the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of the payout of the gaming balls in the pachinko machine 10 according to the various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97. For example,
Outage rate in the normal game state that is not a high probability mode and a payout rate that is a ratio of the number of payout balls generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 Rate (Hereafter, let this withdrawal rate be "B")
-Outage rate in open / close execution mode-Outage rate in high probability mode-The number of times played until 100 game balls are ejected from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is " S "))
-B-S x "the number of prize balls for winning on the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34"
The number of game balls entered into the first operation opening 33 generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
The number of ball entry into the second operation opening 34 which occurred until 100 game balls were ejected from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2")
-B-(S1 x "number of prize balls for winning in first operation opening 33" + S2 x "number of prize balls for winning in second operation opening 34"
Etc are calculated. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the ball entering mode of the game balls in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of winning balls means the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the corresponding ball entry portion.

<Configuration for Managing the Prize Mode of the Game Ball>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the management IC 66. The MPU 62 further includes an I / F 101 and a reading terminal 102 in addition to the above.

  The I / F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from an external device of the MPU 62. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a through the input port of the I / F 101 and commands from the payout CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. Further, as a result of the main CPU 63 executing various processes, when the signal output is performed to the device such as the drive unit 32b for special power, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101, and As a result of the CPU 63 executing various processes, when command output is performed to the payout side CPU 92 and the audio light emission control device 81, the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

  The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting a reading device which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10 to the MPU 62, and is provided so that the connecting terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. . However, as described above, the main control substrate 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is accommodated in the substrate box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the substrate box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main control device 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminal 102, the substrate box 60a needs to be opened to expose the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 from being made illegal. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and an opening for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main control device 60 is formed in the substrate box 60a, and the reading for the substrate box 60a is not required. The reader 102 may be electrically connected to the terminal 102.

  The management IC 66 includes a management I / F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. Each of these devices is bi-directionally connected via an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66.

  The management-side I / F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the unidirectional communication signal path group 118 incorporated in the MPU 62, and the unidirectional signal paths 119 incorporated in the MPU 62. It is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the interface. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management I / F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management I / F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a signal path group 120 for two-way communication built in the MPU 62.

  The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an operation unit. The management side ROM 113 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require an external power supply to store and hold a NOR type flash memory, a NAND type flash memory, etc. The management ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management side RAM 114 is a memory (i.e., volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to store and retain SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The management side RAM 114 is capable of random access and has a faster read time than the management side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data etc. in response to the execution of the control program stored in the management side ROM 113.

  The RTC 115 is a real time clock, which constantly measures date information and time information, and can output date information and time information being measured in accordance with an instruction from the management CPU 112. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and can measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

  The correspondence relationship memory 116 is a memory (i.e., volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to store and retain the SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence relationship memory 116 stores correspondence relationship information between the buffers 122a to 122p provided at the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for Details of the contents of the correspondence relationship memory 116 will be described later.

  The history memory 117 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require an external power supply to store and hold a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information on the game ball entry received from the main CPU 63 through the management side I / F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

  Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I / F 111 will be described. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111. As shown in FIG.

  The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p is a signal to be input When the signal is LOW, information "0" is stored as the first data, and when the signal to be input is HI, information "1" is stored as the second data. The relationship between the LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

  A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a first signal of LOW level in a situation where a new gaming ball is not detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a When the ball is detected, the first signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the first signal of HI level is inputted to the first buffer 122a.

  A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is performed by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a When the ball is detected, the second signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the second signal of HI level is input to the second buffer 122 b.

  A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a third signal of LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and one game is generated by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, a third signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the third signal of HI level is input to the third buffer 122 c.

  A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal of the LOW level in a state where a new game ball is not detected by the special power detection sensor 45a, and one special game ball is detected by the special power detection sensor 45a. The fourth signal of HI level is output over a specific period of time. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fourth signal of the HI level is input to the fourth buffer 122 d.

  A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fifth signal of the LOW level in a state where a new gaming ball is not detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, and one game is performed by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a. When the ball is detected, the fifth signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal of the HI level is input to the fifth buffer 122 e.

  A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the sixth signal of the LOW level in a state where a new game ball is not detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a, and one game is performed by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. When a ball is detected, a sixth signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the sixth signal of the HI level is input to the sixth buffer 122 f.

  A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the seventh signal of the LOW level in a state where a new gaming ball is not detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a, and one gaming ball is detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a. In this case, the seventh signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the seventh signal of the HI level is input to the seventh buffer 122 g.

  An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122 h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in a state other than the open / close execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in a state in the open / close execution mode.

  A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not it is in the high probability mode period is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at the LOW level in a state not in the high probability mode, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at the HI level in a state in the high probability mode.

  A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122 j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the tenth signal of the LOW level in a state where the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues the tenth signal of the HI level in a state where the front door frame 14 is open Output.

  An output instruction signal for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize a trigger for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is input to the sixteenth buffer 122 p. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs an output instruction signal of LOW level in a situation where it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs an output instruction signal of HI level over a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. Do. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the output instruction signal of HI level is inputted to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

  Although the eleventh buffer 122 k, the twelfth buffer 122 l, the thirteenth buffer 122 m, the fourteenth buffer 122 n, and the fifteenth buffer 122 o can receive signals from the main CPU 63, the pachinko machine 10 does not receive normal signals. It is blank. As described above, the number of buffers 122a to 122p is larger than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10 as the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111. The management IC 66 can be diverted to a model different from that of the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p to correspond to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p on a one-to-one basis. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118k to 118o may not be formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked.

  That the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management side CPU 112 does not receive an instruction from the main side CPU 63. Can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, it has not been determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, and the types of these signals receive an instruction from the main CPU 63 Is identified by the management CPU 112. The identification of the types of these signals in the management CPU 112 will be described in detail later, but when the control is started in the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 with the supply of operation power to the MPU 62, the main CPU 63 sends the management CPU 112 This is performed by transmitting a type identification command. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116, and when the types of various signals are specified by the management CPU 112 in a situation where operating power is supplied. The information stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is referred to.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence relationship memory 116. As shown in FIG. In the correspondence relationship memory 116, the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o correspond to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 on a one-to-one basis It is provided.

  In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a by the management CPU 112. In addition, information indicating the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 as well as information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is in the first correspondence relationship area 123a (10 pieces) Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management CPU 112. In addition, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31 as well as information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is in the second correspondence relationship area 123b (10 pieces) Stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c by the management CPU 112. In addition, information indicating the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 as well as information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is in the third correspondence relationship area 123c (10 pieces) Stored.

  The fourth correspondence area 123 d stores information indicating that the special-purpose winning device 32 is used as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122 d by the management CPU 112. In addition, information (15 pieces) of the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the special electric winning device 32 as well as information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is in the fourth correspondence relationship area 123d. Stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that the first operation port 33 is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the fifth buffer 122e by the management CPU 112. In addition, information indicating the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the first operation opening 33, together with information indicating that it is the first operation opening 33 in the fifth correspondence relationship area 123e (one piece ) Is also stored. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating that the second operation port 34 is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the sixth buffer 122f by the management side CPU 112. In addition, information indicating the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the second operation opening 34 together with information indicating that it is the second operation opening 34 in the sixth correspondence relationship area 123 f (1 piece ) Is also stored. In the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating that the out port 24a is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the seventh buffer 122g by the management CPU 112.

  The eighth correspondence area 123 h stores information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122 h by the management side CPU 112. In the ninth correspondence area 123i, information indicating the high probability mode is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i by the management side CPU 112. The tenth correspondence area 123 j stores information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the front door frame 14 as information for specifying the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122 j by the management side CPU 112.

  The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k by the management side CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them. The twelfth correspondence area 1231 stores, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the twelfth buffer 1221 by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that it is a blank that does not correspond to any of them. The thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that the blank is not compatible with any of them. In the fourteenth correspondence area 123n, information indicating that the management side CPU 112 identifies the type of the signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is information indicating blank which does not correspond to any of them. In the fifteenth correspondence area 123o, information indicating that the management side CPU 112 specifies the type of the signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is information indicating blank which does not correspond to any of them.

  As described above, the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is specified by the management CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The management IC 66 can be diverted to a model different from that of the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66.

  Also, each time the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o perform signal output corresponding to the storage of history information, the type of signal is recognized in advance instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of the signal. The correspondence relationship memory 116 stores information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o based on the output information and the management side CPU 112 based on the output information. Configuration. Thus, each time the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o perform the signal output corresponding to the storage of the history information, the information for making the type of the signal recognized is output, the main signal output is performed each time It becomes possible to reduce the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112.

  Further, the output of information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management side CPU 112 is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. As a result, in a situation where a game is started in the pachinko machine 10, the management CPU 112 can specify the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o.

  Further, information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122 p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, not only the pachinko machine 10 but also other types of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66 are used to specify the type of signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122 p for an output instruction signal to be used reliably. It is possible to omit the process for Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of processing for identifying the type of such signal.

  Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117. As shown in FIG.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set sequentially, and a history information storage area 125 is set in correspondence with each piece of pointer information on a one-to-one basis. The history information storage area 125 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, and a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and as an area for storing correspondence information Data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When the correspondence information needs to be stored according to the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (in practice, the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10) First, the date information and time information measured in the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing RTC information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the current pointer information to be written. Thereafter, the correspondence relationship information corresponding to the buffer 122a to 122o that has become the information storage trigger this time is read out from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the read correspondence information Are stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written.

  Specifically, as for the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entering detection sensors 42a to 48a as already described. Therefore, in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116, information corresponding to the types of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of the ball entry unit corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, since the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a are all for detecting the game ball entering the general winning opening 31, these first to third winning openings In each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored. The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric symbol winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operation opening 33. The sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating the second operation opening 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating the out opening 24a. When the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage at this time are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the ball entry unit corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to seventh Information read out from any one of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g and the read type information of the ball entry part is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125.

  On the other hand, a signal indicating whether the eighth buffer 122 h is in the open / close execution mode is input, a signal indicating whether the ninth buffer 122 i is in the high probability mode is input, and the tenth buffer 122 j is A signal indicating whether the door frame 14 is open is input. Therefore, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h, and information indicating the high probability mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and a tenth correspondence area 123j is stored. Stores information indicating the front door frame 14.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the situation not in the opening / closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the situation in the opening / closing execution mode. The CPU 112 determines that the open / close execution mode is started when the eighth signal changes from low level to high level, and identifies that the open / close execution mode ends when the eighth signal changes from high level to low level It becomes possible. Then, in any of the cases where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and also from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 triggers storage of correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. To identify. That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is read out from the eighth correspondence area 123 h, but also the start information together, the history information storage area 125 In the area for storing the correspondence information of Further, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is read out from the eighth correspondence relationship area 123h, but also the end information, the history information storage area 125 In the area for storing the correspondence information of

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at the LOW level in the non-high probability mode and continuously outputs the ninth signal at the HI level in the high probability mode. The CPU 112 determines that the high probability mode is started when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and specifies that the high probability mode ends when the ninth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. It becomes possible. Then, in any of the cases where the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and also from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 triggers storage of correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. To identify. That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating that the high probability mode is read out from the ninth correspondence area 123i, but also the start information is stored in the history information storage area 125 In the area for storing the correspondence information of Further, when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high probability mode read out from the ninth correspondence area 123i, but also the end information, the history information storage area 125 In the area for storing the correspondence information of

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the tenth signal of the LOW level in the state where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the main CPU 63 In order to continuously output, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the management side CPU 112 determines that the front door frame 14 is opened, and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Can identify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, in any of the cases where the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and also from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 triggers storage of correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. To identify. That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the front door frame 14 read out from the tenth correspondence area 123 j, but also the opening start information is stored together with the history information The correspondence relationship information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing. When the tenth signal changes from HI level to LOW level, not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the front door frame 14 read out from the tenth correspondence area 123 j, but also the release end information is stored together with the history information. The correspondence relationship information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing.

  The history information storage area 125 can store all the history information generated during that period even if the business day on which firing of the gaming ball in the pachinko machine 10 is continued continues for 10 days from opening to closing. It is provided for a few minutes. For example, when history information is generated 60000 times a day, 600000 or more history information storage areas 125 are provided. Thus, all history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 separately from the history area 124. In the pointer area 126, information for specifying, by the management CPU 112, pointer information which is a current write target in the history memory 117 is stored. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating the pointer information of “0” as the write target is set in the pointer area 126. Then, each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the last order pointer information is to be written and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last order pointer information, the pointer is set so that the pointer information of “0” becomes the writing target The information in the area 126 is updated. As a result, when the history information storage trigger occurs exceeding the number of storable history information, new history information is sequentially overwritten from the history information storage area 125 where the old history information is stored. Become.

  Also, when reading of history information from the history memory 117 by the reading device occurs, the history information storage area 125 is all cleared to "0", and pointer information of "0" is to be written. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that has once been read from becoming read again.

  Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing, in the correspondence relationship memory 116, information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 and the types of signals will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed at step S110 in the main process (FIG. 11).

  First, "15" is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S501). The output counter for recognition uses the remaining number of times of information output necessary for the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal each buffer 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management I / F 111 corresponds to. It is a counter for specifying in the main CPU 63. As described above, fifteen of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be recognized as signal types, so "15" is set in the recognition output counter.

  Thereafter, output processing of the identification start command is executed (step S502). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. The first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used for the command output. That is, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a are utilized by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store the history information. A command output is performed to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal the. Thereby, the number of signal paths is reduced as compared with the configuration in which the signal paths for performing the command output are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. Further, the period for outputting the identification start command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal to HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output states of the identification start command and the ninth signal. It is done. By receiving the identification start command, the management CPU 112 should start processing for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

  Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read out from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first buffer 122a is first set as a signal type setting target, and thereafter, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are set so that an n + 1th buffer is set as a signal type setting target next to the nth buffer. The recognition setting of the signal type to be Therefore, if the recognition output counter is "15" to "13", the type identification command indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 and the number of winning balls is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "12" The type identification command indicating the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read, and if the recognition output counter is "11", the type identification command indicating the first operation port 33 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is "10", the second operation port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of balls are read out, and if the recognition output counter is "9", the out port 24a is displayed. If the output counter for recognition is “8”, the type identification command for indicating the open / close execution mode is read out, and the output counter for recognition is read out. If "7", the type identification command indicating the high probability mode is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "6", the type identification command indicating the front door frame 14 is read out, and the recognition output counter If “5” to “1”, the type identification command indicating blank is read out.

  Thereafter, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S504). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity as in the identification start command, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. Also, the output period of the identification type command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output states of the identification type command and the ninth signal. It is done. By receiving the identification type command, the management CPU 112 responds to the identification type command in correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffer which is the target of the present setting among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. Information to be stored.

  Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one (step S505), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S506). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S506: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after one subtraction is executed (step S503 and Step S504).

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S506: YES), the output process of the identification end command is executed (step S507). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. Further, the period for outputting the identification end command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal to HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output states of the identification end command and the ninth signal. It is done. By receiving the identification end command, the management CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of the signals in the correspondence memory 116 is completed. Do.

  Next, management processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main CPU 63, and the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) is started after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) is started in the main CPU 63. The combination of the processes after step S606 in the management process is performed 16 times or more before the start of the process.

  If the identification start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter for specifying the types of the buffers 122 a to 122 o which are the target of setting of the signal type by the management CPU 112. The first buffer 122a is first set as a signal type setting target, and thereafter, the nth buffer is next to an n + 1th buffer target.

  Thereafter, under the condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116, the type identification received this time in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 Stores information on the signal type set in the command. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S605).

  If a negative determination is made in step S603, or if the process of step S605 is performed, it is determined whether an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). When the identification end command is not received (step S606: NO), the process returns to step S603, and on condition that a type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), step S604 and step S605 are performed. Execute the process again.

  If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processing of step S607 and step S608 is repeatedly executed. Although details will be described later in step S 607, history setting processing for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. In step S608, although the details will be described later, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is executed.

  FIG. 23 is a time chart showing how the correspondence relationship memory 116 stores correspondence information between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122o. FIG. 23A shows a period during which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). b) shows a period during which the output state of the ninth signal is HI level, and FIG. 23 (c) shows the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o. The execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed is shown. FIG. 23D shows the timing when the correspondence setting process (step S604) is executed in the management CPU 112.

  As the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. Ru. Further, at the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 23 (b). Thereafter, at the timing of t2, which is a situation where the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 23 (b). The management CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped by confirming the information of (1). In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S601 of the management processing (FIG. 22). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23A, the output of the identification start command is stopped at the timing of t3.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 23A, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t4. Further, at the timing of t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 23 (b). After that, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 23B at time t5 at which the output of the type identification command is continued. The management CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are provided. The content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped by confirming the information. In this case, since the first type identification command is received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 23 (d) at the timing of t5. In the correspondence setting process, information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 and information of the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. After that, as shown in FIG. 23A, the output of the type identification command is stopped at the timing of t6.

  Then, at timing t7 to timing t9, timing t10 to timing t12, timing t13 to timing t15, and timing t16 to timing t18, respectively, as in timing t4 to timing t6, The correspondence setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the fifteenth type identification command is completed at timing t16 to timing t18.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23A, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t19. Further, at the timing of the t19, as shown in FIG. 23B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. After that, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are provided. The content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped by confirming the information. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management CPU 112 ends at timing t20 as shown in FIG. 23C. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23A, the output of the identification end command is stopped at the timing of t21.

  As described above, the management CPU 112 is configured to recognize whether the command is output using the ninth signal, thereby instructing the management CPU 112 to store the history information. Even when the command output is performed using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) to be used, the management CPU 112 clearly indicates that the command is output. It becomes possible to make it recognize.

  Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

  First, "10" is set in the management object counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S701). The management target counter specifies with the main CPU 63 whether or not there is a management target that is not the target of specifying whether the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in the management output processing this time. At the same time, the main CPU 63 is a counter for specifying which management target the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed. The target to be identified by the main CPU 63 as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process is seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, It is a total of ten pieces of the presence or absence of execution of the opening / closing execution mode, the presence or absence of execution of the high probability mode, and the presence or absence of opening / closing of the front door frame 14. Therefore, first, "10" is set to the management target counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the value of the current management target counter is HI level (step S702). If it is not the HI level (step S702: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter is 4 or more, and the management target corresponding to the value of the management target counter is seven ball entry detection sensors 42a It is specified whether it is any one of a 48a (step S703).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether "1" is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S704). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is "1" or not. If the value of the management target counter is "9" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether the second output flag is "1" or not, and the value of the management target counter If the value is "8" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether the third output flag is "1" or not, and the value of the management target counter is "7" If there is a special power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the fourth output flag is "1" or not, and the value of the management target counter is "6", and the first operation port detection sensor 46a The fifth output flag is “1” when it corresponds to If the value of the control target counter is "5" and corresponds to the second operation port detection sensor 47a, then whether "1" is set in the sixth output flag It is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter is "4" and corresponds to the out port 24a, it is determined whether "1" is set in the seventh output flag. As described above, “1” is set to the first to seventh output flags in the ball entering detection process (FIG. 14).

  If "1" is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is HI (Step S705). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter is cleared to "0" (step S706).

  If a negative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether a trigger to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the HI level has occurred (step S707). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the transition to the open / close execution mode has occurred when the value of the management target counter is “3”, and is high when the value of the management target counter is “2”. It is determined whether or not transition to the probability mode has occurred, and if the value of the management target counter is “1”, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 has become open. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the HI level (step S708).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined whether a trigger to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is 4 or more and the current management target is any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is used. It is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the corresponding signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. The HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S 607) of the management process (FIG. 22) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level It is a period during which the management CPU 112 can reliably specify the state. If the value of the management target counter is "3" and the current management target is the open / close execution mode, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is "2" If the current managed object is the high probability mode, it is determined whether the high probability mode has ended, and if the value of the managed object counter is “1” and the current managed object is the front door frame 14 Determines whether the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. When the trigger to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S710).

  When a negative determination is made in step S704, when the process of step S706 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step S707, when a process of step S708 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step S709, or When the process of S710 is executed, the value of the management target counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether the value of the management target counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S712). If the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S 712: NO), the processing of step S 702 and subsequent steps is executed for the management target corresponding to the new value of the management target counter.

  Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 22).

  First, the number of buffers to be checked in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas storing information other than the information indicating blank is specified, and the specification The set number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, since information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j as described above, “10” is set in the check target counter in step S801. Do.

  After that, it is confirmed whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S802). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are the check targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is the check target of numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the target of confirmation of numerical information. .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S802, date information and RTC information which is time information are read from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 which is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information which is the writing target is identified. The RTC information read in step S 803 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence relationship information is read out from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current check target counter, and the correspondence relationship information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the write target. If the correspondence information is any of information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in effect, information indicating that the high probability mode is in effect, and information indicating that the front door frame 14 is present, the above writing Not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the target pointer information. When the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence areas 123 a to 123 o are read targets of the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth correspondence area 123 j is the read target of the correspondence information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123 e is the correspondence relation It becomes an object of reading information.

  In the case where the value of the check target counter is any of the out-port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 by executing the writing process as described above In the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 The combination of (1) and (2) correspondence relationship information indicating one of the above is stored as history information. If the value of the check target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14, RTC information and the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written are The combination of the correspondence information indicating that the mode is the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, or the front door frame 14 and the start information is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, the target pointer is updated (step S805). In the updating process, numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the 1 addition has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S802, or if the process of step S805 is executed, the signal output is switched to the LOW level in correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current check target counter. It is determined whether correspondence relationship information to be checked is stored (step S806). Specifically, when the value of the current check target counter is “8” to “10”, the corresponding correspondence area 123 h to 123 j is information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in, and the high probability mode Since either information indicating that the information is stored or information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S806.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S806, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "1" to "0". It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S807). If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, RTC information is read (step S808) as in step S803, and a process of writing in the history memory 117 is executed (step S809). In the write process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, the correspondence relationship information is read out from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current check target counter, and the correspondence relationship information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the write target. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14 by executing the write process in this manner, the value corresponds to the pointer information to be written. A combination of RTC information and correspondence information indicating that the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, or the front door frame 14 is the end information is stored in the history information storage area 125 as history information. It becomes a state. Thereafter, as in step S805, the target pointer update process is executed (step S810).

  If a negative determination is made in step S806, a negative determination is made in step S807, or if the process of step S810 is performed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S812). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (NO in step S812), the processing in step S802 and subsequent steps is executed on the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 26 (a) shows a period in which a signal of HI level is inputted to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 26 (b) shows a signal of HI level inputted to an eighth buffer 122h. 26C shows a period during which a signal of HI level is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 26D shows a period of inputting a signal of HI level to the tenth buffer 122j. A period is shown, and FIG. 26E shows a write timing of history information to the history memory 117.

  At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 26A, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, the history information is written in the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. 26 (e) at the timing of t1. Thereafter, at time t2, as shown in FIG. 26A, the signal switched to HI level at time t1 is switched to LOW level. However, since the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and switching of the LOW level is not a storage target of history information, the timing of FIG. As shown in e), writing of history information is not performed.

  Thereafter, at timing t3, timing t5, timing t6, timing t9, timing t10, timing t13, and timing t14, as shown in FIG. 26A, the first to seventh buffers 122a are formed. The output state of the signal input to any one of to 122 g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 26B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes HI level from timing t4 to timing t7. The eighth buffer 122 h corresponds to the presence or absence of the open / close execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26E, the timing of t4, which is the timing when the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level The history information is written at each of the timings of t7. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t4 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t7 includes the end information. Thus, the execution period of the open / close execution mode can be grasped by confirming the history information of the history memory 117.

  In addition, history information is written to the history memory 117 in the order of elapsed time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that ball entry to any of out port 24a, general winning a prize port 31, special power prize winning device 32, first operation port 33 and second operation port 34 has occurred is in the open / close execution mode It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes the RTC information, any of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 can be obtained by comparing the RTC information. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not history information indicating that a ball has entered a ball is in the open / close execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 26C, the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to the presence or absence of the high probability mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26E, the timing of t8, which is the timing when the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level The history information is written at each of the timings of t11 which is In this case, the history information written at the timing of t8 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t11 includes the end information. Thus, the execution period of the high probability mode can be grasped by confirming the history information of the history memory 117.

  In addition, history information is written to the history memory 117 in the order of elapsed time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that the ball has entered into any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is in the high probability mode It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes the RTC information, any of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 can be obtained by comparing the RTC information. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not history information indicating that a ball has entered a ball is in the high probability mode.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j becomes HI level from timing t12 to timing t15. The tenth buffer 122 j corresponds to the presence or absence of the opening of the front door frame 14. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26E, the timing of t12, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level The history information is written at each of the timings of t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t12 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t15 includes the end information. As a result, by checking the history information of the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the period in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

  In addition, history information is written to the history memory 117 in the order of elapsed time. Therefore, while the front door frame 14 is open, history information indicating that entry of the ball into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 has occurred. It is possible to distinguish whether it is or not. Further, since the history information includes the RTC information, any of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 can be obtained by comparing the RTC information. It becomes possible to distinguish whether the history information indicating that the ball has entered the ball is the opening of the front door frame 14 or not.

  Next, a processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 11).

  In the data output process, it is first determined whether a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when being electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and an affirmative determination is made in step S901 when the connection signal is received through the reading terminal 102. do.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, the present data output processing is ended. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62. Thus, in order to externally output the history information, it is necessary to start supply of operating power to the MPU 62 in a state where the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. . Since the power supply operation unit for performing the stop operation and the start operation of the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, the outer frame 11 is required to perform the stop operation and the start operation. It is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 to expose the back of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to externally output the history information, it is necessary to start supply of operating power to the MPU 62 while the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With the above configuration, even if an operation other than the game hall manager attempts to read the history information, it can be difficult to do so.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is the main ROM 64 by determining whether or not the signal for control information confirmation is received from the reading terminal 102. It is determined whether it corresponds to the confirmation of the control information (program and data) of (step S902). The reading device is configured to be able to check both the control information and the history information, and when confirmation of the control information is selected by a manual operation on the reading device, the reading device is used to confirm the control information. A signal is transmitted, and when the confirmation of the history information is selected by a manual operation on the reader, the signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reader. The present invention is not limited to this, and the reading device for control information confirmation and the reading device for history confirmation may be different. In this case, when a reading device for control information confirmation is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for control information confirmation is transmitted from the reading device, and a reading for history confirmation is sent to the reading terminal 102. When the device is electrically connected, the reader transmits a signal for history confirmation.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, an output process for control information confirmation is executed (step S903). In the output process, the program and data are read from the main ROM 64 as control information, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the control information can be read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and it is confirmed whether the control information is normal or normal. It is possible to do

  If a negative determination is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the output instruction signal of HI level is inputted to the sixteenth buffer 122p. By switching the output state of the output instruction signal to the HI level, the management CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information. The process will be described in detail later.

  When the process of step S 903 is performed or when the process of step S 904 is performed, it is determined whether the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S 905). When continuing (step S 905: YES), it waits in step S 905 as it is. This makes it possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S 905: NO), the data output process is ended.

  Next, an external output process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

  When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1001: YES), a process for outputting history information in step S1002 and subsequent steps is executed. Specifically, first, the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the out port 24a is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is counted to obtain the out port 24a. The number of hits is calculated (step S1002). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, entering the general winning opening 31 The number is calculated (step S1003). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the player enters the special electric winning device 32. The number is calculated (step S1004). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the first operation port 33 can be obtained. The number of hits is calculated (step S1005). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the second operation opening 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the second operation opening 34 can be obtained. The number of hits is calculated (step S1006).

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, and correspondence that indicates that it is the front door frame 14. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out door that occurs in the state where the front door frame 14 is in the open state The number of balls entered into each of the general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, first operation opening 33 and second operation opening 34 is calculated (step S1007). History information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, correspondence information that indicates the front door frame 14, and The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Moreover, in the whole pointer information which becomes a serial number, the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the history information storage area 125 where the start information is stored and the correspondence that indicates that it is the front door frame 14 In the case where there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the number of ball entries for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and start information, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 If the correspondence information and start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored is not stored in the history information storage area 125 in which is stored, the correspondence information and start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored All pieces of history information of the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to the time later than the history information storage area 125 being stored is stored are treated as the front door frame 14 in the open state.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1002 to step S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated during opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1007 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in each of steps S1002 to S1006. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls in out-port 24a calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls calculated in step S1002 is the number K1 of balls, and it is calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls calculated in step S1003. The difference in the number of ball entry of the special winning opening 31 is the number of ball K2, and the difference in the number of balls of the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 to the number of balls calculated in step S1004 is the number K3 of balls. The difference between the number of balls in first operation port 33 calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls calculated in step S1005 is the number K4 of balls and is calculated in step S1007 for the number of balls calculated in step S1006. The difference in the number of balls in the second operation opening 34 is referred to as the number of balls K5.
First parameter: total payout number of play balls (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "first operation opening The ratio of the total number of game balls (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) discharged from the skill area PA (hereinafter, this ratio) "D1")
-Second parameter: Total number of game balls entering general winning opening 31 / Percentage of total number (K1 + K 2 + K 3 + K 4 + K 5) of gaming balls discharged from gaming area PA-Third parameter: gaming ball to special electric winning device 32 Total entry number K3 / Percentage of total number (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) of gaming balls discharged from the game area PA · Fourth parameter: Total entry number of game balls to the first operation opening 33 K 4 / Discharge from the game area PA The percentage of the total number of game balls played (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter referred to as "D2")
The fifth parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the second operation opening 34 K5 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D3”)
Sixth parameter: D1− (D2 × “number of prize balls for winning in first operation port 33” + D3 × “number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34”)
· Seventh parameter: (K3 × "number of prize balls for winning in special power winning device 32" + K5 × "number of prize balls for winning in second operation opening 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "general" Number of winning balls for winning in the winning opening 31 + K3 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K 4 × “number of winning balls for winning in the first operation opening 33” + K 5 × “second operation opening 34 Ratio of winning balls to winnings)) 8th parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning on special electric winning device 32” / total payout number of gaming balls (K 2 × for winning in general winning opening 31 Number of prize balls "+ K3 x" Number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 x" Number of prize balls for winning on first operation port 33 "+ K5 x" Number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34 ') Percentage then the notes for history Using the newest RTC information oldest RTC information in the history for the area 124 of the 117, the history information being the object of this operation is to calculate the total time it took to be extracted every (step S1009). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1010). In the first output process, all pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. The various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is output to the reading terminal 102. Thus, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information to be output in the first output process is read.

  Thereafter, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is the open / close execution mode and start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode, By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the out opening 24 a which occurs in the open / close execution mode, the general winning opening 31 The number of balls to be entered into each of the special power prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 is calculated (step S1011). History information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and start information are stored, correspondence information indicating the opening / closing execution mode, and end information The period between the history information storage area 125 in which is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information which is a sequential number, history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode and start information is stored, correspondence information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode, In the case where there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the number of ball entry for each section is calculated. Although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is the open / close execution mode and start information is stored, RTC information corresponding to a later time than the history information storage area 125 is When the correspondence information indicating that the mode is the open / close execution mode and the start information are not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating that the mode is the open / close execution mode and the start information are stored. All pieces of history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to the time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored are treated as those in the open / close execution mode.

  Thereafter, out of the periods in the open / close execution mode specified in step S1011, the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and The number of balls in each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1012). The method of calculating the number of balls entered is the same as that of step S1007 except that the period of the open / close execution mode specified in step S1011 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1011 and step S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated during opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1012 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1012 and the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1011 is the number of balls K11, and the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1011. The difference between the number of balls in the general winning opening 31 calculated at step S1012 and the number of balls is the number of balls K12, and the special electric winning device calculated at step S1012 for the number of special electric winning devices 32 calculated at step S1011. The difference in the number of balls in the first operation port 33 calculated in step S1012 to the number of balls in the first operation port 33 calculated in step S1011 is the difference in number of balls in the number of balls K13. In step S1012, the number of balls in the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1011 is calculated using the number K14. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K15 was.
-11th parameter: Total payout number of game balls (K12 x "Number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "1st operation opening 33 The number of winning balls for winning in the game + K15 × the number of winning balls for winning in the second operation opening 34) / The ratio of the total number of gaming balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) discharged from the gaming area PA (hereinafter referred to as “this ratio” D11 ”)
Twelfth parameter: Total entry number of gaming balls to general winning opening 31 / proportion of total number (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) of gaming balls discharged from gaming area PA. Thirteenth parameter: gaming ball to special power prize device 32 The total number of ball entry K13 / The ratio of the total number (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA · The fourteenth parameter: The total number of gaming balls to the first operation opening 33 K14 / discharging from the gaming area PA The ratio of the total number of game balls played (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D12")
Fifteenth parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the second operation port 34 (K15) / the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) discharged from the game area PA (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”)
Sixteenth parameter: D11− (D12 × “number of prize balls for winning in first operation port 33” + D13 × “number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34”)
・ The 17th parameter: (K13 × “number of prize balls for winning in special power winning device 32” + K 15 × “number of prize balls for winning in second operation opening 34”) / total number of game balls paid out (K12 × “general Number of winning balls for winning in the winning opening 31 + K 13 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K 14 × “number of winning balls for winning in the first operation opening 33” + K 15 × “second operation opening 34 Ratio of winning balls to winnings)) 18th parameter: K 13 × “number of winning balls for winning on special electric winning device 32” / total payout number of gaming balls (K 12 × for winning in general winning opening 31 Number of prize balls "+ K13 x" Number of prize balls for winning in special electric winning device 32 "+ K 14 x" Number of prize balls for winning in first operation port 33 "+ K 15 x" Number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34 ") Thereafter, the second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information to be output in the second output process is read.

  Thereafter, history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is in the high probability mode and start information are stored in history area 124 of history memory 117, correspondence information indicating that it is in high probability mode, By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the out opening 24 a which occurs in the high probability mode, the general winning opening 31 The number of balls entered into each of the special electric power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 is calculated (step S1015). History information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is in the high probability mode and start information are stored in history area 124 of history memory 117, correspondence information indicating that it is in high probability mode, and end information The period between the history information storage area 125 in which is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Moreover, in the whole pointer information which becomes a serial number, history information storage area 125 where correspondence information indicating that it is in the high probability mode and start information are stored, correspondence information indicating that it is in the high probability mode, In the case where there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the number of ball entry for each section is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is the high probability mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is When the correspondence information indicating that the high probability mode is stored and the start information are not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and the start information are stored. All pieces of history information in the history information storage area 125 storing RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 are treated as those in the high probability mode.

  Thereafter, out of the periods in the high probability mode specified in step S1015, the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and The number of balls in each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1016). The method of calculating the number of balls is the same as that of step S1007 except that the period of the high probability mode specified in step S1015 is assumed.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1015 and step S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated during opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1016 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1015. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference in the number of balls in the out-port 24a calculated in step S1016 to the number of balls in the out-port 24a calculated in step S1015 is the number K21 of balls, and the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1015. The difference in the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1016 to the number of balls is referred to as the number K22 of balls entered, and the special power prize device calculated in step S1016 relative to the number of balls of special power prize device 32 calculated in step S1015. The difference in the number of balls in the first operation port 33 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls in the first operation port 33 calculated in step S1015 is defined as the difference in number of balls K23. It is set as the number K24, and is calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of ball entry of the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1015. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K25 was.
21st parameter: Total payout number of game balls (K 22 × “number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31” + K 23 × “number of balls for winning in special electric winning device 32” + K 24 × “first operation opening 33 The number of winning balls for winning in the game + K 25 × the number of winning balls for winning in the second operation opening 34) / the ratio of the total number (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (hereinafter, this ratio D11 ”)
22nd parameter: Total entry number of gaming balls to general winning opening 31 / total number of gaming balls discharged from gaming area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ratio 23rd parameter: gaming ball to special power prize device 32 Of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ratio · The 24th parameter: The total number of game balls entering the first operation opening 33 K24 / discharge from the game area PA The ratio of the total number (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) of game balls played (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D22")
Twenty-fifth parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the second operation opening 34 K25 / the total number of game balls (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) discharged from the game area PA (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D23")
Twenty-sixth parameter: D21− (D22 × “number of prize balls for winning in first operation port 33” + D23 × “number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34”)
Thereafter, the third output process is executed (step S1018). In the third output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. Thus, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information to be output in the third output process is read. Thereafter, the clear process is executed (step S1019). In the clear processing, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is all cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized.

<Configuration of Tokusen Winning Device 32>
Next, the configuration of the special power prize device 32 will be described. FIG. 29 is a front view of the game board 24 showing an enlarged area where the special power prize device 32 is provided.

  The special power winning device 32 is provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA as described above. The position where the special power winning device 32 is provided is an intermediate position in the vertical direction in the right side area PA3. At the intermediate position, the special power winning device 32 is at the right side of the display surface of the symbol display device 41 in the center frame 36a. It extends in the lateral direction from a right frame portion 36g to the right end portion of the game area PA. By providing the special power winning device 32 by extending in the lateral direction as described above, the gaming balls flowing down the right side area PA3 surely pass through the area where the special power winning device 32 is provided.

  The special power winning device 32 has a passage forming body 201 in which the upstream region of the fourth discharge passage 45 is formed, an opening / closing member 202 for blocking or allowing the game ball to enter the fourth discharge passage 45, and an opening / closing member And a guide member 203 for guiding the movement of the movable member 202. The passage forming member 201 is integrated with the right frame portion 36g of the center frame 36a, and protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the surface of the game board 24. An upstream region 45 c of the fourth discharge passage 45 is formed in the passage forming body 201 so that the inlet 45 b exists in the right wall portion 201 a of the passage forming body 201.

  The inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 is opened to the right, and the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 can enter the ball. The upstream area 45c of the fourth discharge passage 45 is inclined downward to the left in the area continuing from the entrance 45b, but on the downstream side, the gaming ball is led to the back side of the game board 24 As the passage direction changes, the passage direction changes so that the game ball is led out below the gaming board 24. The outlet of the upstream area 45c of the fourth discharge passage 45 is on the back side of the game board 24, and the downstream area 45d of the fourth discharge passage 45 provided on the back side of the game board 24. It is connected with the entrance. The downstream region 45 d of the fourth discharge passage 45 extends vertically downward to the gaming board 24. With the above-described configuration, the gaming ball having entered the fourth discharge passage unit 45 is discharged downward of the gaming board 24 on the back side of the gaming board 24. As described above, the fourth discharge passage unit 45 is provided with a special power detection sensor 45a for detecting the gaming ball entered into the fourth discharge passage unit 45 (that is, the gaming ball entered into the special power winning device 32) However, the special power detection sensor 45 a is installed in the passage forming body 201.

  An opening and closing member 202 is provided to open and close the inlet 45 b of the fourth discharge passage 45. 30 is a perspective view of the opening and closing member 202. FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the passage forming member 201 and the opening and closing member 202 showing how the inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 is opened and closed by the opening and closing member 202. FIG. 32 is a plan view of the opening / closing member 202 and the drive unit 32b for the special power.

  The opening and closing member 202 is formed of a synthetic resin, and is horizontally long as shown in FIG. 30, and has a rectangular base portion 211 having a predetermined width in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 and a width of the base portion 211. And a blocking portion 212 which is vertically formed on one end side of the direction and integrally formed on the base portion 211. The base portion 211 is formed with an opening 213 penetrating the base portion 211 in the longitudinal direction. The opening 213 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the dimension in the back and forth direction of the pachinko machine 10 is set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball and smaller than twice the diameter of the gaming ball. In addition, the dimension in the lateral direction of the opening 213 is set to a multiple of the diameter of the gaming ball or more, and specifically, it is larger than 5 times the diameter of the gaming ball and smaller than 6 times the diameter of the gaming ball It is done. The position where the opening portion 213 is formed is a position biased to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 in the base portion 211, but is an intermediate position in both the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction in the base portion 211. There is a plate-like portion around the opening 213.

  A blocking portion 212 is formed in the base portion 211 so as to stand upward from the left peripheral edge of the opening portion 213. The blocking portion 212 is formed in a plate shape, and a pair of front and back plate surfaces face in the lateral direction. More specifically, the blocking portion 212 more specifically blocks the inflow of gaming balls from the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45, as shown in FIG. 31A. It is set to a size that can be completely closed.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, the opening / closing member 202 is supported by the passage forming member 201 and the guide member 203 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29, the guide member 203 is provided to extend laterally from the right end of the game area PA to the front of the passage forming body 201. The passage forming body 201 and the guide member 203 are provided with slide through holes 221 which penetrate the game board 24 in the longitudinal direction of the pachinko machine 10. The slide through hole 221 is formed one size larger than the outer edge portion of the opening and closing member 202 in a front view. The opening and closing member 202 is inserted into the slide through hole 221, and the opening and closing member 202 can slide in the longitudinal direction of the pachinko machine 10 along the slide through hole 221.

  When inserted in the slide through hole 221, the blocking portion 212 of the opening / closing member 202 is positioned close to the right side plate surface of the right wall portion 201a where the inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 is formed in the passage forming member 201 Will face each other. Although the distance between the right side plate surface of the right wall portion 201a and the blocking portion 212 is set to be less than the radius of the gaming ball, the blocking portion 212 enters the ball of the gaming ball into the fourth discharge passage 45 The distance is arbitrary as long as it can be blocked, and the right side plate surface of the right wall portion 201a is in contact with the blocking portion 212, and the blocking portion 212 of the right wall portion 201a moves when the opening / closing member 202 moves. It may be configured to slide on the right side plate surface.

  The opening / closing member 202 is, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), a closed position where the inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212, and as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the fourth discharge passage The blocking portion 212 is moved to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 from the 45 entrance portions 45b, and the entrance portions 45b can be moved to the right side to the open position where they are opened. Further, as shown in FIG. 32, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the opening and closing member 202, a drive unit 32b for special power is provided for sliding the opening and closing member 202 in the front and back direction of the pachinko machine 10. The drive unit 32b for special power is a solenoid which is an electric actuator. In the non-driven state where the drive signal is not output from the main CPU 63 to the drive unit 32b for special power, the biasing force of the biasing member 225 of the drive unit 32b for special power outputs the output unit 226 of the drive unit 32b for special power. Are placed in the protruding position. On the other hand, in the drive state in which the drive signal is output from the main CPU 63 to the drive unit 32b for special power, the output unit 226 is provided with a pulling force toward the back of the pachinko machine 10 to the output unit 226. Is moved to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 against the biasing force of the biasing member 225 and disposed at the retracted position. The front end of the output unit 226 is connected to the rear end of the opening and closing member 202. Therefore, when the drive unit 32b for special power is in a non-driving state and the output unit 226 is disposed at the projecting position, the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position as shown in FIG. When the drive portion 32b is in the driven state and the output portion 226 is disposed at the retracted position, the open / close member 202 is disposed at the open position as shown in FIG. 31 (b). It should be noted that the drive unit 32b for the special electric power has the main body section 227 on the back side of the game board 24 and the output section 226 is connected to the rear end of the opening / closing member 202. The drive unit 32b for the driver is not visible or difficult to see.

  The state of the special electric wire prize winning device 32 in the situation where the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position and the open position, respectively, in addition to FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), FIG. 33 (a) and FIG. The description will be made with reference to. 33 (a) and 33 (b) are cross-sectional views taken along the line AA of FIG. 31 (a) and 33 (a) show the open / close member 202 in the closed position, and FIGS. 31 (b) and 33 (b) show the open / close member 202 in the open position. Show the status. First, the case where the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position will be described.

  When the opening and closing member 202 is disposed in the closed position, the inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212 of the opening and closing member 202 as shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 33 (a). . Thereby, when the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, the game ball is prevented from entering the fourth discharge passage 45.

  Regardless of whether the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, the opening 213 of the base portion 211 is present on the right side of the blocking portion 212 as described above. When the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the closing position, the leading end portion of the induction plate portion 214, which is a region on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the opening portion 213 in the base portion 211, It faces the panel 52 at a close position. The distance between the tip of the induction plate 214 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the gaming ball. Thus, in the state where the opening and closing member 202 is disposed in the closed position, even if the gaming ball on the induction plate portion 214 tries to flow downward from the front end of the induction plate portion 214, It is blocked by the window panel 52.

  In the state where the opening and closing member 202 is disposed in the closed position, the left end of the guide plate portion 214 extends in the longitudinal direction at a position below the inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 in the passage forming member 201 It enters into the formed slide through hole 221. In this case, the upper surface of the induction plate portion 214 is inclined downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 and is inclined downward toward the left. In the configuration, the passage forming body 201 protrudes to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24 and the front end of the passage forming body 201 faces the window panel 52 of the front door frame 14 There is. The distance between the front end of the passage forming body 201 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the gaming ball. Thus, even if the game ball is about to move from the left end of the induction plate 214 to the left of the induction plate 214 when the open / close member 202 is in the closed position, it is blocked by the passage forming member 201 Ru. The upper surface of the induction plate portion 214 is not only inclined downward toward the left as already described, but is also inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, so the open / close member 202 is in the closed position The game ball placed on the guiding plate portion 214 in the state of being placed in the above moves to the opening 213 by its own weight and flows into the opening 213.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), the guide member 203 is provided so as to project forward of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the surface of the game board 24, and the portion projecting forward is disposed at the closed position. The base portion 211 of the opening and closing member 202 is opposed from above. The left region 232 excluding the receiving part 231 on the right end side in this forwardly projecting part extends laterally along the opening 213 of the base part 211 in the state where the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the closing position. However, the amount of protrusion of the left side region 232 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is such that the opening 213 of the base portion 211 is not included in the opposing range. Thus, the opening 213 is not blocked by the guide member 203 in the state where the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position. In addition, since the dimension in the front-rear direction of the left side area 232 is smaller than the radius of the gaming ball, the gaming ball does not ride on the left side area 232.

  On the other hand, the receiving part 231 present on the right side of the opening part 213 of the opening and closing member 202 in the guide member 203 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the left side area 232. Face the window panel 52 at a close position. The distance between the tip of the receiving portion 231 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the gaming ball. As a result, even if the gaming ball placed on the receiving portion 231 tries to flow downward from the front end portion of the receiving portion 231 downward, the window panel 52 blocks this. In addition, since the receiving part 231 exists in the right end part of the game board 24, even if the game ball placed on the receiving part 231 tries to flow downward from the right end part of the receiving part 231, it is the resin base 21 In the right of the game board 24 is blocked.

  Both the dimension in the front-rear direction and the dimension in the lateral direction of the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 are set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33A, the front region 233 is present on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the opening 213 of the opening and closing member 202 disposed at the closed position. At the left edge of the front area 233, a restricting portion 234 for preventing the game ball resting on the front area 233 from falling from the left edge of the front area 233 to the left of the front area 233 is It is integrally formed. Further, the front side area 233 is inclined downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game ball placed on the front area 233 on the upper surface of the receiving section 231 moves to the rear area 235 on the upper surface of the receiving section 231 by its own weight. The rear area 235 is inclined downward toward the left, and there is no part that prevents the game ball from flowing downward from the left end of the rear area 235 to the left of the rear area 235. Therefore, when the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the closing position, the gaming ball placed on the rear region 235 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 moves toward the opening 213 of the opening and closing member 202 by its own weight. It will flow into 213.

  Next, the case where the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the open position will be described. When the opening and closing member 202 is disposed in the open position, the inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 is closed to the blocking portion 212 of the opening and closing member 202 as shown in FIGS. 31 (b) and 33 (b). It is open toward the right without As a result, the game ball can enter the fourth discharge passage 45.

  When the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, the whole of the opening 213 in the base portion 211 of the opening and closing member 202 is disposed in the slide through hole 221, and the inlet 45 b of the fourth discharge passage 45 On the right side of the guide plate portion 214 of the base portion 211 of the opening and closing member 202 is present. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the guide plate portion 214 extends laterally between the inlet 45 b of the fourth discharge passage 45 and the rear region 235 of the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203. Will extend to Then, as described above, the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is inclined downward toward the left end of the rear area 235, so that the gaming ball placed on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is directed to the guiding plate 214 by its own weight. The game ball placed on the upper surface of the induction plate portion 214 is inclined at the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 by its own weight because the upper surface of the induction plate portion 214 is inclined downward to the left while moving. Will move towards the That is, with the open / close member 202 in the open position, the gaming ball placed on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 or the upper surface of the guiding plate portion 214 is directed toward the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 by its own weight. It moves and will enter the said entrance part 45b. Therefore, when the open / close member 202 is disposed at the open position, not only is it possible to enter the gaming ball into the inlet 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45, but the entrance of the fourth discharge passage 45 Entry of the game ball into the unit 45 b is guided by the opening and closing member 202.

  When the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the opening position, the tip of the front side of the guiding plate portion 214 moves because the opening and closing member 202 moves to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 than when the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the closing position. And the distance between the window panel 52 and the window panel 52 increases. And, this distance is equal to or more than the diameter of the gaming ball. Therefore, the game ball enters the space between the induction plate portion 214 and the window panel 52 depending on the flow direction and the momentum of the flow of the game ball which has flowed toward the special electric power winning device 32 in the right side area PA3 and enters the space. It is also possible that the game balls flow down below the special power prize device 32 by flowing down. That is, even if the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, the gaming ball that has reached the position of the special power winning device 32 flows downward to the special power winning device 32 without winning in the special power winning device 32. Things can happen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball placed on the induction plate portion 214 is integrally formed by integrally forming a projecting portion projecting upward over the entire front end of the induction plate portion 214. From the front end of the portion 214, it may be configured such that it can not be dropped or is hard to drop downward.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29 again, a configuration for setting the flow-down mode of the gaming ball in the right side area PA3 to a predetermined mode will be described.

  On the upstream side of the special power winning device 32 in the right side area PA3, gaming balls flowing down the upstream side of the right side area PA3, the right end side of the special power winning device 32, more specifically the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 and its Guide means are provided for guiding around. As the said guidance means, the induction nail group 241 by the some nail 24b is provided. The guiding nail group 241 has a plurality of nails 24b arranged in a downward sloping direction such that a guiding portion which is inclined downward from the right frame portion 36g of the center frame 36a to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 is formed. It is formed of In this case, the distance between the nail 24b at the left end of the induction nail group 241 and the right frame portion 36g is set to be less than the radius of the game ball, and the distance between adjacent nails 24b in the induction nail group 241 is also set. It is set to less than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, the gaming balls having reached the induction nail group 241 are guided by the induction nail group 241 toward the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203.

  The game ball guided to the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is guided to the opening 213 in the base portion 211 of the opening / closing member 202 by the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 as already described when the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position. Flow into the opening 213. Therefore, the gaming ball that has flowed down the right side area PA3 and reached the special power prize device 32 in the situation where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closing position flows into the area near the receiving portion 231 at the opening 213 of the base portion 211 Therefore, it will flow downward to the special power winning device 32.

  Here, though the through gate 35 is provided in the right side area PA3 as described above, the through gate 35 is disposed on the downstream side of the special electric winning device 32 and closer to the passage forming member 201 of the special electric winning device 32. . In addition, only the game balls that flowed downward from the special electric winning device 32 from the position close to the passage forming body 201 of the special electric winning device 32 can enter the through gate 35 between the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35 A regulation nail group 242 is provided to achieve the following. As a result, the gaming ball that has reached the special electric winning device 32 in the state where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the closing position is prevented from passing through the through gate 35.

  On the other hand, when the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, the gaming ball that has reached the special electric power winning device 32 is the inlet portion of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 above the induction plate portion 214 of the base portion 211 It will flow down to 45b. In this case, when the arrangement of the open / close member 202 in the open position is maintained until the gaming ball resting on the guiding plate 214 reaches the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45, the gaming ball is The ball enters the entrance 45b. On the other hand, when the opening and closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position before reaching the entrance 45b, the gaming ball resting on the guiding plate 214 at that time is the guiding plate 214 Moving to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 following the movement on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, guided along the inclination of the upper surface of the induction plate 214 to the opening 213 of the base 211 and flowing into the opening 213; Become. Therefore, when the opening and closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position in a state where the gaming ball is present in the predetermined range X close to the passage forming body 201 on the guiding plate portion 214, the gaming ball is the passage forming body At a position close to 201, it will flow downward to the special electric award winning device 32, and will pass through the through gate 35. Then, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the hold information on the common drawing side is acquired, and an opportunity to open the common control utility 34a of the second operation opening 34 occurs. In other words, the trigger for entering the through gate 35, that is, the trigger for bringing the common power utility product 34a of the second operation port 34 into the open state occurs only in the open / close execution mode.

  A situation in which a winning on the second operation port 34 occurs in the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 34 (a) shows the execution period of the open / close execution mode, FIG. 34 (b) shows the open / close state of the special electric winning device 32, and FIG. 34 (c) shows the timing of winning on the through gate 35. FIG. 34 (d) shows the execution period of the open state of the second operation port 34, and FIG. 34 (e) shows the timing when a winning on the second operation port 34 occurs. It should be noted that although the open state of the second operation port 34 occurs a plurality of times when the normal charge open state is established, the open state of the second operation port 34 occurs only once in FIG. 34 for convenience of explanation. Explain as.

  At the timing of t1, the open / close execution mode is started as shown in FIG. In the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), round games are executed in each period of timing t2 to timing t3, timing t7 to timing t9, timing t13 to timing t15, etc. The device 32 is in the open state.

  In each of these round games, in each of the round game of the timing of t2 to the timing of t3 and the timing of the round game of the timing of t7 to the timing of t9 of t7, the timing of t3 and the timing of t9 when the special power winning device 32 is closed from the open state In each of the above, the game ball is mounted on the induction plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32. Then, when the open / close member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position at the timing of t3 and the timing of t9, and the special electric potential winning device 32 is closed from the open state, it rests on the induction plate portion 214 The game ball drops into the opening 213 of the opening and closing member 202. The dropped game ball wins the through gate 35 at timing t4 and timing t10 as shown in FIG. 34 (c). Thereby, the holding information on the common drawing side is acquired, and the variable display of the pattern is started on the common drawing display unit 38a. Then, when the fluctuation display of the pattern is ended, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), the common charge of the second operation port 34 is performed over the timing t5 to t8 and the timing t11 to t14, respectively. The accessory 34a is in the open state. As described above, even the gaming ball flowing down the right side area PA3 can reach the position where the second operation port 34 is provided, so the special power winning device 32 tries to win the gaming ball to the right side area PA3 By continuing the firing of the gaming ball, as shown in FIG. 34 (e), winning of the second operation opening 34 occurs at the timing of t6 and the timing of t12. Thereby, the second hold information is acquired. Since the start of a new game play is blocked while the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the execution of the process for judging the acceptability of the acquired second hold information and the start of the game play triggered by the second hold information are: It is performed after the current open / close execution mode is finished.

  On the other hand, in the round game of the timing t13 to the timing t15, the game ball is mounted on the induction plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 at the timing t15 when the special electric winning device 32 is closed from the open state. Even if the gaming ball is not placed on the guiding plate portion 214, the gaming ball does not fall to a position where it can enter the through gate 35. Therefore, winning of the through gate 35 does not occur at the end of the round game.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 34A, the open / close execution mode is generated at the timing of t16. At the timing when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the general drawing side holding information is on hold in the general drawing holding area 65c. Thus, the opening of the second operation port 34 is started as shown in FIG. 34 (d) at the timing t17 after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and this opening period continues until the timing t19. Then, by performing the firing operation so that the gaming ball flows down the left side area PA2 or the right side area PA3 in this period, as shown in (e) of FIG. Occur. In this case, if the second hold information for the upper limit number is not held and stored in the second special-image hold area 86 at this time, the second hold information is newly acquired. And while the said 2nd hold information becomes execution object of a success / failure determination process, it becomes a start opportunity of new game times.

<Execution mode of open / close execution mode>
Next, the execution mode of the open / close execution mode will be described. FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution mode of the open / close execution mode.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as a big hit result, 2R low probability result, 2R high probability result, 4R low probability result, 4R high probability result, 6R low probability result, 6R high probability result, 10R low probability result, 10R high probability As a result, there are 16R low probability results and 16R high probability results. As shown in FIG. 35A, the interval period between each round game is set to 3 seconds in any of the opening / closing execution modes that occur when these jackpots result. In each of the opening and closing execution modes, the upper limit number of winning to the special power winning device 32 in each round game is set to 10, and the open continuation period of each round game is set to 29 seconds. And in each round game, opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 is performed once.

  On the other hand, the number of round games generated in these open / close execution modes is different. Specifically, the number of round games is set to 2 in 2R low probability results and 2R high probability results, and the number of round games is set to 4 in 4R low probability results and 4R high probability results. The number of round games is set to six in 6R low probability results and 6R high probability results, and the number of round games is set to 10 in 10R low probability results and 10R high probability results, 16R low probability In the result and the 16R high probability result, the number of round games is set to 16 times. As the number of times of execution of the round game is large, the number of balls entering the special power winning device 32 in the one open / close execution mode is large, so the jackpot result having a large number of times of execution of the round game is more advantageous for the player.

  In addition, as the number of times of execution of the round game is larger, the number of times the open / close member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 slides between the open position and the closed position is increased. As described above, at the timing when the opening and closing member 202 slides to the closing position from the open position, the gaming ball resting on the guiding plate portion 214 of the opening and closing member 202 can win the through gate 35. Therefore, as the number of sliding movement of the open / close member 202 between the open position and the closed position increases, the frequency of winning on the through gate 35 increases, and the winning on the through gate 35 occurs. A trigger occurs in which the common power utility product 34a of the operation opening 34 is in the open state. Then, when the second hold information acquired by the occurrence of the winning in the second operation opening 34 becomes the execution target of the success or failure judgment processing, either the jackpot result or the small hit result occurs, so it is ensured that The open / close execution mode will be generated. Also from this point of view, the jackpot result with a large number of round game executions is advantageous to the player.

  As a jackpot result in which the number of times of execution of the round game is the same, each of a low probability result and a high probability result is set. That is, 2R low probability result and 2R high probability result are set as a jackpot result in which a round game is executed twice. Moreover, 4R low probability result and 4R high probability result are set as a jackpot result in which a round game is executed 4 times. Moreover, 6R low probability result and 6R high probability result are set as a jackpot result in which a round game is executed 6 times. In addition, 10R low probability result and 10R high probability result are set as the jackpot result that round game is executed 10 times. Also, 16R low probability results and 16R high probability results are set as the jackpot result in which the round game is executed 16 times. Thereby, as a big hit result in which the number of round games occurring in the opening and closing execution mode is the same, the low probability result that the success or failure lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low probability mode and the success or failure lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode are high There will be a high probability result in the probability mode. Therefore, there is a jackpot result in which the setting mode of the lottery mode is different while making the player's profit level the same for the number of round games generated in the opening / closing execution mode, and the player expects the type of jackpot result There will be more types of targets.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result exist as small hit results. As shown in FIG. 35B, the upper limit number of winning combinations is set to 10 in any of the open / close execution modes that occur when these small hits result. On the other hand, the number of times of opening the special power winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode and the open duration of the special electric winning device 32 at each opening time are different for each small hit result.

  FIG. 36 is a time chart for illustrating an execution mode of the open / close execution mode which is executed triggered by the small hitting result. 36 (a1), 36 (a2) and 36 (a3) show the execution period of the open / close execution mode, and FIG. 36 (b1), 36 (b2) and 36 (b3) show the special electric winning device 32 Indicates the open period. 36 (a1) and 36 (b1) show the execution mode of the open / close execution mode triggered by the first small hit result, and FIGS. 36 (a2) and 36 (b2) show the execution modes. 36 (a3) and 36 (b3) are executed triggered by the fact that the third small hit result is taken as an execution mode of the open / close execution mode executed triggered by the second small hit result. Show an execution mode of the open / close execution mode.

  In the case of the first small hit result, when the open / close execution mode is executed over the timing t1 to the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 36 (a1), the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 36 (b1) The special power prize device 32 is opened only once over the timing of t3. The open continuation period of the special power prize device 32 in this one open cycle is set to 10 seconds as shown in FIG. 35 (b). The firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, and the number of winning prizes for the game ball to the special power prize device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is 10, so this open continuation period is the firing cycle and the prize upper limit The period is longer than the product of the number.

  In the case of the second small hitting result, when the open / close execution mode is executed over the timing t1 to the timing t20 as shown in FIG. 36 (a2), the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 36 (b2) The special power winning device 32 is opened once over each of the timing of t11, the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, the timing of t16 to the timing of t16 and the timing of t18 to t19. . That is, in the case of the second small hitting result, the number of times of opening of the special power winning device 32 is five times. The open continuation period of the special power prize device 32 in each open cycle is set to 2 seconds as shown in FIG. 35 (b). The firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, and the maximum number of winning game balls to the special power prize device 32 in the open / close execution mode is 10, so the open continuation period of each open cycle is the game cycle of the game ball It becomes a period shorter than the product of and the winning upper limit number. However, the total open continuation period of each open cycle is a period longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the upper limit number of winning. Further, the total open duration of each open cycle is equal to the open duration of one open cycle of the open / close execution mode in the first small hitting result.

  In the case of the third small hitting result, when the open / close execution mode is executed over the timing t1 to the timing t40 as shown in FIG. 36 (a3), the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 36 (b3) t21 timing, t22 timing to t23 timing, t24 timing to t25 timing, t26 timing to t27 timing, t28 timing to t29 timing, t30 timing to t31 timing, t32 timing to t33 The special electric winning device 32 is opened once over the timing, the timing t34 to the timing t35, the timing t36 to the timing t37 and the timing t38 to the timing t39. That is, in the case of the third small hitting result, the number of times of opening of the special power winning device 32 is ten times. The open continuation period of the special power prize device 32 in each open cycle is set to one second as shown in FIG. 35 (b). The firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, and the maximum number of winning game balls to the special power prize device 32 in the open / close execution mode is 10, so the open continuation period of each open cycle is the game cycle of the game ball It becomes a period shorter than the product of and the winning upper limit number. However, the total open continuation period of each open cycle is a period longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the upper limit number of winning. In addition, the total open duration of each open cycle is equal to the open duration of one open cycle of the open / close execution mode in the first small hit result, and the open duration of the total of open times in the second small hit result is continued Equal to the period.

  As described above, in the opening / closing execution mode of each small hitting result, the opening duration of each opening is set to be longer as the opening frequency is smaller. The longer the one-time open continuation period of the special power winning device 32 is, the easier it is for the special power winning device 32 to be winning. On the other hand, as the number of times the special power prize device 32 is opened is increased, there are many occasions where the special power prize device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state with the gaming ball resting on the induction plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202. Therefore, winning on the through gate 35 is likely to occur. Therefore, in the first small hitting result, winning on the special electric winning device 32 is the most likely to occur, but winning on the through gate 35 is hard to occur, and in the third small hitting result, the winning on the special electric winning device 32 is most likely Although it is difficult, winning on the through gate 35 is most likely to occur, and in the second small hitting result, both winning on the special electric winning device 32 and winning on the through gate 35 are likely to occur moderately. As a result, the player who expects the winning of the special power winning device 32 will expect the first small hitting result, and the player expecting the winning of the through gate 35 will expect the third small hitting result It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the targets expected by the player. In addition, even if any of the first small hit result, the second small hit result and the third small hit result occurs, there is merit respectively, so it is possible to increase the player's attention to each small hit result Become.

  In addition, in any case of the 2nd small hitting result and the 3rd small hitting result, special electric winning a prize device 32 will be opened plural times, but interval period of each opening turn becomes identical with 3 seconds in each case There is. In addition, the game ball can reach the predetermined range X on the guiding plate portion 214 when one second of the period in which the open / close member 202 is disposed at the open position elapses.

<Pu-Pu Electric control processing>
Next, a processing configuration for switching the second operation port 34 between the open state and the closed state, and a processing configuration for switching the special power prize device 32 between the open state and the closed state will be described. First, a processing configuration for switching the second operation port 34 between the open state and the closed state will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose power control process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the general-purpose general power control process is executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

  First, the acquisition processing of the holding information on the side of the drawing is executed (step S1101). In the acquisition process, if the winning on the through gate 35 has occurred, and if the general drawing reservation area 65c is not in a state where the holding information on the general drawing side for the upper limit number is not acquired, The numerical information is stored in the common drawing reservation area 65c. In this case, the general drawing side hold information is stored in the order of the first area 88a, the second area 88b, the third area 88c, and the fourth area 88d.

  Thereafter, numerical value information of the common drawing common charge counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S1102), and the common drawing common address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step S1103). Then, the start address corresponding to the numerical information of the common drawing common counter is acquired from the common drawing common address table (step S1104), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S1105).

  The common drawing common counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which one of the processes in step S1106 to step S1110 in the common drawing common control processing is to be executed. In the address table, the start address in the program for executing each process of step S1106 to step S1110 is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the common figure / general charge counter. If the value of the common drawing common counter is “0”, the process jumps to the common drawing change start processing in step S1106. If the value of the common drawing common counter is “1”, the common drawing change in step S1107 It jumps to the middle processing, and when the value of the common drawing common counter is "2", it jumps to the processing during the common drawing determination of step S1108, and when the value of the common drawing common counter is "3" The routine jumps to the routine during the general power release in step S1109, and jumps to the routine during the general power closure in step S1110 when the value of the general-purpose general counter is "4".

  In the general drawing change start process in step S1106, the general drawing reservation information held in the general drawing reservation area 65c on condition that the general drawing reservation area 65c holds the holding information in the general drawing reservation area. Execute the process of shifting the Specifically, the reservation information on the general drawing side stored in the first area 88a of the general drawing reservation area 65c is shifted to the execution area 89 for the common drawing, and thereafter the second area 88b → the first area 88a, The hold information on the general drawing side is shifted so that the third area 88c → the second area 88b and the fourth area 88d → the third area 88c. Then, the general information release lottery processing is executed with the information on the side of the generalization map, which has been newly shifted to the execution area 89 for general distribution, as the lottery value. In the present embodiment, as described above, only one type of support mode is used. Therefore, the probability of becoming a common power open state winning in the normal power open lottery processing becomes constant regardless of the game state such as whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress and whether the success / failure lottery mode is in the high probability mode Specifically, it will be elected in the general electric power release state with a probability of 9/10.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being elected in the general electric power release state may be higher or lower than this. Further, the general electric power supply release lottery process may not be executed, and the general electric power generation open state may be surely generated once for the hold information on the side of one general drawing side. In this case, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the general power open state.

  In the common drawing change start process, when the common use release lottery process is executed, a process of starting the variable display of the pattern in the common drawing display unit 38a is performed. In this case, the information of the fluctuation display period in which the design is variably displayed by the common drawing display unit 38a is set in the common drawing common power timer counter provided in the main side RAM 65. The value set in the general-purpose general-purpose timer counter is decremented by one each time the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, only one type of support mode is used. Therefore, the fluctuation display period of the fluctuation display of the pattern in the common drawing display portion 38a is constant regardless of the game state such as whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress and whether the success or failure lottery mode is in the high probability mode. Specifically, it is set to 5 seconds. Then, when the variable display of the pattern in the common drawing display unit 38a is started, the value of the common drawing common counter is updated from "0" to "1". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing cycle of the common drawing common power control process becomes the common drawing fluctuation processing.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display period of the variable display of the pattern in the common view display unit 38a may be longer or shorter than this. In addition, a plurality of variable display periods of the variable display of symbols in the spread map display unit 38a may be set, and the variable display period to be executed may be determined by lottery. Further, in a configuration in which the general electric power release state is surely generated once with respect to the hold information on the side of one common drawing, instead of the general electric power open lottery processing being executed, In the situation where the suspended information on the general drawing side is newly acquired in the situation where the variable power display is not performed and the status is not in the general power release state, or in the situation where the suspended information on the general drawing side is suspended and stored In the case where the routine ends, a new universal power transmission open state may be started, which is triggered by the holding information on the side of the general drawing. Also, conversely to this, even in the configuration in which the general power supply release state surely occurs once with respect to the holding information on one common drawing side, the fluctuation display of the pattern in the common drawing display unit 38a is executed. After the variable display of the pattern is performed, the general power release state may be started.

  In the general drawing variation processing of step S1107, processing for updating the display of the pattern on the common drawing display unit 38a is executed. Further, when the value set in the common drawing common timer counter of the main RAM 65 in the common drawing fluctuation start processing is “0”, the information of the determination period of the common drawing is used as the common drawing of the main RAM 65. For setting a pattern corresponding to the result of the general electric power release lottery processing which triggered execution of the variable display cycle of the current pattern in the common drawing display unit 38a while displaying in the common drawing timer counter and displaying on the common drawing display unit 38a Execute the process Then, the value of the common map common counter is updated from “1” to “2”. As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing cycle of the common drawing common power control process becomes the common drawing determination process.

  In the ordinary drawing determination process of step S1108, when the value of the ordinary drawing general power timer counter is "0", the result of the general electric power open lottery processing which triggered the execution of the variable display cycle of the current pattern It is determined whether or not the universal power release state is won. If the general electric power open state is not won, the value of the general drawing general electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing cycle of the common drawing common power control process becomes common drawing fluctuation start processing.

  When the general power open state is won, the processing for setting the general power open state is executed. Specifically, “3” is set to the common charge open frequency counter provided in the main RAM 65. The common charge open frequency counter is a counter for specifying, by the main CPU 63, the remaining number of times the common power utility item 34a is opened in the normal power open state. In addition, numerical information of the open continuation period (specifically, 2 seconds) in the case where the common utility product 34a is opened once is set in the common drawing common power timer counter. Also, set "10" to the Fuden prize counter. Also, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for general power is started so that the general purpose utility product 34a is in the open state. The general-purpose winning counter is a counter for specifying, with the main CPU 63, the remaining gaming balls that can be won in the second operation opening 34 in the general-purpose open state, and the degree of winning in the second operation opening 34 occurs The value of the Fuden prize counter is decremented by one. Then, when the value of the general purpose prize winning counter becomes “0”, the current general purpose electric power release state is ended regardless of the remaining number of opening of the general purpose utility piece 34 a at that time and the remaining open duration period. . After that, the value of the common map general counter is updated from "2" to "3". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing cycle of the common drawing general power control processing becomes processing during general power open. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, only one type of support mode is used. Therefore, the number of times that general purpose utilities 34a are in the open state in the general purpose open state, the open continuation period in the case where general purpose public utility articles 34a are in the open state once, and the second operation port 34 in the general open state. The winning upper limit number of the game balls is constant regardless of the game state, such as whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress and whether the success or failure lottery mode is in the high probability mode.

  In step S1109, when the winning in the second operation port 34 is occurring, the value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the universal winning counter in the main RAM 65. Then, when the value of the general prize winning counter is “0”, the value of the general charge open frequency counter is cleared to “0” and the value of the general drawing general charge timer counter is cleared to “0”, By stopping the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b, the common use utility 34a is closed, and the value of the common use common counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing cycle of the common drawing common power control process becomes common drawing fluctuation start processing. In addition, even when the value of the general prize winning counter is not "0", when the value of the general drawing generality timer counter is "0", the output of the drive signal to the general power driver 34b Is stopped, and the value of the common charge open frequency counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. Then, if the value of the common charge release frequency counter is not “0”, numerical value information of the closing duration of the common use utility 34 a is set in the common drawing common charge timer counter, and then the value of the common drawing common charge counter Update from 3 "to" 4 ". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing cycle of the common-diagram general-power control processing becomes the general-purpose closing processing. If the value of the common charge open frequency counter is “0”, the value of the common drawing common charge counter is cleared to “0” without setting the value in the common drawing common power timer counter. As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing cycle of the common drawing common power control process becomes common drawing fluctuation start processing.

  In the routine during the routine charge closing of step S1110, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the common station is started under the condition that the value of the common station general timer counter is "0". The numerical information of the open continuation period (specifically, 2 seconds) in the case where the commercial item 34a is in the open state and the commercial item 34a is in the open state once, is set in the universal drawing universal counter. Then, the value of the common map common counter is updated from "4" to "3". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing cycle of the common drawing general power control processing becomes processing during general power open.

  As described above, when the routine control processing is executed, fluctuation display of the pattern is performed in the common view display portion 38a in response to the occurrence of winning on the through gate 35. Then, when the general power open state is won in the general power open lottery process, the general power commercial item 34a of the second operation port 34 is in the open state and the general power open state is established. When the second power port 34 is in the open state and the second power port 34 is opened, it is possible to win the game ball in the second power port 34, and the second hold information is achieved by the second power port 34 in the game ball. Is stored in the second special view reservation area 86.

<Special figure special power control process>
Next, a processing configuration for switching the special power winning device 32 between the open state and the closed state will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the special figure special power control process executed by the main CPU 63. The special figure special power control process is executed in step S213 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

  First, acquisition processing of suspension information is executed (step S1201). In the process of obtaining reserve information, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, a winning on the first operation port 33 has occurred (step S1301: YES), and the first special figure reserve area 85 is further stored If the number of pieces of 1-hold information is less than the upper limit number of storages (step S1302: YES), processing for acquiring the first-hold information is executed. It is to be noted that the determination as to whether or not the winning of the first operation port 33 has occurred is made by determining whether or not the first operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to “1”. As described above, “1” is set to the first operation winning flag in step S315 of the ball entering detection process (FIG. 14). When the determination in step S1301 is affirmative, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0".

  In the process for acquiring the first hold information, the main side CPU 65 is provided in the main side RAM 65 in order to first grasp the number of unprocessed first hold information stored in the first special view hold area 85. The value of the first special view holding counter is incremented by 1 (step S1303). Incidentally, in accordance with the value of the first special drawing reservation counter, the display content of the first special drawing reservation display unit 37 c in the special drawing unit 37 is adjusted. As a result, the display content of the first special view reserve display unit 37 c corresponds to the number of first reserve information items stored in the first special view reserve area 85. Thereafter, each value of the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the first special drawing reserve area 85, that is, storage corresponding to the number of pending storages added one at step S1303. It stores in the area (step S1304). Thereafter, the first hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step S1305). When the voice emission control device 81 receives the first hold command, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding thereto to the display control device 82. In the symbol display device 41, an image display for notifying the number of the first holding information stored in the first special view holding area 85 is performed, and the display control device 82 displays a command corresponding to the first holding command. By receiving the content, the content of the image display is updated to content corresponding to an increase in the number of pieces of first holding information. In addition, when the game play triggered by the first hold information is started, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the decrease of the number of pieces of the first hold information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1301, a negative determination is made in step S1302, or if the process of step S1305 is executed, a winning on the second operation port 34 has occurred (step S1306: YES And the process for acquiring the second hold information on condition that the number of the second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 86 is less than the upper limit number of storages (step S1307: YES). Run. It is to be noted that the determination as to whether or not a winning on the second operation opening 34 has occurred is made by determining whether or not the second operation winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1". As described above, "1" is set to the second operation winning flag in step S319 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 14). When the determination in step S1306 is affirmative, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0".

  In the process for acquiring the second hold information, the main CPU 63 is provided in the main RAM 65 in order to grasp the number of unprocessed second hold information stored in the second special view hold area 86 first. The value of the second special view holding counter is incremented by 1 (step S1308). Incidentally, in accordance with the value of the second special drawing reservation counter, the display content of the second special drawing reservation display unit 37 d in the special drawing unit 37 is adjusted. As a result, the display content of the second special view reserve display unit 37 d corresponds to the number of second reserve information items stored in the second special view reserve area 86. Thereafter, each value of the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the second special view reservation area 86, ie, the storage area corresponding to the number of storage areas added 1 at step S1308. It stores in the area (step S1309). Thereafter, the second hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1310). When the voice emission control device 81 receives the second hold command, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding thereto to the display control device 82. In the symbol display device 41, image display for notifying the number of the second hold information stored in the second special view hold area 86 is performed, and the display control device 82 displays a command corresponding to the second hold command. By receiving the content, the content of the image display is updated to content corresponding to an increase in the number of pieces of second holding information. In addition, when the game play triggered by the second hold information is started, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the decrease in the number of pieces of second hold information.

  After executing the acquisition process of the hold information (step S1201), the numerical information of the special view special charge counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S1202), and the special view special charge address table provided in the main side ROM 64 It reads out (step S1203). Then, the start address corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special charge counter is acquired from the special figure special electricity address table (step S1204), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S1205).

  The special figure special charge counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which one of the processes of step S1206 to step S1212 in the special figure special charge control process is to be executed. The start address in the program for executing each process of step S1206 to step S1212 is set corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special power counter. The process jumps to the special figure variation start process of step S1206 when the value of the special figure special charge counter is "0", and when the value of the special figure special charge counter is "1", the special figure variation processing of step S1207 is performed. Jump to the processing during special figure determination in step S1208 if the value of the special figure special charge counter is “2”, and if the value of the special figure special charge counter is “3”, the special charge in step S1209 The processing jumps to the start processing, and when the value of the special power special discharge counter is "4", the processing is jumped to the processing during special power release during step S1210, and when the value of the special power special discharge counter is "5", The process jumps to processing during the closing of the special power, and when the value of the special drawing special power counter is “6”, jumps to the special power termination processing of step S1212. The processes in steps S1206 to S1212 will be individually described below.

<Special chart change start process>
First, the special figure change start process of step S1206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the special figure change start process is not executed in the situation where the game run is already executed and the situation where the open / close execution mode is executed.

  In the special view fluctuation start process, when the second hold information is not stored in the second special view hold area 86 and the first hold information is stored in the first special view hold area 85 (step S1401: YES, step S1402: NO), the first data setting process is executed (step S1403). In the first data setting process, the data stored in the first area 85a of the first special drawing reservation area 85 is moved to the special drawing execution area 87. Thereafter, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special view reservation area 85 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 85a to 85d to the lower area side, and clears the data of the first area 85a, and the second area 85b → Data in each area is shifted in such a manner as to be the first area 85a, the third area 85c, the second area 85b, and the fourth area 85d, the third area 85c. Thereafter, the value of the first special view holding counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. As a result, the display content of the first special view hold display unit 37c in the special view unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first hold information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a first decrease time command indicating that the first hold information in the first special view hold area 85 has decreased by one is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. When the voice emission control device 81 receives the first decrease command, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding thereto to the display control device 82. In the symbol display device 41, as described above, image display for notifying the number of the first hold information stored in the first special view hold area 85 is performed, and the display control device 82 performs the first decrease command. Is received, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the decrease in the number of pieces of first holding information.

  On the other hand, when the second hold information is stored in the second special view hold area 86 (step S1401 and step S1402: YES), the first hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information is the first hold information. Even if it is stored in (1) special view reservation area 85, the second data setting process is executed (step S1404). In the second data setting process, the data stored in the first area 86 a of the second special drawing reserve area 86 is moved to the special drawing execution area 87. Thereafter, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of second special-image holding area 86 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 86a to 86d to the lower area side, and clears the data of the first area 86a, and the second area 86b → The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as the first area 86a, the third area 86c, the second area 86b, the fourth area 86d, and the third area 86c. Thereafter, the value of the second special view holding counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. As a result, the display contents of the second special view hold display unit 37 d in the special view unit 37 are changed to the contents in which the second hold information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, the second light emission control device 81 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, which indicates that the second hold information in the second special view hold area 86 has decreased by one. When the voice emission control device 81 receives the second decrease command, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82. In the symbol display device 41, the image display for notifying the number of the second hold information stored in the second special view hold area 86 is performed as already described, and the display control device 82 performs the second decrease command Is received, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the decrease in the number of pieces of second hold information.

  Here, when the second hold information is stored as described above, the second hold information is for special view even if the first hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information is stored. The target of shifting to the execution area 87 of As a result, the second hold information is preferentially digested as the start target of the game play rather than the first hold information.

  When the process of step S1403 or step S1404 is performed, a success or failure determination process is performed (step S1405). In the success / failure determination process, if the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game play is the first hold information, the main ROM 64 is the low probability of failure (see FIG. 9A) for the first special drawing. If the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the start target of the game is the first hold information, the high probability false table (see FIG. 9B) for the first special drawing is read from the main side ROM 64. If the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the game start target is the second hold information, read the low probability table (see (c) in FIG. 9) for the second special view from the main ROM 64, and see if it is false. If the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the start target of the game play is the second hold information, the high probability of failure table for the second special drawing (see FIG. 9D) is read from the main ROM 64. After reading the success / failure table, the information for judging whether to pass or not, ie, the numerical information acquired from the random number counter C1 is read out from the hold information stored in the execution area 87 for special drawing, and the read numerical information It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result in. In addition, when the start target of the current game is the second hold information, if it does not match the numerical information set as the jackpot result, the first small hit result, the second small hit in the above-mentioned success or failure table It is determined whether or not any of the numerical information set for each of the result and the third small hitting result matches the information for judging whether the above or not.

  If the result of the propriety determination processing is the jackpot result (step S1406: YES), the distribution determination processing is executed (step S1407). In the distribution determination process, if the start target of the game round is the first hold information, the first special view distribution table (see FIG. 10A) is read from the main ROM 64, and the start target of the game round is the first (2) If it is the hold information, the second special view distribution table (see FIG. 10B) is read from the main ROM 64. After the distribution table is read out, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read out from the suspension information stored in the execution area 87 for special drawing, and the distribution table is referred to Thus, it is specified which kind of jackpot result the read numerical information corresponds to.

  After executing the distribution determination process, “1” is set to the flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in the distribution determination process (step S1408). Thereafter, stop result setting processing for the jackpot result is executed (step S1409). Specifically, the information for the stop mode of the pattern to be finally displayed on the special view display portions 37a and 37b, which is the target of the start of the current game run, is the stop for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main ROM 64 It identifies from the result table and stores the identified information in the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the big hit result, the types of stop modes of the symbols stopped and displayed on the first special view display unit 37a or the second special view display unit 37b are set differently for each type of the big hit result. In step S1409, the main RAM 65 stores information on the stop mode of the pattern according to the type of the jackpot result specified in step S1408. In addition, the stop mode of the pattern may be set corresponding to each jackpot result on a one-to-one basis, and the stop mode of plural types of patterns may be set for at least a part of the jackpot results. Although the method of selecting the stop result for the jackpot result in which the stop modes of a plurality of types of patterns are set is arbitrary, for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

  When the result of the success or failure judgment processing is not the jackpot result but any of the small hit results (step S1406: NO, step S1410: YES), the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the type of small hit result specified in the above success or failure judgment processing. The flag of is set to "1" (step S1411). After that, the stop result table for the small hitting result stored in advance in the main ROM 64, the information of the stop mode of the pattern to be finally displayed on the second special view display unit 37b which is the target of the start of the current game run And the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the small hit result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the second special view display unit 37b is set to be different for each small hit result type, and in step S1412. The information of the stop mode of the pattern according to the type of the small hitting result specified in step S1411 is stored in the main side RAM 65. In addition, the stop mode of the pattern may be set corresponding to each small hit result on a one-to-one basis, and the stop mode of plural kinds of patterns may be set for at least some small hit results. . Although the method of selecting a stop result for small hitting results in which stop modes of a plurality of types of patterns are set is arbitrary, for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the random number counter C1. Further, the information on the pattern aspect selected in step S1412 is different from the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  If the result of the pass / fail determination process is neither the big hit result nor the small hit result (step S1410: NO), the stop result setting process for the out result is executed (step S1413). Specifically, the information on the pattern aspect to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special view display unit 37a or the second special view display unit 37b in the current game round is a result of deviation stored in advance in the main side ROM 64. The main information is stored in the main RAM 65 by identifying it from the stop result table. The information of the pattern aspect selected in this case is different from the information of the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information of the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the small hit result. The special view display unit 37a and the second special view display unit 37b are one common type.

  When the process of step S1409, step S1412, or step S1413 is executed, a process of specifying a fluctuation display period is executed (step S1414). In the specific process, numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether reach effect is generated by the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined that the reach effect occurs when any of the big hit results occurs in the current game round. In addition, when any small hitting result occurs in this game time, it decides that reach production does not occur. In addition, when both the big hit result and the small hit result do not occur in this game time, the numerical information which is acquired from reach random number counter C3 in the retention information which is stored in execution area 87 for special drawing It is determined that reach effect occurs in the case of the corresponding numerical information, and it is determined that reach effect does not occur in the case of not the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence.

  When it is determined that the reach effect is generated, the information on the fluctuation display period corresponding to the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the reach generation table stored in the main ROM 64, and The acquired information of the variable display period is set in the special figure special power timer counter. Further, when it is determined that the reach effect is not generated, information on the fluctuation display period corresponding to the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is referred to with reference to the reach non-occurrence table stored in the main ROM 64. get. In this case, each fluctuation display period is set such that the fluctuation display period when reach effect occurs is longer than the fluctuation display period when reach effect does not occur. And the information of the acquired fluctuation display period is set to the special figure special power timer counter. The value set in the special figure special power timer counter is decremented by one each time the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed.

  The variation display period at the time of non-reach occurrence is set such that the average period becomes shorter as the number of the hold information stored in the first special view reserve area 85 or the second special view reserve area 86 increases. Moreover, in the situation where the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the hold information stored in the first special view hold area 85 or the second special view hold area 86 rather than the situation where the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode. The fluctuation display period at the time of reach non-occurrence is set such that a shorter fluctuation display period can be easily selected in comparison when the numbers are the same.

  The variation display period selected in the case of the small hitting result may be shorter than the variation display period selected in the case of the big hitting result, and the variation display period selected in the case of the small hitting result The configuration may be shorter than the average value of the variable display period selected when the average value is the jackpot result. In this case, it is possible to accelerate the speed of digesting the game round when the second hold information is targeted for the start of the game round and the small hitting result occurs.

  Here, the maximum variation display period selected when the second hold information becomes the start target of the game round in the situation where the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode is the situation where the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode The first hold information is set to a period equal to or less than the maximum variation display period selected when the game is to be started. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation display period selected when the second hold information becomes the start target of the game times in the situation where the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the jackpot result does not become the success or failure lottery mode In the low probability mode, the first hold information is set to a period equal to or less than the average period of the variable display period which is selected when the game is to be started and the jackpot result is not obtained. As a result, even when the second hold information is targeted to start the game play in the low probability mode, it is possible to prevent the digest rate of the game play from deteriorating. However, the variable display is not limited to this, and the variable display is selected when the second hold information becomes the start target of the game round in the situation where the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the jackpot result is not obtained. The average period of the period is the average period of the fluctuation display period that is selected when the first hold information is targeted for the start of the game round and the jackpot result is not obtained in the situation where the pass / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. It may be configured to be set to be the same or substantially the same. In this case, although the average period is actually different from being substantially identical, the extent to which the player can not recognize the difference is applicable.

  In addition, the average period of the fluctuation display period which is selected when the second hold information becomes the start target of the game times in the situation where the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is the success or failure lottery mode. In the high probability mode, the first hold information is set to a shorter period than the average period of the variable display period which is selected when the game is to be started and the jackpot result is not obtained. Thus, in the high probability mode, the first hold information becomes the start target of the game round in the state of the high probability mode of the digest rate of the game turn when the second hold information becomes the start target of the game turn in the state of the high probability mode. It becomes possible to raise more than the digestibility of the game time at the time of playing.

  After the process of specifying the variable display period is performed, the variable light command and the type command corresponding to the game times targeted for the current start are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1415). The variation command includes the information on the variation display period specified in step S 1414 and the game cycle to be started is one of the first special view display unit 37 a and the second special view display unit 37 b. It contains information that indicates whether it is supported. Furthermore, the change command includes information as to whether or not reach effect is to be performed. The type command includes information as to whether or not the currently-started game turn corresponds to the jackpot result, and when it corresponds to the jackpot result, any type of jackpot result Contains information indicating In addition, the type command includes information as to whether or not the game round which is the current start target corresponds to the small hit result, and which type of the game corresponds to the small hit result. Contains information indicating whether it is a small hit result.

  Thereafter, in the display portion which is the target of the start of the current game round among the first special view display portion 37a and the second special view display portion 37b, the variable display of the pattern is started (step S1416). Then, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S1417). Since the value of the special figure special charge counter is “0” when the special figure change start process is executed, the value of the special figure special charge counter corresponds to the special figure change in process (step S1207) by being added 1 It will be "1".

  When the voice light emission control device 81 receives the variation command and the type command, the voice emission control device 81 executes a process for determining the content of the game effect corresponding to the command. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to a table corresponding to the processing result. Thereby, the light emission effect in the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output effect in the speaker unit 54 are executed over the fluctuation display period of the current game. In addition, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the content of the execution of the game effect determined this time to the display control device 82. By receiving the command, the display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the table corresponding to the command. Thereby, the display effect in the symbol display device 41 is executed over the fluctuation display period of the current game.

  In this case, when the current game run is a 16R high-accuracy result, the combination of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines. Also, if the current game time is any of 2R high probability result, 4R high probability result, 6R high probability result and 10R high probability result, the same odd number other than the "7" symbol on any valid line The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. Also, if the current game time is any of 2R low probability result, 4R low probability result, 6R low probability result, 10R low probability result and 16R low probability result, the same even symbol on any valid line The combination of is displayed stopped. In addition, when this game time is either the 1st small hitting result, the 2nd small hitting result and the 3rd small hitting result, it is not a combination of the same symbol on any effective line and a combination of reach pattern Also, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "3.4.1") is stopped and displayed. As described above, the combination of predetermined symbols common to the effects for the game circulation in the symbol display device 41 is stopped and displayed regardless of the first small hitting result, the second small hitting result and the third small hitting result. By doing this, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which of the first small hitting result, the second small hitting result and the third small hitting result corresponds to while showing the occurrence of the small hitting result Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the open / close execution mode that occurs when the small hit result is obtained. Also, as described above, in the configuration in which the predetermined small symbol combination which is common to any of the first small hitting result, the second small hitting result and the third small hitting result is displayed in a stopped state in the symbol display device 41, 2 In the special view display unit 37b, the pattern corresponding to the type of the small hitting result is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can identify which kind of small hit result has occurred by merely visually checking the second special view display portion 37b. The present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol display device 41 may also be configured to display the stop result corresponding to the type of the small hit result.

<Process during special map change>
Next, the special figure during fluctuation process executed in step S1207 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 38) will be described.

  It is a case where the value of the special figure special power timer counter is 1 or more, and the fluctuation display period of the current game round has not elapsed, and the display of the special figure display portions 37a and 37b targeted for execution of the current game round. When it is the update timing of the content, data setting is performed to update the display content of the special view display portions 37a and 37b. As a result, the display contents of the design in the special view display portions 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents in the next order.

  The mode at the start of the variable display of the pattern in the special view display portions 37a and 37b and the update mode of the variable display of the pattern are performed in a fixed mode regardless of the result of determination of acceptance and distribution and the symbol display device The game is performed in a fixed manner regardless of the contents of the presentation for the game use in 41. For example, when a predetermined number of times of update timings occur, the display content of the pattern goes around and the display pattern in which the display order is constant is repeated, and the display pattern is repeated when the variable display period has elapsed. In any situation where the display of any order is being performed, the stop result determined at the start of the game play is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special view display portions 37a and 37b.

  On the other hand, when the value of the special figure special power timer counter is “0”, that is, when the fluctuation display period has elapsed, the final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Thereafter, the information on the stop mode of the symbols of the special view display portions 37a and 37b stored in the main RAM 65 at the start of the game run is read out. As a result, the variation display of the symbols is stopped in a state in which the symbols corresponding to the game result of the current game are displayed on the special figure display portions 37a and 37b to be controlled. Thereafter, the information of the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the special figure special power timer counter. Thereby, measurement of the final stop period is started. After that, the special drawing special charge counter value is incremented by one. Since the value of the special figure special charge counter is “1” when the special figure variation processing is executed, the value of the special figure special charge counter corresponds to the special figure determination special processing (step S1208) by being incremented by 1. It will be "2".

  When the voice emission control device 81 receives the final stop command, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding thereto to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the command, the display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a combination of symbols corresponding to the result of stopping the current game run over the final stop period.

<Processing during special feature confirmation>
Next, the special figure determination process executed in step S1208 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the value of the special view special power timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S1501: YES), if the game result of the current game round is the big hit result or the small hit result ( Step S1502: YES), the value of the special figure special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S1503). Since the value of the special figure special charge counter is “2” when the special figure determination process is executed, the value of the special figure special charge counter corresponds to the special charge start process (step S1209) by adding “1”. It becomes ". On the other hand, when the game result of the current game round is neither the big hit result nor the small hit result (step S1502: NO), the value of the special figure special power counter is cleared to "0" (step S1504). As a result, the value of the special view special charge counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special view fluctuation start process (step S1206).

<Special power start processing>
Next, the special power start process executed in step S1209 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If it is before the start of the opening period in the open / close execution mode (step S1601: YES), if the current game result is a big hit result, information corresponding to the open period corresponding to the big hit result (specifically, 5 seconds) If you set the special figure special power timer counter, and the current game result is a small hit result, the information (specifically 2 seconds) corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the small hit result to the special figure special power timer counter It sets (step S1602). Thereafter, the opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step S1603). Thereby, effects corresponding to the opening period are performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54.

  If it is after the start of the opening period in the open / close execution mode (step S1601: NO), the condition that the value of the special figure special power timer counter is "0", that is, the opening period has elapsed (step S1604: YES), the setting process of the number of opening and closing is executed (step S1605). In this case, if the current game result is a 2R low probability result or a 2R high probability result, "2" is set in the opening / closing number counter provided in the main side RAM 65, and the current game result is a 4R low probability result or a 4R high result If it is a definite result, "4" is set to the open / close frequency counter of the main RAM 65, and if the current game result is 6R low accuracy result or 6R high accuracy result, "6" is set to the open frequency counter of the main RAM 65 If the current game result is a 10R low probability result or a 10R high probability result, set "10" to the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65, and if the current game result is a 16R low probability result or a 16R high probability result For example, "16" is set in the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65. Also, if the current game result is the first small hit result, "1" is set in the open / close frequency counter of the main RAM 65, and if the current game result is the second small hit result, the open / close frequency counter of the main RAM 65 If "5" is set to this, and the current game result is the third small hit result, "10" is set to the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65. The opening / closing number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of times that the special power winning device 32 is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode.

  Thereafter, setting processing of the open continuation period is executed (step S1606). In the setting process, when the current game result is any of the big hit results, information on the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special view special power timer counter. In addition, in the setting process, when the current game result is the first small hit result, information of the open continuation period for the first small hit result (specifically 10 seconds) is set in the special view special power timer counter If the current game result is the second small hit result, the information of the open continuation period for the second small hit result (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the special view special power timer counter, and the current game If the result is the third small hit result, information on the open duration for the third small hit result (specifically, 1 second) is set in the special signal special power timer counter.

  Thereafter, a setting process of the winning upper limit number is executed (step S1607). In the setting process, "10" is set to the winning counter provided in the main RAM 65, regardless of whether the current game result is any jackpot result or any small jackpot result. The winning counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of winning upper limit numbers by the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the special power release setting process is executed (step S1608). In the open setting process, data setting is performed to set the special power prize device 32 to an open state. As a result, the special power prize device 32 is opened. Thereafter, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S1609). Since the value of the special figure special charge counter when the special charge start process is executed is "3", the value of the special figure special charge counter is "4" corresponding to the special charge open process (step S1210) by adding one. It becomes.

<Processing during special power release>
Next, the special power-on-release process executed in step S1210 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the value of the special figure special power timer counter is "0", that is, if the open continuation period has elapsed (step S1701: YES), the value of the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1702). Thereafter, information on the interval period (specifically, 3 seconds) is set in the special figure special power timer counter (step S1703). Also, the special power supply closing setting process is executed (step S1704). In the closing setting process, data setting is performed so that the special power prize device 32 is in the closing state. As a result, the special power prize device 32 is closed. Then, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S1705). Since the value of the special figure special charge counter is "4" when the special charge open process is executed, the value of the special figure special charge counter corresponds to the special charge closed process (step S1211) by being incremented by one. It becomes ".

  If the value of the special figure special power timer counter is not "0", that is, the open continuation period has not elapsed (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether or not a special prize winning device 32 has a prize ( Step S1706). It is to be noted that the determination as to whether or not a winning on special power winning device 32 has occurred is made by determining whether or not the special power winning flag in main RAM 65 is set to “1”. As described above, “1” is set to the special power winning flag in step S311 of the ball entering detection process (FIG. 14). Also, when the determination in step S1706 is affirmative, the special power winning flag is cleared to "0".

  If a winning on the special power winning device 32 has occurred (step S1706: YES), the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1707). And, when the value of the winning counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1708: YES), when the game result which became the trigger of the current opening and closing execution mode is any of the big hit results (step S1709: NO), the processing of step S1702 to step S1705 described above is executed. On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter is "0" (step S1708: YES), if the game result triggered by the current opening / closing execution mode is any small hit result (step S1709) (YES), after the value of the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S1710), the processing of steps S1704 to S1705 described above is executed.

<Processing during special power closing>
Next, the special power-on-close process executed in step S1211 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is any of the small hitting results, and there is a winning to the special power winning device 32 (step S1801: YES), the winning of the main side RAM 65 The value of the counter is decremented by 1 (step S1802). The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1801 means that the game ball that has entered the special power prize device 32 immediately before the special power prize device 32 is closed from the open state is detected by the special power detection sensor 45a. . If the value of the winning counter after subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1803: YES), the value of the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1804).

  If the value of the opening / closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is not “0” in the processing during the special power closing (step S1805: NO), it is determined whether the value of the special figure special power timer counter is “0”. It is determined whether the interval period has elapsed (step S1806). If the interval period has elapsed (step S1806: YES), the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is any of the big hit results (step S1807: YES), the number of winning upper limit The setting process is executed (step S1808). In the setting process, "10" is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 65.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1807, or if the process of step S1808 is performed, a setting process of the open continuation period is performed (step S1809). In the setting process, if the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is any of the big hit results, the information on the open continuation period of the round game (specifically 29 seconds) to the special view special power timer counter Set to In addition, in the setting process, when the current game result is the second small hit result, the information of the open continuation period for the second small hit result (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the special view special power timer counter If the current game result is the third small hit result, information of the open continuation period for the third small hit result (specifically, 1 second) is set in the special view special power timer counter.

  Thereafter, the special power release setting process is executed (step S1810). In the open setting process, data setting is performed to set the special power prize device 32 to an open state. As a result, the special power prize device 32 is opened. Thereafter, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is decremented by 1 (step S1811). Since the value of the special figure special charge counter is "5" when the special charge closed process is executed, the value of the special figure special charge counter corresponds to the special charge open process (step S1210) by being decremented by 1. It becomes ".

  On the other hand, when the value of the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65 is “0” (step S1805: YES), the setting process of the ending period is executed (step S1812). In this case, if the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit result, the information (specifically 5 seconds) corresponding to the ending period corresponding to the big hit result is set in the special view special power timer counter If the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a small hit result, the information corresponding to the ending period corresponding to the small hit result (specifically 2 seconds) to the special view special power timer counter set. Thereafter, an ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step S1813). Thereby, effects corresponding to the ending period are performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. Then, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S1814). Since the value of the special figure special charge counter is "5" when the special charge closed process is executed, the value of the special figure special charge counter is "6" corresponding to the special charge termination process (step S1212) by being incremented by 1. It becomes.

<Special power termination processing>
Next, the special power termination process executed in step S1212 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the value of the special figure special power timer counter is "0", that is, when the ending period has passed (step S1901: YES), the game result which became the trigger of this opening / closing execution mode is one of the high probability results If it is (step S1902 and step S1903: YES), "1" is set in the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1904). The high probability flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, and is high when the value of the high probability flag is “1”. In the probability mode, when the value of the high probability flag is “0”, the mode is the low probability mode. Therefore, by executing the process of step S1904, the success or failure lottery mode after the end of the current opening / closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode. In addition, when the game result which became the trigger of this opening and closing execution mode is either low probability result (step S1902: YES, step S1903: NO), the high probability flag of main side RAM65 clears “0”. (Step S1905). Thereby, the success or failure lottery mode after the end of the current opening / closing execution mode becomes the low probability mode.

  On the other hand, when the game result that is the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is any of the small hitting results (step S1902: NO), any processing of step S1904 and step S1905 is not executed. Thereby, even if the game result is any small hit result and the open / close execution mode is generated, the pass / fail lottery mode does not change before or after the open / close execution mode.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1902, or if the process of step S1904 is performed, or if the process of step S1905 is performed, the clear process is performed (step S1906). In the clear process, various flags and various counters used in the current game run and the current opening and closing execution mode are cleared to "0". However, the high probability flag of the main RAM 65 is excluded from the target of “0” clearing. After that, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is cleared to "0" (step S1907). As a result, the value of the special view special charge counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special view fluctuation start process (step S1206).

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The game ball is paid out when the game ball enters any of the general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34, so the player can choose one of these ball entering sections. The game is played while expecting the game ball to enter the game. In the configuration, the ball enters the game ball to any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter, also referred to as history target ball entry section) In the event of occurrence of a problem, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can store and hold information for managing the number of balls or the frequency of ball entry of game balls into each history target ball entry unit, and this managed information is used It becomes possible to manage appropriately the ball entering mode of the game ball to each history object ball entry part by this. In addition, since the history information is stored and held by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information.

  All ball entry units that discharge game balls from the game area PA are targets for execution of storage processing of history information and targets for management using history information. As a result, it is possible to manage the pitching frequency for any history target ball entry unit using history information. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls to be entered into each history object ball entry unit to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using history information.

  The history information includes RTC information which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the history target ball entry unit that has triggered the storage of the history information. Thereby, by using the history information, it becomes possible to grasp the ball entering history of the gaming ball to the history target ball entering unit in detail.

  In the history memory 117, not only history information corresponding to the game ball entering the history target ball entry unit, but also history information indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, whether in the high probability mode The history information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open or not is stored. Thereby, it becomes possible to distinguish whether or not each of these situations, and manage the ball entering aspect of the gaming ball to the history target ball entry part.

  The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to a reading device which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, it becomes possible to read history information by the reading device and analyze the ball entering aspect of the gaming ball to the history target ball entry unit using the read history information.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 102, and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal. In the configuration, history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for outputting the program to the outside. This makes it possible to externally output the history information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  It is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is either program or history information, and the information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the configuration in which the history information is output to the outside using the reading terminal 102 for outputting the program to the outside, the pachinko machine 10 determines which of the program and the history information is the information to be subjected to the external output. The information specified on the side is output to the outside. Therefore, even in the configuration in which the reading terminal 102 is shared, only necessary information can be read.

  Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified which of the program and the history information the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the selection of information to be externally output from becoming complicated.

  An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 for pre-storing a program has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 102. As a result, the signal path to the reading terminal 102 can be integrated in the MPU 62. Therefore, while making unauthorized access to the signal path to the reading terminal 102 difficult, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Main side CPU 63 that executes processing for making the game balls paid out based on the entry of the game balls into any of the general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, first operation opening 33 and second operation opening 34 A management side CPU 112 is separately provided, and the management side CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the ball entering aspect of the game ball to each history target ball entry part while preventing the processing load of the main side CPU 63 from extremely increasing.

  The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided as the MPU 62 in the same chip. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

  The main CPU 63 uses the signal paths corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, and the buffers of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to the ball entry sensors 42a to 48a. Send to 122a-122g. As a result, the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 correspond to the respective buffers 122a to 122g (that is, respective signal paths), and the configuration for discriminating the types of each information in the management CPU 112 is simplified. It is possible to

  Information corresponding to whether or not the main CPU 63 is in the open / close execution mode, information corresponding to whether or not the high probability mode is in progress, and information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open The signal is transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using a signal path corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the types of information corresponding to the respective situations correspond to the respective buffers 122h to 122j (that is, the respective signal paths), and the configuration for discriminating the types of the respective information in the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

  The main CPU 63 transmits, to the management CPU 112, correspondence information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (ie, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to. As a result, there is no need to store the correspondence information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be enhanced.

  When the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Thus, in a situation where game ball entry to the history target entry section may occur, the management IC 66 can specify the correspondence between information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history entry section It will be possible to

  The correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating the presence or absence of the game ball to the history target ball entry unit. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration relating to communication as compared with the configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting correspondence relationship information is provided.

  A correspondence relationship memory 116 is provided in the management IC 66, and the correspondence relationship information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. Thus, the information that enables the management IC 66 to specify the history target ball entry unit corresponding to the information to be transmitted can be transmitted each time the main CPU 63 transmits information on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. There is no need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the information of the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

  When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102 is performed. In this case, the management CPU 112 can identify that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122 p corresponds to the output instruction signal without receiving the correspondence information from the main CPU 63. . This makes it possible to prevent the configuration for transmitting the correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

  The management IC 66 is provided with buffers having a number larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 as buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63. It is done. As a result, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration regarding the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be enhanced.

  When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, correspondence information indicating the type of history target ball entry unit corresponding to the history information is included in each history information. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the ball entering aspect of the game ball to each history object ball entry part using the read history information.

  By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (Nos. 1-8, 11-18, 21 to 26 parameters are calculated. As a result, it is possible to externally output various parameters that are the result of calculation using history information.

  Various parameters are calculated in a state in which the history information corresponding to the situation in which the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Also, various parameters corresponding to the situation in the open / close execution mode and the situation in the high probability mode are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to grasp the entering manner of the game ball according to each situation.

  When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clearing process of the history memory 117. As a result, history information to the extent that the storage capacity of the history memory 117 is exceeded is to be stored in the history memory 117, and the history information that should normally be stored may be erased by overwriting. It is possible to make it hard to occur.

  When various parameters are output to the reading terminal 102, history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, when various parameters are read out and the ball entering aspect of the gaming ball in the gaming area PA is analyzed, it becomes possible to refer not only to the various parameters but also to history information that is the basis of calculation of the various parameters.

  The management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of computing various parameters.

  When the main CPU 63 identifies that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and the information of the output instruction is transmitted from the main CPU 63, various parameters are calculated by the management IC 66. The various parameters of the calculation result are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various parameters can be output to a reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on an instruction from the main CPU 63.

  It is specified whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 in the process at the time of the start of supply of the operation power executed by the main CPU 63, and the reading device is electrically connected. Is specified, the information on the output instruction is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Thus, in the situation where processing at the time of supply start of operating power is executed in the main CPU 63 or the like, that is, in the situation before the normal processing for causing the main CPU 63 to proceed with the game is started. Calculation of parameters and external output of various parameters of the calculation result are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation result from being performed in a situation where the game ball may enter the history target ball storage part, and the processing load of the management IC 66 It is possible to reduce.

  The history information is stored in the history memory 117 in a configuration in which when the game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, the corresponding external output is performed through the external terminal board 97. . Thereby, by using information externally output through the external terminal board 97, the number of ball entry into the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 and the frequency of ball entry can be simply grasped, By using the history information stored in the memory 117, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of ball entry and the frequency of ball entry of the game ball into the history target ball entry part.

  The through gate 35 is provided at a position where entry of the game ball is limited in the gaming state other than the open / close execution mode and the entry of the game ball is possible in the open / close execution mode. Thus, the game ball can not only enter the fourth discharge passage 45 of the special power prize device 32 by switching to the open / close execution mode, but also can enter the game ball into the through gate 35 Become. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the profit of shifting to the open / close execution mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

  When entry of the game ball to the through gate 35 occurs, the hold information on the common drawing side is acquired, and when the hold information on the common drawing side is acquired, the second operation opening 34 is opened with high probability It becomes. When the game ball enters the second operation opening 34, either the big hit result or the small hit result is generated to generate the open / close execution mode. That is, generation of the open / close execution mode makes it possible to enter the game ball into the through gate 35, and when the game ball enters the through gate 35, the open / close execution mode may be generated again. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the open / close execution mode is continuously generated, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The open / close execution mode may be generated based on the game ball entering the first operation opening 33 where the game ball may enter regardless of the entry of the game ball into the through gate 35. And, as described above, the opening and closing execution mode can be generated, and the game ball can enter the through gate 35, and the opening and closing execution mode can be generated again by the game ball entering the through gate 35. In this case, the player is expected to start the opening and closing execution mode based on the ball entry of the gaming ball into the first operation port 33 in the situation where the opening and closing execution mode is not set. It is expected that the open / close execution mode will be continuously generated based on the entry of the game ball to the.

  The probability that the open / close execution mode occurs when the game ball enters the through gate 35 is higher than the probability that the open / close execution mode occurs when the game ball enters the first operation port 33. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for the game ball to enter the through gate 35 in the open / close execution mode.

  The expected value for which the open / close execution mode is generated after the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the hold information on the general drawing side is acquired does not change according to the game state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with a configuration in which the expected value is varied according to the gaming state, and management of the expected value is facilitated. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not change according to the game state, it becomes difficult to give intonation to the game. On the other hand, as described above, since the game ball can enter the through gate 35 in the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to give a towing opportunity to acquire the holding information on the side of the drawing. As a result, it becomes possible to give intonation to a game.

  The game ball can enter the second operation port 34 by entering the game ball into the through gate 35, and the game ball enters the second operation port 34 to trigger transition to the open / close execution mode. Occur. Thus, in order to continuously generate the open / close execution mode, it is necessary to cause the game ball to enter the through gate 35 in the open / close execution mode and further to cause the game ball to enter the second operation opening 34. Become. Therefore, the uncertainty of the continuous generation of the open / close execution mode is increased, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The special power prize device 32, the second operation port 34, and the through gate 35 are provided at positions where the gaming balls flowing down or flowing down the right side area PA3 can enter. As a result, for example, by rotating the firing operation device 28 with the maximum operation amount so that the gaming ball flows down the right side area PA3, winning on the special power winning device 32, winning on the second operation opening 34, and through It becomes possible to aim at winning all at the gate 35 collectively.

  When the special power winning device 32 switches from one of the open state to the closed state, the game ball can enter the through gate 35. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the switching timing of this state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the target to which the player should pay attention in the opening / closing execution mode, and to improve the interest of the game in the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, the through gate 35 is provided at a position where the inflow of gaming balls can be made at the timing when the special power prize device 32 switches from one of the open state to the closed state. As a result, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved only by making the positional relationship of the through gate 35 with respect to the special electric winning device 32 the above-described relationship.

  When the open / close member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, the gaming ball on the induction plate portion 214 of the open / close member 202 can enter the through gate 35. As a result, in the opening / closing execution mode, the player is not only whether or not the game ball enters the fourth discharge passage 45 of the special power winning device 32 but the game ball is placed on the guiding plate 214. It will be noted whether or not the guide plate portion 214 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other in the state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game in the open / close execution mode.

  At the timing when the special power winning device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state, a trigger for entering the game ball to the through gate 35 is generated. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention level not only when the special power prize device 32 is in the open state but also at the timing when it is switched to the closed state.

  The guiding plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 is formed such that the gaming ball placed on the guiding plate portion 214 flows downward along the guiding plate portion 214 to the left. The through gate 35 is placed on the game ball when the open / close member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball is placed on the predetermined range X which is a partial range of the induction plate portion 214 Is provided at a position where it can enter the ball by falling downward. In this case, in order for the game ball to enter the through gate 35, not only the game ball is placed on the induction plate portion 214 in the situation where the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, It is necessary to move the opening and closing member 202 from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing in which X is in the predetermined range X. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the gaming ball placed on the induction plate 214 and the switching timing of the state of the opening / closing member 202, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the opening / closing execution mode. It becomes.

  A guiding nail group 241 for guiding the gaming ball having flowed into the right side area PA3 to the right end side of the opening / closing member 202 is provided on the upstream side of the special power winning device 32. A predetermined range X, which is a range that enables the game ball to enter the through gate 35 in the guiding plate portion 214, is set to be biased to the left end side of the opening and closing member 202. Thus, in order for the game ball to enter the through gate 35, the open / close member 202 needs to be moved from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing during the game ball is flowing down on the induction plate portion 214. is there. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the induction plate portion 214, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game in the open / close execution mode.

  Further, in the special electric winning device 32, the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 is present to the left of the predetermined range X, which is a range that allows the game ball to enter the through gate 35 in the induction plate 214. doing. As a result, the gaming ball which has been on the guiding plate 214 but has not reached the entrance 45 b enters the through gate 35. Therefore, the player's sense of disadvantage for the game ball placed on the induction plate 214 not winning the special power winning device 32 is conversely changed to a sense of profit for the winning of the through gate 35. It becomes possible.

  The jackpot results include, for example, 2R high probability results and 16R high probability results, and open / close execution mode triggered by 2R high probability results and open / close execution triggered by 16R high results The ease with which the game ball enters the through gate 35 differs from mode to mode. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the through gate 35 is expected to generate the open / close execution mode in which the game ball is likely to enter the through gate 35, thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

  In a configuration that enables entry of gaming balls to the through gate 35 when the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed, for example, the opening and closing execution mode and the 16R high probability result are triggered by the 2R high probability result. The number of times of opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 differs in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the event. As a result, in the open / close execution mode in which the expected value for entering the gaming ball to the special power winning device 32 increases, the expected value for entering the gaming ball to the through gate 35 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation for the generation of the open / close execution mode in which the number of times of opening / closing of the special power winning device 32 is large.

  When the game ball enters the second operation port 34, not only the big hit result but also the small hit result can be obtained, and the probability of the small hit result is higher than the probability of the big hit result. As a result, by causing the game ball to enter the second operation opening 34, the open / close execution mode is easily generated. In this case, it is possible to enter the ball into the through gate 35 that causes the second operation port 34 to open in a predetermined situation. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the second operation port 34 expects the occurrence of a predetermined situation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The predetermined situation is a situation in which the open / close execution mode is being executed. Thus, as described above, when the open / close execution mode is generated once, it is possible to generate a situation in which the open / close execution mode is continuously generated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the low probability mode, the average period of the variation display periods of the game times that are executed based on the entry of the game ball to the second operation port 34 and does not result in the big hit is the first operation port 33 in the low probability mode. It is the game time which is executed based on the entry of the game ball, and is equal to, substantially the same as or less than the average period of the variable display period of the game time which is not a jackpot result. This makes it possible to prevent the digest rate of the former game play from becoming extremely worse than the digest rate of the latter game play. However, in the case where the configuration is such that the frequency at which the second operation opening 34 is opened with respect to the entry of the game ball to the through gate 35 is constant regardless of the game state while having the configuration, the low probability mode It is assumed that the game is performed aiming at the entry of the game ball into the second operation opening 34. On the other hand, in the situation where the open / close execution mode is not set, the game ball can not enter the through gate 35. Therefore, in the low probability mode, it is possible to aim for a game to be performed by aiming the game ball into the first operation opening 33.

Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I / F 111, the type of the signal to be input is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66. It differs from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 to make the management CPU 112 identify the type of the input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 in this embodiment.

  The same types of signals as the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. The second signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth buffer 122d is the fourth corresponding to the detection result of the electric power detection sensor 45a. A signal is input, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction is output to the sixteenth buffer 122p. No. is input.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as an eighth signal, and a signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as a ninth signal. Although the signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122 j as the tenth signal, in the present embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as a signal during the open / close execution mode, and a signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as a signal during the high probability mode. A signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122 o as a door open signal.

  The signal in the open / close execution mode is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, the signal in the high probability mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n, the signal in the door open is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and the sixteenth It is decided at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is inputted to the buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 receives these instructions from the main CPU 63 to these thirteenth to sixteenth buffers 122m to 122p. It is possible to specify that each of the above signals corresponding to each is input. On the other hand, it has not been decided at the design stage of the management IC 66 which kind of signal is input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l, and the types of these signals receive an instruction from the main CPU 63 Is identified by the management CPU 112. The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the recognition process of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed at step S110 in the main process (FIG. 11) as in the first embodiment.

  First, "12", which is the number of first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l to be recognized as signal types, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2001). Thereafter, output processing of the identification start signal is executed (step S2002). In the output process, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high probability mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are By setting it to the HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period in which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Thereafter, information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the output counter for recognition of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the information on the number of outputs read is set in the output number counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S2003). The output number counter is a counter for specifying the number of outputs of the type identification signal by the main CPU 63.

  In the present embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 recognizes the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 1221, the number of winning balls set for the ball entry unit corresponding to the type of the signal And output the type identification signal the same number of times. The management side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. . That is, the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 1221 is grasped as the number of winning balls set for the ball entry unit corresponding to the type of the signal.

  In step S2003, when the value of the recognition output counter is any of "12", "11" and "10", "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls in the general winning opening 31 is set in the output number counter . When the value of the recognition output counter is “9”, “15” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “8”, “1” corresponding to the number of winning balls in the first operation opening 33 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “7”, “1” corresponding to the number of winning balls in the second operation port 34 is set in the output number counter. In addition, when the value of the recognition output counter is "6", although the game ball corresponds to the out port 24a but the game ball does not enter even if the game ball enters the out port 24a, the output frequency counter is not executed. Set “0” to Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is any one of “5” to “1”, “0” is set to the output number counter because the corresponding ball entry unit does not exist and is blank.

  Thereafter, output processing of the start trigger signal is executed (step S2004). In the output process, the output state of the start signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period in which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the value of the output number counter of the main side RAM 65 is not “0” (step S2005: YES), that is, on condition that the value of 1 or more is set to the output number counter in step S2003. Proceed to step S2006. In step S2006, output processing of a type identification signal is performed. In the output process, the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122 b is set to the HI level to start the output of the type identification signal. The period in which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

  Thereafter, the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one (step S2007), and it is determined whether the value of the output number counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S2008). When the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S2008: NO), the process returns to step S2006.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2008, an output process of an end trigger signal is executed (step S2009). In the output process, the output state of the termination trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122 c to the HI level. The period in which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

  Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one (step S2010), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S2011). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2011: NO), the process returns to step S2003 to execute processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after one subtraction. Do.

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S2011: YES), output processing of the identification end signal is executed (step S2012). In the output process, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high probability mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are By setting it to the HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period in which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Next, the management processing in the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operation power to the management CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

  If the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2101: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S2102). Thereafter, on the condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2103: YES), the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, it is determined whether the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63 or not. When the type identification signal is received (step S2104: YES), the value of the reception number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2105). The reception number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63 by the management CPU 112. Note that the value of the reception number counter is cleared to “0” when an affirmative determination is made in step S2103.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2104, or if the process of step S2105 is performed, it is determined whether an end trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2106). If the end trigger signal has not been received (step S2106: NO), the process returns to step S2104. If the end trigger signal has been received (step S2106: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S2107). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116, the reception count counter is set to the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114. Store the value being stored. In this case, "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls in the general winning opening 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c, and the fourth correspondence area 123d is set. “15” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the special electric power winning device 32 is set, “1” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the first operation port 33 is set in the fifth correspondence relationship area 123 e. In the area 123f, "1" corresponding to the number of winning balls in the second operation opening 34 is set. In addition, “0” is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123 g to 123 l. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2108).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103, or if the process of step S2108 is executed, it is determined whether the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S2109). If the reception of the identification end signal is not completed (step S2109: NO), the process returns to step S2103, and on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2103: YES) Run. If the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S2109: YES), the history setting process of step S2110 and the external output process of step S2111 are repeatedly executed.

  FIG. 49 is a time chart showing how the correspondence relationship memory 116 stores the correspondence relationship between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122l. 49 (a) shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is HI level, and FIG. 49 (b) shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is HI level. Shows a period in which the output state of the third signal is HI level, FIG. 49 (d) shows a period in which the output state of the signal is HI level during the open / close execution mode, and FIG. FIG. 49 (f) shows the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l during the high probability mode signal output state is HI level. 49 (g) shows the timing when the value of the reception number counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by one, and FIG. 49 (h) shows the management in the identification state in which the process for identifying the relationship is executed. Supported by CPU side 112 Indicating timing for engagement setting process (step S2107) is executed.

  As the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as shown in FIGS. 49 (a), 49 (d) and 49 (e), at the timing of t1, the first signal is generated. The output states of the open / close execution mode signal and the high probability mode signal are changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereby, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at time t2, the output states of the first signal, the switching ON / OFF execution mode signal, and the high probability mode switching signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2101 of the management processing (FIG. 48) to be in an identification state as shown in FIG. 49 (f).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 49A, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level over the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 49B, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level over the timing of t5 to the timing of t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management CPU 112 once. In this case, as shown in FIG. 49 (g), the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by one at the timing of t6.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 49C, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level over the timing of t8 to the timing of t10. As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t9, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 as shown in FIG. 49 (h). Since the value of the reception number counter is “1” at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, the correspondence relation areas 123 a to 123 l of the current setting target in the correspondence relation memory 116 “1 Stores the information of

  After that, as shown in FIG. 49A, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level over the timing of t11 to the timing of t12. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, a timing t13 to a timing t15, a timing t16 to a timing t18, a timing t19 to a timing t21, and a timing t22 to a timing t24, as shown in FIG. 49 (b). The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management side CPU 112 once. In this case, as shown in FIG. 49 (g), the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by one at each of the timing of t14, the timing of t17, the timing of t20 and the timing of t23.

  After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 49C from timing t25 to timing t27. As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t26, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 as shown in FIG. 49 (h). Since the value of the reception number counter is “10” at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, “10” is set as the correspondence information in correspondence relation areas 123 a to 123 l of the current setting target in the correspondence memory 116. Stores the information of

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 49C, 49D and 49E, at the timing of t28, the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal and the high probability mode signal are LOW level Is changed to HI level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the signal in the switching execution mode and the signal in the high probability mode are changed from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2109 of the management processing (FIG. 48), whereby the identification state is canceled as shown in FIG. 49 (f).

  In the present embodiment, since the information on the number of winning balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 corresponds to the winning ball corresponding to the ball entry portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number is included as correspondence information. In the said structure, when two or more types of ball entry parts with which the number of prize balls is the same exist, those ball parts can not be distinguished in historical information. Specifically, since the number of winning balls is one in each of the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 may be distinguished in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of winning balls in the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 may be made different. As a result, even if history information is stored as in the second embodiment, it is possible to distinguish between the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 in the history information.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “15” is set in the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 in step S801 of the history setting process. As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are checked.

  According to the embodiment described above, not only the output instruction signal but also information corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, information corresponding to whether or not the high probability mode is in progress, and the front door frame The information corresponding to whether or not 14 is in the open state can also be specified by the management side CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence information from the main side CPU 63 that the signal path corresponds to the information. ing. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection result of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a needs to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence between each information and each signal path 118a to 118g. Become. Then, when making the management side CPU 112 recognize the correspondence information, the pulse signals of the same number as the number of balls corresponding to the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a make use of the second signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU112. Output to This makes it possible to simplify the configuration regarding transmission of correspondence information.

Third Embodiment
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the calculation of various parameters using history information is executed. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 50 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I / F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117. These functions are the same as in the first embodiment.

  In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131. In the present embodiment, when an operation trigger occurs as described in detail later, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. Then, the calculated various parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 131. The various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

  The operation trigger of various parameters occurs before the timing when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. As a result, it is possible to differentiate between the time of calculating various parameters and the time of outputting to the reader externally, and it becomes possible to disperse the processing load.

  In addition, since the memory 131 for calculation results for storing calculation results of various parameters is provided, not only various parameters for one calculation trigger but also various parameters for plural calculation triggers are put together. It becomes possible to memorize. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required to calculate various parameters in each operation trigger.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The same types of signals as the first embodiment are input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p. In detail, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second buffer 122b is corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth buffer 122d is the fourth corresponding to the detection result of the electric power detection sensor 45a. A signal is input, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h. A signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and a signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. An output instruction signal is input.

  In the present embodiment, the calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122 o as well as the various signals. The operation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 63 to provide the management CPU 112 with an operation trigger of various parameters. The fact that the operation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, similarly to the case where the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p, and an instruction from the main CPU 63 Without being received, the management CPU 112 can specify that the signals corresponding to the fifteenth to sixteenth buffers 122o to 122p are input. On the other hand, it has not been determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, and the types of these signals receive an instruction from the main CPU 63 Is identified by the management CPU 112. The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  Next, a processing configuration for causing the management side CPU 112 to execute calculation of various parameters in response to the occurrence of the calculation trigger will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU 63. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

  In the power failure information storage process, when the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption is received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S2201: YES), the process of outputting the operation instruction signal is executed (step S2202). In the output process, the output state of the operation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o at the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the operation instruction signal is HI level. Thereafter, after power failure processing is executed in step S2203, an infinite loop is established, and standby is performed until supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure process, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, and the checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the power failure handling process executed by the management side CPU 112. The power failure handling process is configured to be executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 22), and after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 in the management process (step S606: YES) The history setting process of step S608, the process for external output in step S608, and the power failure handling process are repeatedly executed in this order.

  In the power failure handling process, when the output state of the operation instruction signal received from main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2301: YES), the external output in the first embodiment is performed in step S2302 to step S2306. In the same manner as steps S1002 to S1006 of the processing (FIG. 28), the number of balls entered to each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 is calculated. . Further, in step S2307, the number of ball entry is calculated while the front door frame 14 is open, as in step S1007 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. In step S2308, various parameters are calculated as in step S1008 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, and in step S2309, for external output in the first embodiment. The total time is calculated as in step S1009 of the process (FIG. 28). Then, the information of the calculation result of step S2308 and the information of the calculation result of step S2309 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2310). In this case, when information of another operation result is already stored in the operation result memory 131, writing of the information of the operation result is performed so as not to overwrite the information of the operation result already stored. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result of the current writing. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  After that, in step S2311, the number of ball entry in the open / close execution mode is calculated as in step S1011 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, and in step S2312, the first number is entered. Similar to step S1012 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the embodiment, the number of entering balls is calculated in the open / close execution mode and the front door frame 14 is open. Further, in step S2313, various parameters are calculated as in step S1013 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the calculation result of step S2314 is written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S2314). In this case, the information of the calculation result is written so as not to overwrite the information of the other calculation results already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result of the current writing. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  After that, in step S2315, the number of balls entering in the high probability mode is calculated in the same manner as step S1015 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, Similar to step S1016 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the second embodiment, the number of various balls in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open in the high probability mode is calculated. In step S2317, various parameters are calculated as in step S1017 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the calculation result of step S2317 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2318). In this case, the information of the calculation result is written so as not to overwrite the information of the other calculation results already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result of the current writing. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing. After that, it becomes an infinite loop, and waits until the supply of operation power to the management side CPU 112 is completely stopped.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an external output process performed by the management side CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

  If the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 has become the HI level (step S2401: YES), output processing of the operation result is executed (step S2402). In the output process, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, the various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read. In this case, when only various operation results corresponding to the occurrence of one operation trigger are stored in the operation result memory 131, only the various operation results corresponding to the occurrence of the one operation operation are stored in the reading device. In the case where various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of a plurality of calculation triggers are stored in the memory 131 for calculation results, the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the plurality of calculation triggers are read by the reading device .

  Thereafter, output processing of history information is executed (step S2403). In the output process, all pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various types of history information stored in the history area 124 can be read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. By outputting not only various calculation results but also history information in this way, it becomes possible for a worker using a reader to perform detailed analysis on various calculation results.

  Thereafter, the clear process is executed (step S2404). In the clear processing, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is all cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. Further, in the clear processing, all the areas of the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to "0". As a result, the calculation result memory 131 is initialized.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. As a result, various parameters can be managed on a business day basis.

  When it is specified in the main CPU 63 that the supply of the operating power is stopped, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to the HI level, and the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. As a result, various parameters can be calculated by the management CPU 112 based on an instruction from the main CPU 63.

  Various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 are sequentially written to the calculation result memory 131. As a result, various parameters can be accumulated by the management IC 66, and when reading various parameters by the reading device, various parameters of a plurality of business days can be collectively read.

  When various parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131, information for specifying the timing at which the various parameters are calculated is written in the calculation result memory 131 along with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping the time when various parameters are calculated.

  Note that when the operation trigger occurs and the operation results of various parameters corresponding thereto are written in the operation result memory 131, the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0". As a result, in the situation where the recordable upper limit number of pieces of history information is already stored in the history memory 117, an event that new history information becomes a write target to the history memory 117 is less likely to occur.

  Further, the target information externally output to the reading device may be only information of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be output outside . This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information output to the outside.

Fourth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure handling process executed by the management side CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the power failure handling process executed by the management CPU 112 in the present embodiment.

  When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2501: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2502). In the various calculation processes, the processes of step S2302 to step S2309, step S2311 to step S2313, and step S2315 to step S2317 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment are executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S2502 is within the reference range (step S2503). In particular,
· Seventh parameter: (K3 × "number of prize balls for winning in special power winning device 32" + K5 × "number of prize balls for winning in second operation opening 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "general" Number of winning balls for winning in the winning opening 31 + K3 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K 4 × “number of winning balls for winning in the first operation opening 33” + K 5 × “second operation opening 34 Ratio of winning balls to winnings)) 8th parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning on special electric winning device 32” / total payout number of gaming balls (K 2 × for winning in general winning opening 31 Number of prize balls "+ K3 x" Number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 x" Number of prize balls for winning on first operation port 33 "+ K5 x" Number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34 Two parameters of the proportion of It is set as a parameter to be determined whether or not it is a reference range. When the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, an affirmative determination is made in step S2503 because the predetermined parameter is in the reference range.

The predetermined parameter is not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter. Instead of or in addition to these, another parameter may be set as the predetermined parameter. For example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) of game balls discharged from the total game number K2 / game area PA to the general winning opening 31 / the game area PA may be set as a predetermined parameter . In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be in the reference range. Alternatively, only predetermined parameters to be determined in step S2503 may be calculated in various calculation processes of step S2502.

  If the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range (step S2503: NO), the various parameters calculated at step S2502 are written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S2504). In this case, when information of another operation result is already stored in the operation result memory 131, writing of the information of the operation result is performed so as not to overwrite the information of the operation result already stored. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result of the current writing. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined parameter is in the reference range (step S2503: YES), the process of step S2504 is not performed. As a result, only various parameters in the case where the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range are written to the calculation result memory 131. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, the memory capacity necessary for the calculation result memory 131 can be suppressed while leaving the history in the calculation result memory 131.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503 or if the process of step S2504 is executed, the process of clearing the history memory 117 is executed (step S2505). In the clear processing, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is all cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. After the processing of step S2505 is executed, an infinite loop is established, and the process waits until the supply of operation power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

  According to the present embodiment described above, it is determined whether the contents of various parameters calculated are included in the reference range, and only the various parameters determined to be included in the reference range are stored in the calculation result memory 131 Will be written. As a result, the amounts of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131 can be reduced, and the required storage capacity of the calculation result memory 131 can be reduced.

Fifth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the content of the operation trigger for causing the management side CPU 112 to execute the operation of various parameters is different from that of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 56 (a) is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S 712 in the management output process (FIG. 24).

  It is determined whether or not entering of the gaming ball into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 has occurred (step S2601). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, an addition process of the ball entry counter provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2602). In the addition process, the number of game balls in which entry to any one of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 is the current processing In the management output process (FIG. 24), the process is specified based on the number of times step S 705 has been executed. Then, the number of the identified game balls is added to the entry counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the entry counter is equal to or greater than “500” which is the trigger reference number (step S2603). If it is "500" or more (step S2603: YES), subtraction processing of the entering counter of the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S2604). In the subtraction process, the value of the entering counter is subtracted by "500". Thereafter, output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S2605). In the output process, the output state of the operation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o at the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the operation instruction signal is HI level.

  FIG. 56 (b) is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management CPU 112. The calculation process is a process that is executed instead of the power failure handling process in the third embodiment. Therefore, the arithmetic processing is executed after the external output processing in the management processing (FIG. 22), and after the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 in the management processing (step S606: YES), The history setting process, the process for external output in step S608, and the arithmetic process are repeatedly performed in this order.

  If the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2701: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2702). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S2302 to S2318 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described above, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the trigger reference number. In this case, various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where the main CPU 63 is supplied with operating power, so that the game balls enter the game area PA within the range of one business day It becomes possible to manage the aspect in detail.

  In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA has become equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the various parameters are conditioned on the condition that a game is being executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

Sixth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the content of the operation trigger for causing the management side CPU 112 to execute the operation of various parameters is different from that of the fifth embodiment. The configuration different from the fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S 712 in the management output process (FIG. 24).

  It is determined whether or not entering of the game ball into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 has occurred (step S2801). If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2802). The continuation counter is a main CPU 63 during a period in which the gaming ball does not enter the game in any of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34. It is a counter for specifying in.

  If the value of the continuation counter after the addition of 1 is greater than or equal to the stop reference value (step S2803: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2804). If the game ball does not enter the game in any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 continues for 5 seconds, an affirmative determination is made in step S2803. The stop reference value is set to Further, the time measurement flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not to measure the time for specifying the timing of switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level, and the time measurement flag When the value of is “0”, the measurement of the time is not performed, and when the value of the time measurement flag is “1”, the measurement of the time is performed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, "1" is set in the time measurement flag (step S2805).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2803, or if the process of step S2804 is executed, or if the process of step S2805 is executed, the condition that the time measurement flag of the main RAM 65 is set to “1” ( Step S2806: YES), the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2807). The measurement counter is a counter used to measure the time for specifying the timing of switching the output state of the operation instruction signal to the HI level.

  It is determined whether the value of the measurement counter after 1 addition is greater than or equal to the designated reference value (step S2808). The instruction reference value is set to make an affirmative determination in step S2808 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S2809), and output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S2810). In the output process, the output state of the operation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o at the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the operation instruction signal is HI level.

  According to the present embodiment described above, since various parameters are calculated each time a predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped in a situation where the game is not executed, and the measurement of the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop when the game play is started. This makes it possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation targets of the various parameters, and it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters in the situation in which the game is being executed.

  Note that, instead of the configuration in which whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed is measured using the measurement counter, it may be configured to be measured using the RTC 115.

Seventh Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the content of the operation trigger for causing the management side CPU 112 to execute the operation of various parameters is different from that of the first embodiment, and the main CPU 63 specifies the presence or absence of the occurrence of the operation trigger Instead, it is performed independently by the management CPU 112. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing executed by the management CPU 112. The calculation process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S812 in the history setting process (FIG. 25).

  Corresponds to the entry of the game ball to any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history setting process of this processing cycle It is determined whether the history information to be stored is stored in the history memory 117 (step S2901). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, an addition process of the ball entry counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S2902). In the addition process, the number of game balls in which entry to any one of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 is the current processing It specifies based on the number of times of storing history information corresponding to generation | occurrence | production of the ball entering of a game ball in history setting processing of. Then, the number of the identified game balls is added to the entry counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the entry counter is equal to or greater than "500" which is the trigger reference number (step S2903). If "500" or more (step S2903: YES), subtraction processing of the entering counter of the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S2904). In the subtraction process, the value of the entering counter is subtracted by "500". Thereafter, various calculation processes are executed (step S2905). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S2302 to S2318 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described above, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the trigger reference number. In this case, various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where the main CPU 63 is supplied with operating power, so that the game balls enter the game area PA within the range of one business day It becomes possible to manage the aspect in detail.

  In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA has become equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the various parameters are conditioned on the condition that a game is being executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

  Further, the total number of gaming balls discharged from the game area PA is measured by the management CPU 112, and it is determined by the management CPU 112 whether the total number has reached the trigger reference number or more. That is, the operation side of the various parameters is uniquely determined by the management CPU 112. As a result, since it is not necessary for the main CPU 63 to execute processing for determining the operation trigger of various parameters, the processing load of the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

Eighth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, a memory for operation results 131 is provided in the management IC 66 as in the third embodiment (see FIG. 50). When an operation trigger occurs, the management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 and writes various parameters of the calculation result in the calculation result memory 131. Further, in the present embodiment, a signal indicating that the open / close execution mode has been started, a signal indicating that the open / close execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high probability mode has been started, and the high probability mode have ended. Of the front door frame 14, the signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has been started, and the signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has ended are individually transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Be done.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a history setting process according to the present embodiment which is executed by the management side CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers to be checked in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S3001). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas storing information other than the information indicating blank is specified, and the specification The set number of information is set in the check target counter. In the present embodiment, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g store information indicating that the ball corresponds to one of the ball entry parts, and the eighth correspondence area 123h is used to start the open / close execution mode. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and information corresponding to the start of the high probability mode is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j. The information corresponding to the end of the high probability mode is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k, and the information corresponding to the opening start of the front door frame 14 is stored in the twelfth correspondence area 123l. The information corresponding to the open end of the front door frame 14 is stored in the 13 correspondence area 123 m. Therefore, in step S3001, "13" is set in the confirmation target counter.

  After that, it is confirmed whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S3002). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are the check targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is the check target of numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the target of confirmation of numerical information. .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, date information and RTC information that is time information are read out from the RTC 115 (step S3003). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S3004). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 which is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information which is the writing target is identified. The RTC information read in step S3003 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence relationship information is read out from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current check target counter, and the correspondence relationship information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the write target. When the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence areas 123 a to 123 o are the read targets of the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth correspondence area 123 j is the read target of the correspondence information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123 e is the correspondence relation It becomes an object of reading information.

  Thereafter, the value of the target pointer is incremented by 1 (step S3005). Specifically, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and the numerical value information is incremented by one. Then, it is determined whether the pointer information after the one addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S3006).

  If the maximum value is exceeded (step S3006: YES), various arithmetic processing is executed (step S3007). In the various arithmetic processing, the same processing as step S1002 to step S1009, step S1011 to step S1013 and step S1015 to step S1017 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, various parameters of the calculation result and information of the total time are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S3008). In this case, when information of another operation result is already stored in the operation result memory 131, writing of the information of the operation result is performed so as not to overwrite the information of the operation result already stored. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result of the current writing. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  Thereafter, handover processing of status information is executed (step S3009). In the handover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, it is determined whether the current state is in the open / close execution mode, whether or not the high probability mode is in progress, and the front door frame 14 is open. Determine if there is. Then, their state information is written to the management side RAM 114.

  Thereafter, the clear process of the history memory 117 is executed (step S3010). In the clear processing, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is all cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. In addition, after executing the clearing process, the state information written in the management RAM 114 in step S3009 is read. When the state information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in effect is stored, the history information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in effect is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the target of writing. While writing, the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. Further, when state information indicating that the high probability mode is in effect is stored, history information indicating that the high probability mode is in effect is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is to be written. While writing, the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. Further, when the state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened is stored, the history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened corresponds to the pointer information to be written. While writing in the history information storage area 125, the pointer information to be written is incremented by one.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3002, a negative determination is made in step S3006, or the process of step S3010 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S3012). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S3012: NO), the processing of step S3002 and subsequent steps is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  According to the present embodiment described above, various parameters are calculated when the history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where history information becomes a storage target exceeding the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117 and the calculation of various parameters can not be accurately performed.

  Further, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that has already been subjected to calculation of various parameters from becoming another calculation target of various parameters.

  In addition, even when the history memory 117 is initialized, the handover process of the state information is executed. Thus, management of state information can be appropriately performed.

The ninth embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 are different from those of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. First to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o are provided in the areas 141 to 144, respectively. Information of the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122 b has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the second counters 141 b to 144 b of the areas 141 to 144. Information of the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third counters 141c to 144c of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122 d has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourth counters 141 d to 144 d of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122 e has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fifth counters 141 e to 144 e of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122 f has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the sixth counters 141 f to 144 f of the areas 141 to 144. The seventh counters 141 g to 144 g of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122 g has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122 h has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eighth counters 141 h to 144 h of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the ninth counters 141i to 144i of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information of the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122 j has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 141 j to 144 j of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122 k has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eleventh counters 141 k to 144 k of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 1221 has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 1411 to 1441 of each area 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122 m has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the thirteenth counters 141 m to 144 m of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122 n has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourteenth counters 141 n to 144 n of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fifteenth counters 141o to 144o of the areas 141 to 144, respectively.

  However, the measurement object using the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, 144a to 144o are the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation They are the 1st-7th buffers 122a-122g into which the signal corresponding to the ball entering result in either of the mouth 33 and the 2nd operation mouth 34 is inputted. Therefore, signals corresponding to state information, such as whether or not in the open / close execution mode, whether or not the high probability mode, or the front door frame 14 is being opened, are input. The buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the measurement targets. The distinction as to whether or not they are to be measured is made on the basis of the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a history setting process according to the present embodiment which is executed by the management side CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers to be checked in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S3101). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas storing information other than the information indicating blank is specified, and the specification The set number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, since information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j as already described, “10” is set in the check target counter in step S3101. Do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current check target counter are buffers to which a signal of state information is input (step S3102). Specifically, in the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current check target counter, information indicating the open / close execution mode, information indicating the high probability mode, and the front door as correspondence information It is determined whether any of the information indicating the frame 14 is stored.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3102, setting processing of state information is executed (step S3103). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the management of the information of the first state indicating that the open / close execution mode is being performed It is stored in the RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the first state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Also, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high probability mode is in effect switches from the LOW level to the HI level, the information on the second state indicating that the high probability mode is being stored is stored in the management RAM 114 When the output state of the ninth signal is switched from HI level to LOW level, the information of the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information of a third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. Are stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from HI level to LOW level, the information of the third state is erased from the management side RAM 114.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3102, the buffer corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the buffer to which a signal of information different from the state information is input Whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level by confirming whether the numerical information being changed is changed from "0" to "1" or not It is determined whether or not it is (step S3104). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3104, an adding process of the corresponding total counter is executed (step S3105). In the addition processing, among the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o for totaling in the total area 141 of the history memory 117, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth total counter 141e is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first total counter 141a is the addition target. .

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is judged whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode (step S3106). If it is in the first state (step S3106: YES), an adding process of the corresponding first state counter is executed (step S3107). In the addition process, among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state is It becomes an addition object.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is judged whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high probability mode (step S3108). If it is in the second state (step S3108: YES), an adding process of the corresponding second state counter is executed (step S3109). In the addition processing, among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117, the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state is It becomes an addition object.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is judged whether or not it is in the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S3110). If it is in the third state (step S3110: YES), processing for adding the counter for the corresponding third state is executed (step S3111). In the addition processing, among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117, the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 144 e for the third state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first counter 144 a for the third state is It becomes an addition object.

  If the process of step S3103 is executed, if the negative determination is made in step S3104, if the negative determination is made in step S3110, or if the process of step S3111 is performed, the value of the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to 1 The subtraction is performed (step S3112). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S3113). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S3113: NO), the processing of step S3102 and subsequent steps is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history of the gaming ball to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 Instead of being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times the game ball is detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the history memory 117 as compared to a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  As described above, the configuration is such that the game ball is detected as the number of times information detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. A process of calculating the number of game balls entered into the game machine, a process of calculating the number of game balls placed in the special electric power winning device 32 such as step S1004 and a number of game balls entered into the first operation opening 33 such as step S1005 The process of calculating and the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34, such as step S1006, become unnecessary. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for computing various parameters.

  In the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 as in step S1003, all of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, 144a to 144c are general winning openings. Since it corresponds to 31, it is necessary to execute processing of summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c. In addition, the number of ball entry occurring in the situation in which the front door frame 14 is in the opening / closing execution mode can not be distinguished from the number of ball entry occurring in any other situation. Therefore, the process of step S1012 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 28) in the present embodiment. Similarly, it is impossible to distinguish the number of balls generated in the high probability mode and the front door frame 14 being opened from the number of balls generated in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1016 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 28) in the present embodiment.

Tenth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, storage means in which history information is stored is different from the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 62 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in this embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I / F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, and a management RAM 114, as in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 as in the third embodiment. Since the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the history memory 117, history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the history of entering the ball into the out port 24 a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. That is, the main RAM 65, which temporarily stores information necessary for executing a program in the main CPU 63, is also used as a memory for storing the ball entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main RAM 65 through the management I / F 111, and when an operation trigger for various parameters occurs, the main RAM 65 is accessed to read the ball entry history and read the ball entry history. Various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history. The various parameters thus calculated are stored in the calculation result memory 131. When the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various parameters are provided from the operation result memory 131 to the reading device, but the ball entry history stored in the main RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device .

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the ball-entering detection processing according to the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. The ball entry detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

  When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored for the 0th bit D0 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, 1 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. It is determined that individual gaming balls have been detected (step S3201: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3202). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 as a ball entry history. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to “0” when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and reading of various parameters from the calculation result memory 131 is performed by the reading device. Incidentally, the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even if the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the general winning counter is It is kept in memory. Thereafter, the value of the 10-prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3203).

  When it is confirmed that the status has been switched from the status where the information of "0" is stored for the first bit D1 to the status where the information of "1" is stored, 1 is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. It is determined that individual gaming balls have been detected (step S3204: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3205). Thereafter, the value of the 10-prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3206).

  When it is confirmed that the situation has been changed from the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the second bit D2 to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, 1 is selected by the third winning opening sensor 44a. It is determined that individual gaming balls have been detected (step S3207: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3208). Thereafter, the value of the 10-prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3209).

  If it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored for the third bit D3, one game is detected by the special power detection sensor 45a. It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S3210: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the special power winning flag in the main RAM 65 (step S 3211). Further, the value of the special electric pay counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3212). The special power prize winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered to the special power prize winning device 32 as an entering history. When the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the reading device reads various parameters from the calculation result memory 131, the value of the special power pay counter is cleared to “0”. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even if the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the special electric pay counter is It is kept in memory. Thereafter, the value of the 15-prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3213).

  When it is confirmed that the status has been switched to the status in which the information of "1" is stored from the status in which the information of "0" is stored for the fourth bit D4, 1 is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a. It is determined that each gaming ball has been detected (step S3214: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the first operation winning flag in the main RAM 65 (step S3215). Further, the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S3216). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the first operation port 33 as the ball entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to “0” when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and reading of various parameters from the calculation result memory 131 is performed by the reading device. . By the way, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even if the supply of operation power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the first operation counter is obtained even if the pachinko machine 10 enters the power-off state. Are kept in memory. Thereafter, the value of the one-prize ball counter of the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3217).

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored for the fifth bit D5, 1 is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. It is determined that each gaming ball has been detected (step S3218: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second operation winning flag in the main RAM 65 (step S3219). Further, the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3220). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the second operation port 34 as the ball entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to “0” when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and reading of various parameters from the calculation result memory 131 is performed by the reading device. . By the way, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even if the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the second operation counter is obtained even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Are kept in memory. Thereafter, the value of the one winning ball counter of the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3221).

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information “1” is stored from the state in which the information “0” is stored for the sixth bit D6, It is determined that a gaming ball has been detected (step S3222: YES). In this case, the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3223). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of ball entering the out port 24a as the ball entering history. The value of the out counter is cleared to “0” when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and reading of various parameters from the calculation result memory 131 is performed by the reading device. Incidentally, the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even if the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, so the value of the out counter is stored even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off It is held.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored for the seventh bit D7, one game is performed by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S3224: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3225).

  As mentioned above, when the ball entering detection process is executed, the ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 It is stored in the main side RAM 65 as the number of ball entry. As a result, the main CPU 63 sends a signal to the management CPU 112 every time the ball enters any of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening There is no need to output. Thus, the configuration for outputting a signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, when an operation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 reads the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 from the general winning counter of the main RAM 65, and the special electric winning counter of the main RAM 65 to the special electric winning device 32. Read the number of balls entered, read the number of balls entered into the first operation port 33 from the first operation counter of the main RAM 65, read the number of balls entered into the second operation port 34 from the second operation counter of the main RAM 65, The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read out from the out counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the first parameter to the eighth parameter described in the first embodiment are calculated by using the read numbers of the respective balls. However, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, measurement of the number of each ball in a state in which the number of each ball is separated when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state is not performed Therefore, the first to eighth parameters are calculated in a state in which the number of balls generated when the front door frame 14 is being opened is also included. In addition, since the number of balls entered in the open / close execution mode and the number of balls entered in the high probability mode are not separately measured either, the first to eighteenth parameters and the twenty-first parameter described in the first embodiment The 26th parameter is not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written to the calculation result memory 131. Then, when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all the parameters currently written in the calculation result memory 131 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0".

  Note that instead of the management IC 66 uniquely accessing the main RAM 65, the information on the number of ball entry stored in the main RAM 65 as the ball entry history is transmitted to the management IC 66 by transfer control by the main CPU 63. The configuration may be In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent an event in which the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 simultaneously access the main RAM 65.

Eleventh Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 61, the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112, and the method of storing the ball entering history to each ball entering unit are different from the first embodiment. ing. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 64 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in the present embodiment. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115 unlike the first embodiment. Also. The main control substrate 61 is provided with a notification light emitting unit 151 in addition to the MPU 62. The light emitting unit 151 for notification is directly controlled to emit light by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and calculates various parameters using the information of the history of ball entry into each ball entry unit read from the history memory 117. And the light emission state of the light emission part 151 for alerting | reporting is controlled according to the content of the calculated various parameters. Although the informing light emitting unit 151 is accommodated in the accommodation space of the substrate box 60a of the main control device 60, the substrate box 60a is formed transparent, and the light emitting state of the informing light emitting unit 151 is outside the substrate box 60a. The notification light emitting unit 151 is provided so that visual confirmation can be performed from the above. As a result, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11 so that the main control device 60 can be visually checked, whereby the notification light emitting portion 151 is not required to open the substrate box 60a. It is possible to visually check the light emission state of

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The same types of signals as the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. In detail, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second buffer 122b is the second corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. A signal is input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. Is input, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. It is inputted.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as an eighth signal, and a signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as a ninth signal. Although the signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122 j as the tenth signal, in the present embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode, the signal corresponding to the high probability mode, and the front door frame A signal corresponding to 14 is not input to the input port 121. That is, no signal regarding the ball entry history is input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

  It has not been decided at the design stage of the management IC 66 what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, and the types of these signals are received by the instruction from the main CPU 63. It is specified by the management CPU 112. The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management CPU 112 outputs it to the sixteenth buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that an instruction signal is input.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o. The first buffer counter 152a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second buffer counter 152 b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122 b has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third buffer counter 152c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth buffer counter 152 e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122 e has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The information for the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122 f has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the sixth buffer counter 152 f. The information for the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122 g has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh buffer counter 152 g. The eighth buffer counter 152 h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122 h has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 1521 stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The thirteenth buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourteenth buffer counter 152 n stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122 n has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifteenth buffer counter 152o stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

  However, any of the measurement targets using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o may be any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34. These are the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the ball entry results are inputted. Therefore, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the measurement targets. The distinction as to whether or not they are to be measured is made on the basis of the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. The history setting process is executed in step S 607 of the management process (FIG. 22).

  First, the number of buffers to be checked in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S3301). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas storing information other than the information indicating blank is specified, and the specification The set number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, since information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh response areas 123a to 123j, "7" is set in the check target counter in step S3301. Do.

  After that, it is confirmed whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S3302). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are the check targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the check target of the numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first buffer 122a is the target of the numerical information check. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, an addition process of the corresponding buffer counters 152a to 152o is executed (step S3303). In the addition processing, among the counters of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117, the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer counter 152 e is to be added, and if the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first buffer counter 152 a is to be added.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3302, or if the process of step S3303 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3304). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S3305). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (NO in step S3305), the processing in step S3302 and subsequent steps is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history of the gaming ball to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 Instead of being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times the game ball is detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the history memory 117 as compared to a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the external output processing in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

  When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S3401: YES), the output target counter provided in the management RAM 114 receives the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to The number of counters to be output targets of the number information in the management side CPU 112 among 152o is set (step S3402). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas storing information other than the information indicating blank is specified, and the specification The set number of information is set in the check target counter. In the present embodiment, as described above, information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, so “7” is set in the output target counter in step S3402. .

  Thereafter, the correspondence relation information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the current output target counter among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123 a to 123 o in the correspondence relation memory 116 is read (step S 3403), The number information stored in the counter corresponding to the value of the current output target counter among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the memory 117 is read (step S3404). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is “n”, the nth correspondence areas 123a to 123o become the reading targets of the correspondence information, and the nth buffer counters 152a to 152o read the number information. It becomes an object. For example, if the value of the output target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e becomes the read target of the correspondence information, and the fifth buffer counter 152e becomes the read target of the number information, and the value of the output target counter is If it is "1", the first correspondence area 123a becomes the read target of the correspondence information and the first buffer counter 152a becomes the read target of the number information.

  Thereafter, information output processing is executed (step S3405). In the information output process, a combination of the correspondence information read out in step S3403 and the number information read out in step S3404 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, the number-of-times information on the correspondence information that is the current output target is read.

  Thereafter, the value of the output target counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3406). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the output target counter after the one subtraction is “0” (step S3407). If the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S3407: NO), the processing of step S3403 and subsequent steps is executed for the output target corresponding to the new value of the output target counter. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3407, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to "0".

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing parameter management processing executed by the main CPU 63. The parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

  First, it is determined whether an operation trigger for various parameters has occurred (step S3501). The calculation timing is the same as in the fifth embodiment, when the parameter management process is executed first after the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, and the special prize winning It occurs every time the total number of balls entered into the device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 reaches 500 or more which is the trigger reference number. Calculation of various parameters is performed by temporarily turning off the pachinko machine 10 and then turning it on again because the parameter management process is first executed after the supply of operating power is started is set as the operation trigger. It becomes possible to generate an opportunity easily. Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, as described later, a notification corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters is executed, so simply by performing the power on / off operation in the previous game area PA It becomes possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball. In addition, it is possible to finely manage the ball entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA by setting the calculation trigger to occur whenever the total number of ball entering the game ball becomes 500 or more which is the trigger reference number. It becomes.

  When the operation trigger occurs (step S3501: YES), the ball entry history is read from the counters for which the ball entry history is stored among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117 (step S500) S3502). Specifically, numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 152a to 152g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 can recognize the buffer counters 152 a to 152 o which are targets for reading the ball entry history by the program and data stored in the main ROM 64.

  Thereafter, various calculation processes are executed (step S3503). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history read in step S3502 and the information on the number of balls corresponding to the ball entry history. Based on the program and data stored in the main ROM 64, the main CPU 63 sets the ball entry history read in step S3502 to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33, and It is possible to specify which of the two operation ports 34 corresponds to, and it is also possible to specify information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry history read in step S 3502 .

Specifically, regarding the various parameters calculated in step S3503,
· Seventh parameter: (K3 × "number of prize balls for winning in special power winning device 32" + K5 × "number of prize balls for winning in second operation opening 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "general" Number of winning balls for winning in the winning opening 31 + K3 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K 4 × “number of winning balls for winning in the first operation opening 33” + K 5 × “second operation opening 34 Ratio of winning balls to winnings)) 8th parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning on special electric winning device 32” / total payout number of gaming balls (K 2 × for winning in general winning opening 31 Number of prize balls "+ K3 x" Number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 x" Number of prize balls for winning on first operation port 33 "+ K5 x" Number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34 The ratio of ") is calculated.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated various parameters are in the first range (step S3504). If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated various parameters are considered to be in the first range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S3504. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3504, the setting process of the first notification state is executed (step S3505). In the setting process, the light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is performed so as to be in the first notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 emits blue light.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3504, it is determined whether the calculated various parameters are in the second range (step S3506). When only one of the condition that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the calculated various parameters An affirmative determination is made in step S3506 on the assumption that the range is two. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3506, a setting process of the second notification state is executed (step S3507). In the setting process, the light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is performed so as to be in the second notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a yellow light emitting state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3506, this means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, the third notification state setting process is executed (step S3508). In the setting process, the light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is performed so as to be in the third notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a red light emission state.

  The light emission state set in step S3505, step S3507 or step S3508 is such that the setting of a new notification state to the notification light emitting unit 151 is performed or the supply of operating power to the notification light emitting unit 151 is stopped. Continue until Further, since the notification state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is stored and held in the main RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the notification light emitting unit Even if 151 is once turned off, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the light emission state corresponding to the type of information of the notification state stored in the main RAM 65 is obtained. The light emission control of the informing light emitting unit 151 is executed.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The ball entry history of the gaming ball to the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. Instead, it is stored as information on the number of times the game ball is detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the history memory 117 as compared to a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  A notification light emitting unit 151 is provided for notifying of contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112. As a result, since the contents corresponding to various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself, the administrator of the game hall, etc. does not read the information stored in the memory 117 for the history of the game ball in the game area PA. It becomes possible to grasp the ball entering mode.

  The notification light emitting portion 151 is provided together with the MPU 62 on the main control substrate 61 housed in the substrate box 60 a. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light emitting unit 151.

  Calculation of various parameters and light emission control of the informing light emitting unit 151 are executed not by the management CPU 112 but by the main CPU 63. Thereby, it is possible to improve the reliability of the notification content in the notification light emitting unit 151.

  When the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is set, and when the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is set, and the calculation results of various parameters are When neither the first range nor the second range is supported, the third notification state is set. That is, the various parameters are not notified as they are, but the content corresponding to the range including the various parameters is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification light emitting unit 151 from being too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting unit 151.

  Even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped by continuing the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 151. The light emission state of the light source may be maintained. In this case, even when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA by checking the notification light emitting unit 151. .

  Further, instead of the configuration, the notification light emitting unit 151 is turned off when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, but the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Alternatively, the notification light emitting unit 151 may be controlled to emit light according to the result of various parameters calculated before the supply of the operation power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the light emitting unit 151 for notification in the gaming hall before the start of business, it is possible to grasp the ball entering aspect of the gaming ball on the last business day.

  The notification means for notifying calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the configuration in which the light emitting unit 151 for notification is used, and the display unit having a display surface such as the symbol display device 41 may be used. It may be In addition, a signal corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters may be externally output to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal board 97.

  The special view display unit 37 a of the special view unit 37 or the general view display unit 38 a of the common view unit 38 may be configured to share the function as the notification light emitting unit 151. For example, when supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and the calculation result is determined depending on whether it is included in the first range, the second range, or the other as in the above embodiment. The notification corresponding to the calculation result may be executed by the special view display unit 37a or the common view display unit 38a immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the condition for starting the variation display of the pattern in the special view display unit 37a or the start condition for the variation display of the pattern in the common view display unit 38a is satisfied. It may be configured to be temporarily interrupted when the variable display start condition is satisfied, and resumed when the variable display of the pattern is finished. According to this configuration, it is possible to use the special view display unit 37a or the common view display unit 38a as notification means for notifying the ball entry mode of the gaming ball of the game area PA.

  The notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position where it can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 in a state in which the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position behind the window panel 52 behind the pachinko machine 10 and visible through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the notification content corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters can be confirmed without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14.

Twelfth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, a configuration for providing information on each ball entry result to the management IC 66 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of signal paths for causing the detection results of the ball entering detection sensors 42 a to 48 a to be input to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

  The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. The detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. The detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. The detection result of the special power detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

  A first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a second branch path SL22 is formed so as to be branched from an intermediate position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from the midway position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

  With the above configuration, the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervention of the processing by the main CPU 63. Thus, the main CPU 63 executes processing for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the ball entry results of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34. It is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63 because it is not necessary to do so.

  The branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist in the MPU 62. As a result, it becomes possible to make external access to the branch point and the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside difficult, and it becomes possible to prevent a fraudulent action to make the management IC 66 input an abnormal ball entry result. .

The thirteenth embodiment
In the present embodiment, the execution mode of the open / close execution mode differs between the case where the jackpot result of the low probability result is obtained and the case where the jackpot result of the high accuracy result is obtained. Hereinafter, the execution mode of the open / close execution mode in the present embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 71 is a time chart for describing an execution mode of the open / close execution mode in the present embodiment. 71 (a1) and 71 (a2) show the execution period of the opening and closing execution mode, FIG. 71 (b1) and FIG. 71 (b2) show the execution period of the round game, FIG. 71 (c1) and FIG. c2) shows the period during which the special power prize device 32 is in the open state. 71 (a1), 71 (b1) and 71 (c1) show 2R low probability result, 4R low probability result, 6R low probability result, 10R low probability result and 16R low probability result. 71 (a2), 71 (b2) and 71 (c2) show the 2R high probability result, 4R high probability result, 6R high probability result, 10R high probability result and 16R high probability result. The execution mode of the switching execution mode in a certain case is shown.

  71 (a1) and 71 (a2) are executed at the timing of t1 regardless of whether the open / close execution mode in the case of the low probability result or the open / close execution mode in the case of the high probability result A mode is started, and a first round game is executed from timing t2 to timing t3 as shown in FIG. 71 (b1) and FIG. 71 (b2). The execution mode of each round game is the same except for the round game of the last execution number in any of the opening and closing execution mode in the case of the low probability result and the opening and closing execution mode in the case of the high accuracy result. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71 (c1) and FIG. 71 (c2), the special power winning device 32 is opened once in each round game, and the open continuation period of the special power winning device 32 in each round game is a game The period is set to 29 seconds, which is a longer period than the product of the ball firing period (0.6 seconds) and the upper limit number of round game winnings (10 pieces).

  Thereafter, in the opening / closing execution mode in the case where the result is a low probability result, the round game of the last execution time is executed as shown in FIG. 71 (b1) from timing t4 to timing t5. The execution mode of this round game is the same as the execution mode of the previous round game. That is, the special power winning device 32 is opened once in each round game, and the open continuation period of the special power winning device 32 in each round game is the firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 seconds) and the upper limit number of round games Is set to 29 seconds, which is a longer period than the product of 10). Then, an ending period occurs from the timing t5 to the timing t6, and the current opening / closing execution mode ends.

  In the opening / closing execution mode in the case of high-accuracy results, the final execution round game is executed as shown in FIG. 71 (b2) over the timing t4 to the timing t5, but a predetermined number of round games are performed in the round game The special electric power winning device 32 is opened and closed several times so as to sandwich the interval period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71 (c2), timing t4 to timing t11, timing t12 to timing t13, timing t14 to timing t15, timing t16 to timing t17, timing t18 The special power prize device 32 is opened over the timing of t19 and the timing of t20 to t5. Then, an ending period occurs from the timing t5 to the timing t6, and the current opening / closing execution mode ends.

  In this case, at the timing of t4 to t11, the timing of t12 to t13, the timing of t14 to t15, the timing of t16 to t17, and the timing of t18 to t19, The opening continuation period is longer than the firing cycle (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, and is set to a period shorter than the product of the firing cycle (0.6 second) of the game ball and the winning upper limit number of round games (10 pieces) Specifically, it is set to 1 second. In this relatively short open continuation period, the number of winnings on special power winning device 32 is about one, and it may happen that winnings on special power winning device 32 do not occur. In addition, since the opening of the special power winning device 32 by the relatively short opening duration is five times smaller than the number of winning upper limit number, it is the timing when the last opening number by the relatively short opening duration is ended At the timing of t19, there is a low possibility that the special power winning device 32 has a winning of the game balls for the upper limit number of winnings in the round game of the last execution time. Therefore, the opening of the special electric winning device 32 after the timing of t20 occurs with high probability.

  In addition, the relatively short opening continuation period is supplied from the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 to the right end of the guiding plate portion 214 of the opening and closing member 202 in the situation where the opening and closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 is disposed at the opening position. The game ball is set to a period in which the predetermined range X of the induction plate portion 214 can be reached. The gaming ball having reached the predetermined range X may fall below the opening and closing member 202 and win a prize in the through gate 35 as the opening and closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in that situation. As a result, every time the opening number of the special power winning device 32 due to the relatively short opening duration ends, the winning opportunity of the gaming ball to the through gate 35 is generated.

  The open continuation period of the special power prize device 32 at the timing of t20 to t5 is set to a period longer than the above-mentioned relatively short open continuation period. This relatively long open continuation period is set to a period equal to or greater than the product of the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and the upper limit number of winning round games (10 pieces), specifically 6 seconds. It is set to. In this relatively long open continuation period, it can be expected that winning of the game balls of the winning upper limit number is generated in the special power winning device 32. Further, when the game ball to special power winning device 32 is winning at the opening time of special power winning device 32 due to the relatively short opening duration, the special power winning by the relatively long opening duration is In the middle of the opening cycle of the device 32, there is a high possibility that the number of winning to the special power winning device 32 in the round game of the final execution cycle reaches the winning upper limit number.

  In the round game of the last execution times of the open / close execution mode in the case of a high probability result, after the special power prize device 32 is opened five times by the relatively short open duration as described above, the relatively long open continuation is continued Although the special power prize device 32 is opened once by a period, an interval period in which the special power prize device 32 is in a closed state exists between the respective open times. That is, as shown in FIG. 71 (c2), timing t11 to timing t12, timing t13 to timing t14, timing t15 to timing t16, timing t17 to timing t18, and timing t19 to t20. The special electric winning device 32 is maintained in the closed state over the timing of. The interval periods are all the same, and specifically set to one second.

  As described above, by opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 a plurality of times in the last round of the execution round, in the situation where the game ball is on the induction plate portion 214 of the opening and closing member 202 of the special power winning device There are many opportunities for the opening and closing member 202 to move from the open position to the closed position. As a result, it is possible to provide many opportunities for winning through the through gate 35 in the open / close execution mode in the case of a high-accuracy result. In addition, it is possible to increase the advantage of high accuracy results compared to low accuracy results.

  In addition, the duration of the last run round game becomes extremely long by the plurality of opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 in the last run round game being performed with a relatively short open continuation period. It becomes possible not to do so. In addition, the number of winning balls of the game ball to the special power winning device 32 in the last round game does not reach the upper limit number of winnings before the opening times of the special power winning device 32 due to the relatively short opening duration are all completed. It is possible to

Next, the processing configuration of the main CPU 63 that enables the execution mode of the open / close execution mode as described above will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the special power start process in the present embodiment. The special power start process is executed in step S1209 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 38). In steps S3601 to S3603, steps S1601 to S1603 of the special power start process (FIG. 42) in the first embodiment are performed. Execute the same process. If the opening period of the open / close execution mode has elapsed (step S3604: YES), the process of setting the number of rounds is executed (step S3605). In the process of setting the number of rounds, the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode this time is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 65. The round counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode this time. Specifically, if 2R low probability result or 2R high probability result, set "2" to the round counter, and if 4R low probability result or 4R high probability result, set "4" to the round counter, 6R If low result or 6R high result, set "6" in round counter, and if 10R low result or 10R high result, set round counter "10", 16R low result or 16R high result If the result is a definite result, the round counter is set to "16". If the result is any of the small hits, the value of the round counter is cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, setting processing of the number of opening and closing is executed (step S3606). In the setting process of the number of opening and closing in the special power start process, "1" is set in the opening and closing number counter of the main RAM 65 as the number of opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 in the first execution round game if any big hit result. If the current game result is the first small hit result, "1" is set to the open / close frequency counter of the main RAM 65, and if the current game result is the second small hit result, "open frequency counter of the main RAM 65" If "5" is set and the current game result is the third small hit result, "10" is set to the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65. Thereafter, in steps S3607 to S3610, the same processes as steps S1606 to S1609 in the electric power start process (FIG. 42) in the first embodiment are executed.

  FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing processing during release of electric power according to the present embodiment. The process of opening the special power is performed in step S1210 of the special power control process (FIG. 38).

  If a winning on the special power winning device 32 has occurred (step S3701: YES), the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3702). And, if the value of the winning counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3703: YES), it is necessary to end the current round game if it is a big hit result, if it is a small hit result, this time opening and closing You need to end the run mode. Therefore, the value of the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3704).

  Thereafter, the value of the round counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3706), on the condition that the present opening / closing execution mode is any of the big hit results (step S3705: YES). Then, setting processing of the number of times of opening and closing is executed (step S3707). In the setting process, if the current round counter value is “0”, the value is not set to the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65. Further, in the setting process, if the current round counter value is “1”, “1” is set to the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65 when the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is a low probability result. On the other hand, when the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a high-accuracy result, “6” is set in the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65. In the setting process, if the value of the current round counter is 2 or more, "1" is set in the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65. Further, the processing for setting the winning upper limit number is executed (step S3708). In the setting process, if the value of the current round counter is "0", the value is not set to the winning counter of the main RAM 65, and if the value of the current round counter is 1 or more, the winning of the main RAM 65 Set "10" as the maximum number of winning a new round game in the counter. Thereafter, in steps S3709 to S3711, the processes of steps S1703 to S1705 of the power on processing in the first embodiment (FIG. 43) in the first embodiment are executed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3701 or step S3703, it is determined whether the value of the special figure special power timer counter is "0" or not, so that the open duration period of the special open number of the special power winning device 32 is It is determined whether it has elapsed (step S3712). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3712, the value of the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3713). Then, if the value of the opening / closing number counter after the one subtraction is “0” (step S3714: YES) and the execution trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is any of the big hit results (step S3715: YES) The value of the round counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3716). Further, setting processing of the number of opening and closing is executed (step S3717). In the setting process, if the current round counter value is “0”, the value is not set to the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65. Further, in the setting process, if the current round counter value is “1”, “1” is set to the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65 when the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is a low probability result. On the other hand, when the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a high-accuracy result, “6” is set in the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65. In the setting process, if the value of the current round counter is 2 or more, "1" is set in the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65. Further, the processing for setting the winning upper limit number is executed (step S3718). In the setting process, if the value of the current round counter is "0", the value is not set to the winning counter of the main RAM 65, and if the value of the current round counter is 1 or more, the winning of the main RAM 65 Set "10" as the maximum number of winning a new round game in the counter. Thereafter, the processing of step S3709 to step S3711 is executed.

  FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing processing during electric power closing in the present embodiment. The special electric power closed process is executed in step S1211 of the special electric power special electric control process (FIG. 38).

  In steps S3801 to S3804, the same processing as steps S1801 to S1804 in the processing during electric power closing (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S3801 or if the process of step S3804 is executed, it is determined whether both the round counter of the main RAM 65 and the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65 are “0” (step S3801) Step S3805). If a negative determination is made in step S3805, it is determined whether the interval period has elapsed by determining whether the value of the special figure special power timer counter is "0" (step S3806). If the interval period has elapsed (step S3806: YES), setting processing of the open continuation period is executed (step S3807). In the setting process, if the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the second small hitting result, the information of the opening continuation period for the second small hitting result (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the special view special power timer counter If the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the third small hitting result, the information (specifically, one second) of the opening continuation period for the third small hitting result is set in the special figure special power timer counter. Further, in the setting process, when the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is any low-accuracy result, information of the longest open continuation period (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special view special power timer counter. . Further, in the setting process, if the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is any high-accuracy result and the value of the round counter is 2 or more, information of the longest open continuation period (specifically, 29 seconds) Set to the special figure special power timer counter. In the setting process, if the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is any high-accuracy result and the value of the round counter is “1,” the value of the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65 is “6” to In the case of "2", the information on the relatively short open duration (specifically, 1 second) is set in the special figure special power timer counter, and the value of the opening / closing number counter of the main RAM 65 is "1". Sets information of a relatively long open duration (specifically, 6 seconds) in the special view special power timer counter.

  Thereafter, in steps S3808 to S3809, the same processes as steps S1810 to S1811 of the during-power-on-close process (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment are executed. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3805, in step S3810 to step S3812, the same process as step S1812 to step S1814 in the during power-on-close process (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment is executed.

  According to the embodiment detailed above, the game ball on the induction plate portion 214 of the opening and closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 by opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 a plurality of times in the last execution round game There are many situations where the opening and closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in the situation where the wheel is placed. As a result, it is possible to provide many opportunities for winning through the through gate 35 in the open / close execution mode in the case of a high-accuracy result. In addition, it is possible to increase the advantage of high accuracy results compared to low accuracy results.

  In addition, the opening time of the first half side in the last execution round game is performed using a relatively short opening continuation period, the duration of the last execution round game does not become extremely long. It will be possible to In addition, the number of winning balls of the game ball to the special power winning device 32 in the last round game does not reach the upper limit number of winnings before the opening times of the special power winning device 32 due to the relatively short opening duration are all completed. It is possible to

  In the last execution round game in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the high probability result, the opening continuation period of the last opening round of the special power winning device 32 is longer than the above-mentioned relatively short opening continuation period It is set to. This relatively long open continuation period is set to a period equal to or greater than the product of the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and the upper limit number of winning round games (10 pieces), specifically 6 seconds. It is set to. In this relatively long open continuation period, it can be expected that winning of the game balls of the winning upper limit number is generated in the special power winning device 32. Further, when the game ball to special power winning device 32 is winning at the opening time of special power winning device 32 due to the relatively short opening duration, the special power winning by the relatively long opening duration is In the middle of the opening cycle of the device 32, there is a high possibility that the number of winning to the special power winning device 32 in the round game of the final execution cycle reaches the winning upper limit number.

<Another form of the thirteenth embodiment>
The round game in which the number of times the special power winning device 32 is released is not limited to the last round game, and may be the first round game or a halfway round game. Further, the configuration may be such that the number of times of opening of the special power winning device 32 occurs a plurality of times in a plurality of round games.

  -There is no limitation to a configuration in which a relatively long open duration open cycle occurs after a relatively short open duration open cycle occurs in one round game, and a relatively short open duration The opening times may only occur multiple times.

  · A relatively short opening duration allows the game ball to reach a position enabling winning on the through gate 35 on the induction plate 214, but entering the entrance 45b of the special electric winning device 32. It is good also as a structure set to the impossible or difficult period. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which it is possible to achieve a winning on the through gate 35 in a situation where it is difficult for the player to enter the entrance 45b of the special electric winning device 32. In addition, the said structure may be applied not to the structure which generate | occur | produces multiple opening times in one round game, but to the structure which only one open time generate | occur | produces in one round game.

Fourteenth Embodiment
In the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 32, and the opening and closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the game ball is placed on the induction plate portion 214. In the present embodiment, the game ball can win a prize in the through gate 35, but in the present embodiment, the target for which the game ball can win is a ball entry portion other than the through gate 35. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 75 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  Similar to the first embodiment, the special power prize device 32 is provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. Similar to the first embodiment, the special power winning device 32 includes a passage forming member 201, an opening and closing member 202, and a guide member 203. When the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the closing position, the game ball can not enter the fourth discharge passage 45 and passes through the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) formed in the opening and closing member 202. The game ball will flow downward to the special power winning device 32 in the above. When the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, the game ball can be placed on the induction plate portion 214 of the opening and closing member 202, and the game ball lying on the induction plate portion 214 is the fourth discharge passage It becomes possible to enter the ball into the section 45. Further, a guiding nail group 241 is provided on the right side of the right side area PA3 on the upstream side of the special power winning device 32 as in the first embodiment. Thereby, the gaming ball flowing down the right side area PA3 is guided to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 by the guiding nail group 241. Then, the gaming ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end of the opening and closing member 202.

  The through gate 35 is not provided below the special electric award winning device 32 in the right side area PA3. In the present embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided on the left side area PA2 of the game area PA, and the left side area PA2 is compared to the through gate 35 when compared in the same firing operation mode that the gaming ball flows down. The entering frequency of the gaming ball is constant regardless of the gaming state. In addition, when the player performs a shooting operation so that the gaming ball flows down the left area PA2, the gaming ball can reach the position where the second operation opening 34 is provided. Therefore, when the game ball is released to flow down the left side area PA2, winning on the through gate 35 becomes possible, and the second operation opening 34 is opened with the winning on the through gate 35. When the state is reached, winning of the second operation port 34 is possible.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set as the support mode for controlling the state of the common use utility 34 a of the second operation port 34. In the low-frequency support mode, the frequency of the general-purpose utility 34a is not in the open state or the frequency of the general-purpose utility 34a is in the open state is relatively low. Relatively high. If the result is low, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode, and if the result becomes high, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the high frequency support mode .

  A first special ball entry port 251 and a second special ball entry port 252 are provided below the special electric award winning device 32 in the right side area PA3. The first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 are provided with openings for entering the ball entrance of the game ball opened vertically upward, and these members directly open and close the ball entrance Is not provided. In addition, the game ball which entered the first special entrance 251 is discharged from the game area PA by being derived to the back side of the game board 24 and the game ball entered the second special entrance 252 Is discharged from the game area PA by being derived to the back side of the game board 24. In addition, the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 are arranged side by side so that the first special entrance 251 is on the left side and the second special entrance 252 is on the right side. .

  The first special entrance 251 is provided with a first special detection sensor 251 a for detecting game balls entered into the first special entrance 251, and the second special entrance 252 is concerned with the first special entrance 251. A second special detection sensor 252a for detecting the gaming ball having entered the second special entrance 252 is provided. The first special detection sensor 251 a and the second special detection sensor 252 a are electrically connected to the main CPU 63.

  FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the ball entering detection process executed by the main CPU 63. The ball entry inspection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

  If one gaming ball is detected by the first special detection sensor 251a (step S3901: YES), the value of the 10-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S3902). The ten prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the payout of ten game balls should be executed by the main CPU 63. When the value of the 10-prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10-prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) and When the command is output once, the value of the 10-prize ball counter is decremented by one. The payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that ten gaming balls are paid out when the ten prize ball command is received.

  If one game ball is detected by the second special detection sensor 252a (step S3903: YES), the value of the five-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S3904). The five prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the payout of the five game balls should be executed by the main CPU 63. When the value of the five prize ball counter is one or more, the five prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the five prize balls are output. When the command is output once, the value of the five-prize ball counter is decremented by one. The payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that five gaming balls are paid out when the five prize ball command is received.

  In the ball entry detection process, other processes are also executed (step S3905). In the other processes, the same processes as steps S301 to S325 in the ball-entering detection process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment are executed.

  Returning to the description of the game board 24 (FIG. 75), the first special entry port 251 is disposed on the downstream side of the special power prize device 32 and closer to the passage forming body 201 of the special power prize device 32. Further, a first induction nail group 253 is provided between the opening / closing member 202 of the special electric power winning device 32 and the first special entrance 251 by a plurality of nails 24 b. The first induction nail group 253 enables the ball to enter the first special entrance 251 for the game balls existing on the left side of the first induction nail group 253, and from the first induction nail group 253 As for the game ball existing on the right side, it is not possible to enter the ball into the first special entrance 251. Thereby, when the opening and closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closing position in a situation where the gaming ball is present on the first range X1 close to the passage forming body 201 on the guiding plate portion 214 of the opening and closing member 202 The ball can enter the first special entrance 251, and the other game balls can not enter the first special entrance 251.

  The distance dimension along the induction plate portion 214 in the first range X1 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and specifically, is twice the diameter of the game ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the distance dimension along the induction plate portion 214 in the first range X1 may be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, and is larger than twice the diameter of the gaming ball It may be

  The second special ball entry port 252 is disposed on the downstream side of the special electric symbol winning device 32 at a position that is on the right side of the first special ball entry port 251 but to the left of the right end of the opening / closing member 202. Further, a second induction nail group 254 is provided between the opening and closing member 202 of the special electric power winning device 32 and the second special entrance 252 by a plurality of nails 24 b. The second guiding nail group 254 enables the ball to enter the second special entrance 252 for gaming balls existing on the left side of the second guiding nail group 254, and from the second guiding nail group 254 Also regarding the game ball which exists to the right, entering the ball to the second special entrance 252 is disabled. Thereby, when the opening and closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closing position in a situation where the gaming ball is present on the second range X2 close to the center on the guiding plate portion 214 of the opening and closing member 202, the gaming ball is (2) It becomes possible to enter the ball into the special ball entry port 252, and other game balls can not enter the ball into the second special ball entry port 252. In this case, even if the open / close member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the gaming ball is present at a position on the right of the second range X2 on the induction plate portion 214 of the open / close member 202 The ball does not enter the second special entrance 252. In addition, when the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the closing position, the gaming ball passes through the opening 213 of the opening and closing member 202 at a position to the right of the second range X2, so the game ball enters the second special Do not enter the ball outlet 252.

  The distance dimension along the induction plate portion 214 in the second range X2 is set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and specifically, it is 2.5 times the diameter of the gaming ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the distance dimension along the induction plate portion 214 on the second range X2 may be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, and may be 2.5 times or more It may be a large configuration.

  Next, how the gaming ball enters the first special entrance 251 or the second special entrance 252 in the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 77 (a) shows a period in which the open / close member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 is disposed at the open position, and FIG. 77 (b) shows the game ball in the first range X1 on the induction plate 214 of the open / close member 202. 77 (c) shows a period in which a game ball is present in the second range X2 on the induction plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202, and FIG. 77 (d) shows a first special entry. FIG. 77 (e) shows the timing at which the game ball enters the second special ball entry port 252. FIG.

  First, the case where the game ball enters the first special entrance 251 will be described. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the open / close member 202 is disposed at the open position. Thereafter, game balls exist in the second range X2 on the induction plate 214 as shown in FIG. 77 (c) from time t2 to time t3, and the game balls further flow down on the induction plate 214. As a result, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the gaming ball is present in the first range X1 on the guiding plate portion 214 over the timing t3 to the timing t4. Then, at timing t4 at which the gaming ball is present in the first range X1 on the guiding plate portion 214, as shown in FIG. 77A, the open / close member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position. Thus, the gaming ball enters the first special ball entry port 251 at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 77 (d). Then, the game balls enter the first special ball entry port 251, whereby the payout of the ten game balls is executed.

  Next, the case where the game ball enters the second special entrance 252 will be described. At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the open / close member 202 is disposed at the open position. After that, as shown in FIG. 77C, the gaming ball is present in the second range X2 on the guiding plate portion 214 from timing t7 to timing t8. Then, as shown in FIG. 77A, the open / close member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position at time t8 at which the gaming ball is present in the second range X2 on the guiding plate portion 214. Thereby, the gaming ball enters the second special ball entry port 252 at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 77 (e). Then, the game balls enter the second special entrance 252, and the payout of the five game balls is executed.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  Not only is it possible to enter the gaming balls into the special electric winning device 32 by shifting to the open / close execution mode, but it is also possible to enter the gaming balls into the special ball entry ports 251, 252. The payout of the game ball is executed not only when the game ball enters the special power winning device 32 but also when the game ball enters the special entrance 251 and 252. Thus, the number of gaming balls to be paid out in the open / close execution mode can be increased, and the advantage of the open / close execution mode can be increased.

  The special entrance 251, 252 is provided at a position downstream of the special electric potential winning device 32 and at which the special electric potential winning device 32 can flow in the gaming ball at the timing when it switches from one to the other. ing. As a result, the game ball that has leaked as a target for entering the special power winning device 32 enters the special entrance 251, 252, and the game ball enters the special entrance 251, 252 so that the game ball is paid out. It will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's sense of disadvantage for the generation of the game ball leaked from the entry target of the special electric power winning device 32.

  The game ball on the guiding plate portion 214 of the opening and closing member 202 can enter the special entrance 251 and 252 when the opening and closing member 202 of the special electric power winning device 32 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other. It becomes. As a result, in the opening / closing execution mode, the player is not only whether or not the game ball enters the fourth discharge passage 45 of the special power winning device 32 but the game ball is placed on the guiding plate 214. In the state, attention is paid to whether or not the opening and closing member 202 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game in the open and close execution mode.

  At the timing when the special power winning device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state, an entrance trigger of the game ball to the special entrance 251, 252 occurs. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention level not only when the special power prize device 32 is in the open state but also at the timing when it is switched to the closed state.

  The guiding plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 is formed such that the gaming ball placed on the guiding plate portion 214 flows downward along the guiding plate portion 214 to the left. And, the special ball entry port 251, 252 is put when the opening and closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the gaming ball is put on the range X1, X2 of a part of the induction plate 214 The game ball is provided at a position where it can enter the ball by falling downward. In this case, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry 251, 252, not only the game ball is placed on the guiding plate portion 214 in the situation where the opening / closing member 202 is disposed at the open position. It is necessary to move the open / close member 202 from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing in which the game ball being played is present in a partial range X1, X2. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the gaming ball placed on the induction plate 214 and the switching timing of the state of the opening / closing member 202, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the opening / closing execution mode. It becomes.

  A guiding nail group 241 for guiding the gaming ball having flowed into the right side area PA3 to the right end side of the opening / closing member 202 is provided on the upstream side of the special power winning device 32. The ranges X1 and X2 enabling the game ball to enter the special ball entry openings 251 and 252 in the guiding plate portion 214 are set to be biased toward the left end of the opening / closing member 202. Thereby, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry 251 and 252, the opening and closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing during the game ball is flowing down on the induction plate portion 214. I need to move. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the induction plate portion 214, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game in the open / close execution mode.

  Further, in the special electric pay prize device 32, the entrance 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 is on the left side of the range X1, X2 which enables the game ball to enter the special ball entrance 251, 252 in the guiding plate 214. Exists in As a result, the gaming ball that has been on the induction plate 214 but has not reached the entrance 45b enters the special ball entrance 251, 252. Therefore, against the player's sense of disadvantage for the game ball placed on the induction plate portion 214 not winning in the special power winning device 32, against the occurrence of winning in the special entrance 251, 252 It can be changed to a sense of profit.

  The first special entry port 251 and the second special entry port 252 are provided as the special entry ports 251 and 252 that can enter the ball when the opening / closing execution mode is entered, and the first special entry port 251 The number of game balls to be paid out differs between when the game ball enters the ball and when the game ball enters the second special entrance 252. The game ball enters the first special entrance 251 when the first condition is established in the opening / closing execution mode, and the second special entrance 252 is played when the second condition is established in the opening / closing execution mode The ball enters the ball. As a result, the player not only expects the game ball to enter the special entrance 251, 252 in the opening / closing execution mode, but the first special entrance 251, which is the side with a large number of game balls paid out It will expect the game ball to enter the ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the open / close execution mode.

  When the opening and closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position with the gaming ball resting on the first range X1 of the guiding plate portion 214, the first special entry 251 can enter the gaming ball. It is provided in the position. Also, the second special entry port 252 can enter the game ball when the open / close member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position with the game ball resting on the second range X2 in the guide plate portion 214 It is provided at the position where Thereby, in the state where the gaming ball is placed on either of the first range X1 and the second range X2, not only the opening and closing member 202 is expected to move from the open position to the closed position, but also to the first range X1. It is expected that the opening and closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the gaming ball is placed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the configuration in which the gaming ball having flowed into the right side area PA3 is guided to the right end side of the opening and closing member 202 by providing the guiding nail group 241, the second range X2 is set at the center side in the lateral direction of the opening and closing member 202 The first range X1 is set at a position biased to the left end side of the opening / closing member 202. Furthermore, an entrance 45b of the special electric award winning device 32 exists on the left side of the opening and closing member 202. As a result, the gaming ball existing near the entrance 45b of the special electric winning device 32 on the guiding plate 214 is more likely to enter the first special entry 251 having a larger number of payouts. In this case, it is possible to make the profit for the player higher as the situation in which the gaming ball does not enter the entrance portion 45b of the special power winning device 32 becomes stronger.

<Another form of the fourteenth embodiment>
The configuration may be such that only one of the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 is provided. In addition to the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252, the third special entrance is provided, and the game ball is opened and closed in the third range of the induction plate portion 214. When the member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position, the gaming ball may enter the third special ball entry port.

  -Even if the game ball enters any of the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252, it is not limited to the configuration in which only the payout of the game ball is executed, for example, the first special entry When the game ball enters the ball opening 251, the first hold information or the second hold information serving as a trigger for the process of judging whether or not the game is acquired, and the game ball enters the second special entry port 252 The game balls may be paid out. In this case, when the gaming ball enters the first special entrance 251 and when the gaming ball enters the second special entrance 252, different benefits are provided.

  Also, for example, when the game ball enters the first special entrance 251, one of the first hold information and the second hold information is acquired, and the game ball enters the second special entrance 252. In this case, the other of the first hold information and the second hold information may be acquired. Thereby, even if the game ball enters any special ball entrance 251, 252, although the hold information that becomes a trigger for the success / failure determination process is acquired, the type of the acquired hold information is the first special ball entry The case where the game ball enters the mouth 251 and the case where the game ball enters the second special entrance 252 are different.

  Also, for example, even if the game ball enters any of the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252, although the information on the side of the drawing is obtained, the holding on the side of the obtained drawing is made The configuration may be such that the probability that the second operation port 34 is in the state of normal power release is different with respect to the information.

  The first range X1 is not limited to a configuration narrower than the second range X2, and the width of the first range X1 and the width of the second range X2 may be the same or substantially the same. The first range X1 may be wider than the second range X2.

  -The game ball entered into the special entrance 251, 252 is not limited to the configuration of being derived to the back side of the game board 24, and the special entrance 251, 252 is provided in a gate shape. Thus, the gaming ball having entered the special entrance 251 or 252 may continue to flow down the gaming area PA thereafter. As a result, the gaming ball can easily reach the lower area PA4.

The fifteenth embodiment
In the present embodiment, in place of the special power prize device 32, a first special power prize device 261 and a second special power prize device 262 are provided. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 78 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  In the right side area PA3 of the game area PA, instead of the special power winning device 32, a first special power winning device 261 and a second special power winning device 262 are provided. The first special electric award winning apparatus 261 and the second special electric award winning apparatus 262 are vertically juxtaposed so that the first special electric award winning apparatus 261 is on the upper side and the second special electric award winning apparatus 262 is on the lower side. Further, in the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided as a ball entry unit that causes an opportunity to bring the common use utility product 34a of the second operation opening 34 into the open state, but in the present embodiment A first through gate 263 and a second through gate 264 are provided as a ball entry unit that causes an event to open the object 34a. The first through gate 263 is provided on the left of the first special electric winning device 261, and the second through gate 264 is provided on the left of the second special electric winning device 262.

  The configuration of the first special electric winning device 261 and the configuration of the first through gate 263 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b). 79 (a) and 79 (b) are cross-sectional views taken along line AA of FIG.

  A first large winning opening 265 is formed in the game board 24 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the first large winning opening 265 is formed is a position closer to the variable display unit 36 in the right side area PA3 but a position to the right of the first through gate 263. The first special power winning device 261 is provided to prevent or allow the game ball to enter the first large winning opening 265. The first special electric award winning device 261 is provided with a first induction plate 271 provided to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction at a position below the first big winning opening 265. The first induction plate 271 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction by being driven by drive means (not shown), and the blocking position where the amount of protrusion of the pachinko machine 10 from the front side of the game board 24 to the front side is minimized. The position where sliding movement has been made to the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the blocking position, and the guiding position where the amount of projection of the pachinko machine 10 from the front face of the gaming board 24 to the front is maximum.

  A first ball receiving portion 272 is provided above the right end of the first induction plate 271 in the game board 24 and further above the first special electric winning device 261 in the right area PA3 from the upper area PA1 to the right A first guiding nail group 267 is provided for guiding all the gaming balls having flowed into the area PA3 to the first ball receiving portion 272 (see FIG. 78). The first guiding nail group 267 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b so as to be inclined downward in the right direction. All gaming balls having flowed into the right side area PA3 by the first induction nail group 267 are guided to the first ball receiving portion 272. The distance dimension between the front end of the first ball receiving portion 272 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. Further, the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 is inclined downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the gaming ball that has reached the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 flows downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by its own weight.

  When the first induction plate 271 is disposed in the blocking position, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), the distance between the front end of the first induction plate 271 and the window panel 52 is equal to the diameter of the game ball Also become large dimensions. In this blocking position, the front end of the first guiding plate 271 is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the first ball receiving portion 272. Therefore, the gaming ball that has reached the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 in the situation where the first guiding plate 271 is disposed at the blocking position basically passes through the space between the first ball receiving portion 272 and the window panel 52 It falls below the first ball receiving portion 272. In addition, on the first guiding plate 271 arranged at the blocking position by the game balls guided by the first induction nail group 267 being bounced on the first ball receiving portion 272, the pachinko machine 10 front side of the board of the game board 24 It is also envisioned that it rests on the top of the projecting area. On the other hand, the upper surface of the area of the first guiding plate 271 disposed at the blocking position and projecting to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the gaming board 24 is inclined downward toward the pachinko machine 10 front side. Therefore, even if the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the first induction plate 271 disposed at the blocking position, the game ball does not win the first large winning hole 265 and the first through gate 263 but the first induction plate It falls below the first guiding plate 271 from between the front end of the plate 271 and the window panel 52. With the above configuration, when the first induction plate 271 is disposed at the blocking position, the occurrence of winning on the first large winning opening 265 is blocked and the occurrence of winning on the first through gate 263 is blocked. Be done.

  When the first induction plate 271 is disposed at the induction position, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), the distance between the front end of the first induction plate 271 and the window panel 52 is greater than the radius of the game ball Also become smaller. And in this induction | guidance | derivation position, the front side edge part of the 1st guide plate 271 exists in the pachinko machine 10 front side rather than the front side edge part of the 1st ball | bowl receiving part 272. FIG. Therefore, the gaming ball that has reached the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 in the situation where the first induction plate 271 is disposed at the induction position protrudes to the front of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the board surface of the gaming board 24 in the first induction plate 271 On the top of the

  A boundary portion for changing the inclination direction of the upper surface on the upper surface of the projecting area 273 which protrudes to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24 when disposed at the induction position in the first induction plate 271 274 are formed. With the boundary portion 274 as a boundary, the upper surface of the projecting region 273 is the first guidance region 275 existing in front of the first ball receiving portion 272 and the left of the first guidance region 275, and the first major winning combination A second guiding region 276 leading to the opening 265 and a third guiding region 277 to the left of the first guiding region 275 and in front of the second guiding region 276 and continuing to the first through gate 263; There is. The upper surface of the first guiding region 275 is inclined downward to the left. Further, the left end of the first guiding area 275 is in contact with both the right end of the second guiding area 276 and the right end of the third guiding area 277. Thereby, the gaming ball guided from the first ball receiving portion 272 to the first guidance area 275 flows down to the second guidance area 276 or the third guidance area 277 by its own weight. In this case, the range in contact with the right end of the second guiding region 276 at the left end of the first guiding region 275 is wider than the range in contact with the right end of the third guiding region 277 at the left end. Therefore, the gaming ball guided by the first guidance area 275 is more likely to flow into the second guidance area 276 than the third guidance area 277. However, the gaming balls guided by the first guiding area 275 flow into the third guiding area 277 at a predetermined frequency (specifically, one out of four).

  The second guiding area 276 is inclined downward toward the rear left so that the gaming ball placed on the upper surface of the second guiding area 276 is guided to the first large winning opening 265. As a result, the gaming ball placed on the upper surface of the second guidance area 276 is likely to win the first large winning opening 265. The game ball that has won the first large winning opening 265 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the first large winning opening 265. The detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies the presence or absence of a winning on the first large winning opening 265 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the round game or the small hit result in which the first large winning opening 265 is to be opened, it is specified that one gaming ball has entered the first large winning opening 265 If it has, the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. When the value of the winning counter becomes "0", it determines that the winning has occurred for the upper limit number of winning as in the first embodiment, and the open / close execution mode triggered by the round game or the small hitting result End.

  The third guiding region 277 is inclined downward to the left. Here, when the first induction plate 271 is disposed at the induction position, the first induction plate 271 is present from the right end of the right side area PA3 to the right end position of the first through gate 263 in the lateral position. It will be done. Further, as described above, the distance between the front end of the first guiding plate 271 disposed at the guiding position and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the gaming ball. Therefore, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the third guiding area 277 flows down by its own weight toward the first through gate 263 as long as it does not move to the second guiding area 276 for any reason on the way, You will win a prize. The game ball winning the first through gate 263 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the first through gate 263. The detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies the presence or absence of a winning on the first through gate 263 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, when it is specified that one gaming ball has entered the first through gate 263, under the condition that the information of the upper limit number of pieces of the popular drawing side is not stored in the common drawing reserve area 65 c, The numerical information of the random number counter C4 is stored in the common drawing holding area 65c as holding information on the common drawing side.

  In the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the above configuration, the round game in which the first special electric potential winning device 261 is to be controlled or the small hitting result in which the first special electric potential winning device 261 is to be controlled is triggered. When arranged in the guidance position, the gaming ball having flowed into the right side area PA3 is guided to one of the first large winning opening 265 and the first through gate 263, and the first large winning opening 265 and the first through gate 263 are Certainly winning in either occurs. When a winning on the first large winning opening 265 occurs, the remaining number of the upper limit number of winnings is decremented by 1 and the payout of the specified number of 15 game balls is executed as in the first embodiment. Ru. When a winning on the first through gate 263 occurs, an acquisition opportunity for holding information on the common drawing side occurs. As a result, when the first special power winning device 261 is to be controlled, the player can have both of the winning of the first large winning opening 265 and the winning of the first through gate 263. It will be expected and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the configuration of the second special electric award winning device 262 and the configuration of the second through gate 264 will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (a). FIG. 80 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B of FIG.

  A second large winning opening 266 is formed in the game board 24 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the second large winning opening 266 is formed is a position below the first special electric award winning device 261 and the first through gate 263 and is the vertically lower position of the first large winning opening 265. Further, the position where the second large winning opening 266 is formed is a position closer to the variable display unit 36 in the right side area PA3 but a position to the right of the second through gate 264.

  The second special electric power winning device 262 is provided to prevent or allow the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 266. The second special electric potential winning device 262 has a second induction plate 281 provided so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction at a position below the second large winning opening 266. The second induction plate 281 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction by being driven by drive means (not shown), and the blocking position where the amount of protrusion of the pachinko machine 10 from the front side of the game board 24 to the front side is minimized. The position where sliding movement has been made to the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the blocking position, and the guiding position where the amount of projection of the pachinko machine 10 from the front face of the gaming board 24 to the front is maximum.

  A second ball receiving portion 282 is provided above the right end of the second induction plate 281 in the game board 24, and further above the second special electric winning device 262 in the right side area PA 3, a first big winning game A second induction nail group 268 is provided to guide all of the gaming balls that have flowed under the first special electric potential winning device 261 without winning in the mouth 265 and the first through gate 263 to the second ball receiving portion 282. (See Figure 78). The second guiding nail group 268 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b so as to be inclined downward in the right direction. The gaming balls having flowed down to the lower side of the first electric special prize winning device 261 in the right side area PA3 are all guided to the second ball receiving portion 282 by the second induction nail group 268. The distance dimension between the front end of the second ball receiving portion 282 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. Further, the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 is inclined downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the gaming ball that has reached the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 flows downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by its own weight.

  When the second induction plate 281 is disposed at the blocking position, the distance between the front end of the second induction plate 281 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, as in the first induction plate 271. It becomes a large size. In this blocking position, the front end of the second guiding plate 281 is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the second ball receiving portion 282. Therefore, the gaming ball that has reached the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 in a state where the second guiding plate 281 is disposed at the blocking position basically passes through the space between the second ball receiving portion 282 and the window panel 52 It will fall below the 2nd ball receiving part 282. In addition, the game ball induced by the second induction nail group 268 bounces on the second ball receiving portion 282, and the second guiding plate 281 disposed at the blocking position is the front side of the pachinko machine 10 further than the board of the gaming board 24. It is also envisioned that it rests on the top of the projecting area. On the other hand, the upper surface of the area of the second guiding plate 281 disposed at the blocking position and projecting to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24 is inclined downward toward the pachinko machine 10 front side . Therefore, even if the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the second induction plate 281 arranged at the blocking position, the game ball does not win the second large winning opening 266 and the second through gate 264 but the second induction plate It falls from below the second guide plate 281 from between the front end of the plate 281 and the window panel 52. With the above configuration, when the second induction plate 281 is disposed at the blocking position, the occurrence of winning on the second large winning opening 266 is blocked and the occurrence of winning on the second through gate 264 is blocked. Be done.

  When the second induction plate 281 is disposed at the induction position, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the distance dimension between the front end of the second induction plate 281 and the window panel 52 is from the radius of the game ball Also become smaller. And in this induction | guidance | derivation position, the front side edge part of the 2nd guide plate 281 exists in the pachinko machine 10 front side rather than the front side edge part of the 2nd ball | bowl receiving part 282. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the gaming ball that has reached the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 in the situation where the second guiding plate 281 is arranged at the guiding position protrudes to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board of the gaming board 24 in the second guiding plate 281 On the top of the

  A boundary portion for changing the inclination direction of the upper surface on the upper surface of the projecting area 283 which protrudes to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the gaming board 24 when arranged at the induction position in the second induction plate 281 284 are formed. With the boundary portion 284 as a boundary, the upper surface of the projecting region 283 is the first guidance region 285 existing in front of the second ball receiving portion 282 and the left of the first guidance region 285, and the second major winning combination Divided into a second guiding region 286 leading to the mouth 266 and a third guiding region 287 left of the first guiding region 285 and in front of the second guiding region 286 and continuing to the second through gate 264 There is. The upper surface of the first guiding region 285 is inclined downward to the left. The left end of the first guiding area 285 is in contact with both the right end of the second guiding area 286 and the right end of the third guiding area 287. Thereby, the gaming ball guided from the second ball receiving portion 282 to the first guidance area 285 flows down to the second guidance area 286 or the third guidance area 287 by its own weight. In this case, the range contacting the right end of the second guiding region 286 at the left end of the first guiding region 285 is wider than the range contacting the right end of the third guiding region 287 at the left end of the first guiding region 285. Therefore, the gaming ball induced by the first induction area 285 is more likely to flow into the second induction area 286 than the third induction area 287. However, the gaming balls guided by the first guiding area 285 flow into the third guiding area 287 at a predetermined frequency (for example, one of seven).

  The second guiding area 286 is inclined downward toward the rear left so that the game ball placed on the upper surface of the second guiding area 286 is guided to the second large winning opening 266. As a result, the gaming ball placed on the upper surface of the second guidance area 286 is likely to win the second large winning opening 266. The game ball that has won the second large winning opening 266 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the second large winning opening 266. The detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies the presence or absence of a winning on the second large winning opening 266 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the round game or the small hit result in which the second large winning opening 266 is to be opened, it is specified that one gaming ball has entered the second large winning opening 266 If it has, the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. When the value of the winning counter becomes "0", it determines that the winning has occurred for the upper limit number of winning as in the first embodiment, and the open / close execution mode triggered by the round game or the small hitting result End.

  The third guiding region 287 is inclined downward to the left. Here, when the second induction plate 281 is disposed at the induction position, the second induction plate 281 is present from the right end of the right area PA3 to the right end of the second through gate 264 at the lateral position. It will be done. Further, as described above, the distance between the front end of the second guiding plate 281 disposed at the guiding position and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the gaming ball. Therefore, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the third guiding area 287 flows down by its own weight toward the second through gate 264 unless it moves to the second guiding area 286 for any reason on the way, and the second through gate 264 You will win a prize. The game ball that has won the second through gate 264 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the second through gate 264. The detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies the presence or absence of winning on the second through gate 264 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the second through gate 264, under the condition that the information of the upper limit number of pieces of the popular drawing side is not stored in the common drawing reserve area 65c, The numerical information of the random number counter C4 is stored in the common drawing holding area 65c as holding information on the common drawing side.

  In the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the above configuration, the round game or the second special power winning device 262 controlled by the second special power winning device 262 is triggered by the small hitting result controlled by the second special plate winning device 262 When arranged in the guidance position, the gaming ball having flowed into the right side area PA3 is guided to one of the second large winning opening 266 and the second through gate 264, and the second large winning opening 266 and the second through gate 264 Certainly winning in either occurs. When a winning on the second large winning opening 266 occurs, as in the first embodiment, the remaining number of the upper limit number of winnings is decremented by 1, and the payout of the specified number of 15 gaming balls is executed. Ru. When a winning on the second through gate 264 occurs, an acquisition opportunity for holding information on the common drawing side occurs. As a result, when the second special electric power winning device 262 is to be controlled, the player has both the occurrence of a winning on the second large winning opening 266 and the occurrence of a winning on the second through gate 264. It will be expected and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Here, the first special electric winning apparatus 261 and the second special electric winning apparatus 262 are compared with reference to FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b). FIG. 80 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 78 as already described, and shows the second special electric winning device 262 when the second induction plate 281 is disposed at the induction position, FIG. 80 (b) FIG. 78A is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 78A-A, showing the first special electric award winning device 261 in the case where the first induction plate 271 is disposed at the induction position.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b), the dimension of the left end of the first induction region 275 in the first induction plate 271 is the same as the dimension of the left end of the first induction region 275 in the second induction plate 281. Or it is almost the same. In this case, the ratio of the range in which the right end of the third induction region 277 is in contact with the whole of the left end of the first induction region 275 in the first induction plate 271 is equivalent to that of the first induction region 285 in the second induction plate 281. The ratio of the range in which the right end of the third guidance region 287 is in contact with the entire left end is larger than the ratio of the range in which the third guide region 287 is in contact. And, in relation to the constitution concerned, when the 1st special electric winning a prize device 261 becomes open state (ie when the 1st induction board 271 is arranged in the induction position) the game which is put on the top of the 1st induction board 271 The probability that the ball is guided to the first through gate 263 is that of the second induction plate 281 when the second electric special prize winning device 262 is in the open state (ie, when the second induction plate 281 is disposed at the induction position). It is higher than the probability that the game ball placed on the upper surface is guided to the second through gate 264. Conversely, when the first electric special prize winning device 261 is in the open state (that is, when the first induction plate 271 is disposed at the induction position), the gaming ball placed on the upper surface of the first induction plate 271 is the first big prize The probability of being guided to the mouth 265 is a game placed on the upper surface of the second induction plate 281 when the second electric special prize winning device 262 is in the open state (that is, when the second induction plate 281 is disposed at the induction position) The probability that the ball is guided to the second winning opening 266 is lower. As a result, according to the type of the special electric winning device that is to be controlled among the first special electric winning device 261 and the second special electric winning device 262, the easiness of occurrence of winning in the special winning opening 265, 266 and the through gate 263 , 264 can be made different from each other.

  As described above, the first induction nail group 267 is provided above the first electric special prize winning device 261, and the first induction nail group 267 is located in front of the first ball receiving portion 272 from the right end of the variable display unit 36. It extends over (see FIG. 78). On the other hand, the first through gate 263 is provided below the first induction nail group 267 in the right side area PA3 and at the left position of the first electric special prize winning device 261. Therefore, the gaming balls having flowed into the right side area PA3 will not win the first through gate 263 without passing through the area provided with the first special electric power winning device 261.

  On the other hand, the second induction nail group 268 provided between the first special electric winning device 261 and the second special electric winning device 262 has the gaming ball which has flowed under the first special electric winning device 261 into the second ball receiving portion 282 Although provided so as to be guided, the second induction nail group 268 does not enter the first through gate 263 side than the left end of the first electric special prize winning device 261 (see FIG. 78). A second through gate 264 is provided vertically below the first through gate 263, and the game ball passes through a gate hole penetrating in the vertical direction. Therefore, the gaming ball that has won the first through gate 263 can win the second through gate 264, and the gaming ball that has won the first through gate 263 is likely to win the second through gate 264 as well. When one game ball wins the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264, the upper limit number of the information on the number of popular drawing sides is not acquired in the common drawing reservation area 65c. Two pieces of reservation information on the drawing side are acquired. Therefore, from this point as well, the hold information on the general drawing side is more easily obtained in the case where the first power special prize device 261 becomes the control target than when the second power special prize device 262 becomes the control target.

  Next, the contents of the acceptance table in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. FIG. 81 (a) shows a low probability table for the first special figure, FIG. 81 (b) shows a high probability table for the first special figure, and FIG. 81 (c) shows the second special chart. FIG. 81 shows a low probability table, and FIG. 81 (d) shows a high probability table for the second special view.

  As shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), the low probability of failure table for the first special figure and the first special figure are shown as the success / failure table for the first special view as in the first embodiment. A high probability of failure table is provided. Only the jackpot result and the outlier result are set as the game result in the low probability of failure table for the first special drawing and the high probability of failure table for the first special drawing, and the high probability of failure table for the first special drawing The probability that the jackpot result is selected is set higher than the low probability table for the first special drawing.

  As shown in FIGS. 81 (c) and 81 (d), the low probability of failure table for the second special figure and the second special figure are shown as the success / failure table for the second special view as in the first embodiment. A high probability of failure table is provided. The jackpot result, the first small hit result, and the second small hit result are set as the game results in the low probability not-performing table for the second special drawing and the high probability not-using table for the second special drawing. . The probability that the jackpot result is selected is set higher in the high probability non-performing table for the second special figure than in the low probability non-performing table for the second special figure. On the other hand, the probability that one of the first small hitting result and the second small hitting result is selected is set higher in the low probability table for the second special figure than in the high probability table for the second special figure. ing.

  Next, the execution mode of the open / close execution mode will be described. FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution mode of the open / close execution mode.

  Also in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), as a big hit result, as in the first embodiment, 2R low probability result, 2R high probability result, 4R low probability result, 4R high probability result, 6R There are low probability results, 6R high probability results, 10R low probability results, 10R high probability results, 16R low probability results and 16R high probability results. The number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode, the upper limit number of winning round games, the open continuation period of each round game, and the interval period in the respective opening / closing execution modes when the respective big hit results are the same as those in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the types of special electric winning device 261, 262 to be controlled in the open / close execution mode are different according to the type of the jackpot result. Specifically, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by either 2R high probability result, 4R high probability result, 6R high probability result, 10R high probability result or 16R high probability result, the first special electric winning equipment in each round game While the target of control is 261, 2R low probability results, 4R low probability results, 6R low probability results, 10R low probability results, and 16R low probability results. Thus, the second special electric winning device 262 is to be controlled. As a result, the hold information on the general drawing side is more easily obtained in the open / close execution mode than in the case where the high-accuracy result is the low-accuracy result. On the other hand, it is more difficult for a prize winning port 265 or 266 to be won in the open / close execution mode than when the result is a high probability result or a low probability result.

  Here, the opening continuation period of each round game is set to 29 seconds, and the winning upper limit number of each round game is set to ten. In this case, since the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, about 48 game balls can be supplied to the position of the first special electric potential winning device 261 before the open continuation period of each round game elapses. On the other hand, three gaming balls out of four gaming balls guided to the first induction area 275 of the first induction plate 271 in the first special electric potential winning device 261 as described above are the first big winning opening 265 And one game ball wins the first through gate 263. In this case, 36, which is 3/4 out of the 48, is calculated to be guided to the first large winning opening 265, and this number is greater than the upper limit number of winnings. Therefore, even if the first special power winning device 261 is to be controlled, the game balls of the upper limit number of winnings can win the first large winning opening 265 in each round game. By the way, during the period when the induction plates 271 and 281 of the special power winning devices 261 and 262 are held at the induction position in each round game, the game balls reaching the ball receiving portions 272 and 282 are induced to the corresponding through gates 263 and 264 If the game ball reaches the ball receiving portion 272, 282 and the falling edge of the game board from the left end of the induction plate 271, 281 to the corresponding through gate 263, 264 It is done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first small hitting result and the second small hitting result are set as the small hitting result as shown in FIG. 82 (b). The upper limit number of winning in open / close execution mode, the open continuation period, the open number, and the interval period in the case of these small hit results are the same. On the other hand, the types of the special power prize winning devices 261 and 262 to be controlled in the open / close execution mode are different according to the type of the small hit result. Specifically, in the open / close execution mode triggered by the first small hit result, the first electric special prize winning device 261 is controlled, whereas in the open / close execution mode triggered by the second small hit result, the second electric power The winning device 262 is to be controlled. As a result, the holding information on the general drawing side is more easily obtained in the open / close execution mode when the first small hitting result becomes the second small hitting result. On the other hand, it is more difficult for a winning to the large winning opening 265, 266 in the opening / closing execution mode than when the first small hitting result becomes the second small hitting result. Incidentally, the game ball reached the ball receiving portion 272, 282 during the period when the induction plates 271, 281 of the special electric winning device 261, 262 are held at the induction position in each opening of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result. Are guided to the corresponding through gates 263 and 264, the game balls reach the ball receiving portions 272 and 282 and then drop from the left end of the induction plates 271 and 281 toward the corresponding through gates 263 and 264 It is set to a period longer than the shortest period required until.

  FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing a special power release setting process executed by the main CPU 63. The open setting process is executed in step S1608 of the electric power start process (FIG. 42) and in step S1810 of the electric power close process (FIG. 44).

  First, it is determined whether or not the current control target is the first special electric winning device 261 (step S4001). When the present opening / closing execution mode is triggered by any high probability result or the first small hitting result, the first special power prize winning device 261 is the control target, and the present opening / closing execution mode is any low probability result or When triggered by the second small hit result, the second special prize winning device 262 is a control target.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, an open setting process of the first power special prize device 261 is executed (step S4002). Specifically, a drive signal is transmitted to the driving means of the first special electric winning device 261 so that the first induction plate 271 of the first special electric winning device 261 is disposed at the induction position. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4001, an open setting process of the second special electric winning device 262 is executed (step S4003). Specifically, a drive signal is transmitted to the drive means of the second special electric winning device 262 so that the second induction plate 281 of the second special electric winning device 262 is disposed at the induction position. As a result, the special power prize winning devices 261 and 262 corresponding to the jackpot result or the small jackpot result that is the trigger of the open / close execution mode are in the open state.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The game ball can enter the through gates 263 and 264 when the special game winning devices 261 and 262 are in the open state. The person who is expecting the prize winning device 261, 262 and the winning of the through gate 263, 264 will both expect. Therefore, it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of the game in the situation where the special electric power winning device 261, 262 is in the open state.

  The through gates 263 and 264 are game balls placed on the induction plates 271 and 272 disposed at the induction position, and the game is performed on the induction plates 271 and 272 that has flowed to the side different from the big winning opening 265 or 266 side. It is provided at a position where the ball can enter the ball. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the game balls placed on the induction plates 271 and 272, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming balls having flowed into the right side area PA3 are guided to the right end side of the guiding plates 271, 272 by the guiding nail groups 267, 268. In this case, the special winning openings 265, 266 and the through gates 263, 264 are provided on the left side of the induction plates 271, 272. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game balls flowing down on the guide plates 271 and 272.

  The area which enables the game ball to enter the through gate 263 or 264 in the induction plate 271 or 272 is on the left side of the large winning opening 265 or 266, that is, the tip of the flow direction of the game ball on the induction plate 271 or 272 Exist on the side. As a result, the player's sense of disadvantage for the game ball placed on the induction plate 271, 272 not winning in the large winning opening 265, 266 is conversely, the winning in the through gate 263, 264 occurs. It is possible to change to a sense of profit against

  The first special electric award winning apparatus 261 and the second special electric special award winning apparatus 262 are provided as the special electric award winning apparatuses 261 and 262, and the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264 are provided as the through gates 263 and 264. There is. And, by being guided by the first induction plate 271 of the first special electric award winning device 261, winning of the first through gate 263 becomes possible, and by being induced by the second induction plate 272 of the second special electric award winning device 262 Winning of the second through gate 264 is possible. In this case, by making the types of the special power winning devices 261, 262 which are the execution targets of the opening / closing control different in the opening / closing execution mode, the ball entering ratio of the gaming ball to each of the special electric winning devices 261, 262 and the through gates 263, 264 Can be made different.

  The probability that the game ball on the first induction plate 271 enters the first through gate 263 is different from the probability that the game ball on the second induction plate 272 enters the second through gate 264 . As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the special power winning device 261, 262 which is the target of the opening / closing control.

  For example, there are differences in the types of special power prize devices 261 and 262 that are targets of execution of the opening / closing control in the opening / closing execution mode between the 2R low probability result and the 2R high probability result. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the type of the game result that is the trigger of execution of the open / close execution mode.

  The second through gate 264 is located downstream of the first through gate 263 in the flow direction of the gaming ball. As a result, when the first special electric potential winning device 261 becomes the execution target of the opening and closing control, not only the gaming ball can enter the first through gate 263, but also the gaming ball enters the second through gate 264 It will get. Therefore, the player who expects to obtain the hold information on the common drawing side expects that the first power special prize device 261 is to be subjected to the opening / closing control.

  Whether the game ball enters the first through gate 263 or the game ball enters the second through gate 264, the same benefit of acquisition of holding information on the side of the drawing is provided. This makes it possible to suppress the sense of disadvantage felt by the player even when the execution target of the opening / closing control is any one of the first special electric winning apparatus 261 and the second special electric winning apparatus 262.

<Another form of the fifteenth embodiment>
In the middle of the opening / closing execution mode, the type of the special power prize winning device 261 or 262 to be subjected to the opening / closing control may be changed. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the ratio of the ball entry expectation degree of the big winning opening 265, 266 and the through gate 263, 264 in the middle of the open / close execution mode.

  The gaming ball entering the first through gate 263 is not limited to the configuration capable of entering the second through gate 264, but the gaming ball entering the first through gate 263 may be included in the second through gate 264 It may not be possible to enter the ball, and the gaming ball having entered the second through gate 264 may not be allowed to enter the first through gate 263.

  -Although it was set as the structure which is not provided with the member which opens and closes large winning a prize opening 265,266 directly, it is good also as composition provided with the member which opens and closes large winning a prize opening 265,266 directly. For example, when the first induction plate 271 is disposed at the blocking position, the first induction plate 265 is faced in a position close to the first large winning opening 265 so as to close the first large winning opening 265 from the front. When 271 is disposed at the induction position, the first induction winning portion 265 on the first induction plate 271 or a portion which becomes a position that does not obstruct the flow of gaming balls directed to the first through gate 263 is the first induction It is good also as composition provided in board 271. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first large winning opening 265 in a situation where the first guiding plate 271 is disposed at the blocking position.

Sixteenth Embodiment
In the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 32, and the opening and closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the game ball is placed on the induction plate portion 214. In the present embodiment, the game ball can win a prize in the through gate 35. However, in the present embodiment, the through gate 35 is not provided below the special electric prize device 32, and two special electric prize devices 32 are vertically arranged in parallel. It is set up. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 84 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided on the left side area PA2 of the game area PA, and the left side area PA2 is compared to the through gate 35 when compared in the same firing operation mode that the gaming ball flows down. The entering frequency of the gaming ball is constant regardless of the gaming state. In addition, when the player performs a shooting operation so that the gaming ball flows down the left area PA2, the gaming ball can reach the position where the second operation opening 34 is provided. Therefore, when the game ball is released to flow down the left side area PA2, winning on the through gate 35 becomes possible, and the second operation opening 34 is opened with the winning on the through gate 35. When the state is reached, winning of the second operation port 34 is possible.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set as the support mode for controlling the state of the common use utility 34 a of the second operation port 34. In the low-frequency support mode, the frequency of the general-purpose utility 34a is not in the open state or the frequency of the general-purpose utility 34a is in the open state is relatively low. Relatively high. If the result is low, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode, and if the result becomes high, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the high frequency support mode .

  In the right side area PA3, two special electric award winning devices 32 are vertically arranged in parallel. Similar to the first embodiment, the special power prize device 32 includes a passage forming member 201, an opening and closing member 202, and a guide member 203. When the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the closing position, the game ball can not enter the fourth discharge passage 45 and passes through the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) formed in the opening and closing member 202. The game ball will flow downward to the special power winning device 32 in the above. When the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, the game ball can be placed on the induction plate portion 214 of the opening and closing member 202, and the game ball lying on the induction plate portion 214 is the fourth discharge passage It becomes possible to enter the ball into the section 45. In the following description, the upper special electric winning device 32 is referred to as a first special electric winning device 291, and the lower special electric winning device 32 is referred to as a second special electric winning device 292.

  The first special electric winning device 291 extends from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the right end of the game area PA above the second special electric winning device 292. An induction nail group 241 is provided on the right side of the right side area PA <b> 3 on the upstream side of the first electric special prize winning device 291 as in the first embodiment. As a result, the gaming balls flowing down the right side area PA3 are guided by the guiding nail group 241 to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 in the first power special winning device 291. Then, the gaming ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end of the opening and closing member 202. In this case, when the opening / closing member 202 of the first special electric winning device 291 is disposed at the open position and the first special electric winning device 291 is in the open state, the gaming ball having flowed into the right area PA3 is the first It is basically prevented from flowing down below the special electric winning device 291, and the opening / closing member 202 of the first special electric winning device 291 is disposed at the closing position and the first special electric winning device 291 is in the closed state. The game ball having flowed into the right area PA3 is allowed to flow downward to the first special electric winning device 291.

  The second special electric power winning device 292 extends from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the right end of the game area PA. A lower induction nail group 293 is provided between the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 in the right side area PA3. The lower induction nail group 293 guides the gaming ball having flowed under the first special electric winning device 291 to the right end side of the second special electric winning device 292 from the side of the passage forming body 201 of the first special electric winning device 291 2 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24 b in the lower right direction over the right end side of the special electric power winning device 292. As a result, the gaming balls having flowed under the first special electric winning device 291 are guided to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 in the second special electric winning device 292 by the lower guiding nail group 293. Then, the gaming ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end of the opening and closing member 202. In this case, when the opening / closing member 202 of the second special electric potential winning device 292 is disposed at the open position and the second special electric potential winning device 292 is in the open state, the gaming ball having flowed into the right area PA3 is the second Basically, it is prevented from flowing downward to the special electric winning device 292, and the opening / closing member 202 of the second special electric winning device 292 is disposed at the closing position and the second special electric winning device 292 is in the closed state. The game ball having flowed into the right area PA3 is allowed to flow downward to the second special electric potential winning device 292.

  FIG. 85 (a) is a flowchart showing the special power release setting process executed by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG. The special power release setting process is executed at step S1608 of the special power start process (FIG. 42) and at step S1810 of the special power close process (FIG. 44).

  In the release setting process for the special power, first, the release setting process of the first special power prize device 291 is executed (step S4101). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed to make the first special electric pay winning device 291 open. Subsequently, the opening setting process of the second special electric winning device 292 is executed (step S4102). In the open setting process, data setting is performed to make the second special electric winning apparatus 292 open. As a result, the first electric power special winning device 291 and the second electric power special winning device 292 are simultaneously or substantially simultaneously opened. That is, in the present embodiment, if the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the big hit result at the start of each round game, if it is the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, each open times of the special power winning devices 291 and 292 At the start, both the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are in the open state.

  FIG. 85 (b) is a flow chart showing a special electric power application closing setting process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the closing setting process for the special power is performed in step S1704 of the special power release process (FIG. 43).

  In the closing setting process for the special power, first, the closing setting process of the first special electric winning device 291 is executed (step S4201). In the closing setting process, data setting is performed so that the first special electric pay winning device 291 is in the closing state. Subsequently, the closing setting process of the second special electric winning device 292 is executed (step S4202). In the closing setting process, data setting is performed to make the second special electric winning apparatus 292 close. As a result, the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are simultaneously or substantially simultaneously closed. That is, in the present embodiment, if the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the big hit result at the end of each round game, if it is the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, each open cycle of the special power winning device 291, 292 At the end of the process, both the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are closed.

  By the way, although the description by illustration is omitted, in the processing during the special power release (FIG. 43), when the gaming ball has won in either of the first special power winning device 291 and the second special power winning device 292, in step S1706 Make a positive decision. In this case, when winning is simultaneously occurring in the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 2 in step S1707, and a winning is generated in one of them. If YES, the value of the winning counter is decremented by one in step S1707. In the special electric power closing process (FIG. 44), if it is a small hit result and the gaming ball has won in any of the first electric special winning device 291 and the second electric special winning device 292, the process proceeds to step S1801. And make a positive decision. In this case, when winning is simultaneously occurring in the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 2 in step S1802, and a winning is generated in one of them. If YES in step S1802, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 1 in step S1802.

  Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 86, the manner in which the first special electric winning apparatus 291 and the second special electric winning apparatus 292 are opened and closed will be described. FIG. 86 (a) shows the execution period of the round game, FIG. 86 (b) shows the period during which the first special electric winning device 291 is in the open state, and FIG. 86 (c) shows the second special electric winning device 292 86 (d) shows the time when the game ball on the induction plate 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 reaches the induction plate 214 of the second special electric winning device 292. Indicates the shortest possible period of time required.

  As shown in FIG. 86A, a round game is executed at each of the timing t1 to t2, the timing t3 to t5, and the timing t6 to t8. In this case, as shown in FIG. 86 (b) and FIG. 86 (c), both the first special prize winning device 291 and the second special duty winning device 292 simultaneously at timing t1, timing t3 and timing t6. In the open state, both the first special prize winning device 291 and the second special prize winning device 292 are simultaneously closed at the timing of t2, the timing of t5 and the timing of t8.

  In the configuration, it is assumed that the game ball is placed on the induction plate portion 214 of the opening / closing member 202 of the first special electric winning device 291 at the timing of t2 and the timing of t5 when the first special electric winning device 291 is in the closed state. Be done. The gaming ball falls downward without winning the first special electric power winning device 291. In this case, the shortest period assumed for the game ball on the induction plate portion 214 of the first special electric award winning device 291 to reach the induction plate portion 214 of the second special electric award winning device 292 is The distance between the first special electric award winning device 291 and the second special electric special award winning device 292 is set so as to be longer than the interval period between one opening occasion of the winning arrangement 291 and the next opening occasion. It is done. Further, as described above, the lower induction nail group 293 is provided between the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292, and the gaming ball having flowed under the first special electric winning device 291 is By lowering the inclination on the lower induction nail group 293 by its own weight, the position of the second special electric winning apparatus 292 is reached. As a result, the period required for the game ball on the induction plate portion 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 to reach the induction plate portion 214 of the second electric special winning device 292 is longer than in the case where the gaming ball falls vertically. It has been for a long time.

  With the above configuration, the gaming ball dropped from the induction plate portion 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 to the second special electric winning device 292 at the timing of t2 is shown in FIGS. 86 (c) and 86 (d). As shown, at the timing of t4, which is the timing after the timing of t3 at which the second special electric award winning device 292 is in the open state again, the second special electric award winning device 292 is reached. In addition, the game ball dropped from the induction plate portion 214 of the first special electric potential winning device 291 to the second special electric potential winning device 292 at the timing of t5, as shown in FIGS. 86 (c) and 86 (d), [2] The second special electric winning device 292 will be reached at the timing of t7 which is a timing after the timing of t6 when the special electric winning device 292 is in the open state again.

  The number of gaming balls placed on the induction plate portion 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 when the first special electric winning device 291 is in the closed state in each round game is about two at the maximum, less than the upper limit number of winning . Therefore, before the gaming balls dropped from the first special electric winning device 291 win the second special electric winning device 292, the second special electric winning device 292 is not closed.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which first special electric pay winning apparatus 291 and second special electric special prize winning apparatus 292 are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction in right side area PA3, first special electric special prize winning apparatus 291 in each open cycle in the open / close execution mode. A period occurs in which both the second special electric potential winning device 292 is in the open state. As a result, the game ball that has failed to enter the first special power prize winning device 291 in the open state can enter the second special power prize device 292 in the open state. Therefore, it is difficult for the leak to enter the special electric winning device 291, 292 in the opening / closing execution mode.

  The game ball which was unable to enter the first special electric winning device 291 despite having reached the position of the first special electric winning device 291 at the timing when each opening round ends, in the next opening round The first special electric winning apparatus 291 and the second special electric winning apparatus 292 are provided so that the second special electric winning apparatus 292 can enter the ball. As a result, the gaming ball that has leaked to the first special electric winning device 291 at the predetermined opening time can enter the second special electric winning device 292 at the next opening time, and the special electric winning device 291, in the opening / closing execution mode Leakage to entry to 292 is less likely to occur.

  The game ball reaches the position of the second special electric potential winning device 292 from the position of the first special electric potential winning device 291 from the position of the first special electric potential winning device 291 in a period from the end of the predetermined opening number to the start of the next opening number in the first opening / closing execution mode It is set to a period shorter than the period required to As a result, the gaming ball that has leaked to the first special electric winning device 291 in the predetermined opening time can enter the second special electric winning device 292 in the next opening time. In addition, it is possible to realize such a configuration for making it difficult for the occurrence of ball entry leakage to occur by adjusting the positional relationship between the first special electric potential winning device 291 and the second special electric potential winning device 292.

  In the configuration as described above, when the open / close member 202 of the first special electric winning device 291 is disposed at the open position, the inflow of gaming balls to the downstream side of the open / close member 202 is blocked, and the second special electric winning When the opening and closing member 202 of the device 292 is disposed at the open position, the inflow of gaming balls to the downstream side of the opening and closing member 202 is blocked. Then, when each opening cycle is started, the first special electric award winning device 291 and the second special electric award winning device 292 simultaneously become open, and when each opening occasion is ended, the first special electric award winning device 291 and the second special electric alert The winning device 292 is simultaneously closed. This makes it possible to suppress the number of gaming balls which are discharged to the out port 24a without winning in the special power winning devices 291, 292 in the open / close execution mode.

  The first special award winning device 291 and the second special award winning device 292 are simultaneously opened and simultaneously closed. As a result, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while suppressing an increase in processing load for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric award winning devices 291, 292.

<Another form of the sixteenth embodiment>
The first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are not limited to being in the open state simultaneously at the start of each open cycle, and the timing of the open state is slightly different depending on the appearance The configuration may be substantially the same as the hard level, or may be different in the timing at which it is in the open state to the extent of being visually distinguishable. In the configuration, in order to cause the game ball that entered the first special electric winning device 291 to leak into the second special electric winning device 292, the timing at which the second special electric winning device 292 is in the open state is the first special electric winning device Preferably, the timing is earlier than the timing when the device 291 is in the open state.

  The first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are not limited to the configuration in which they are simultaneously closed at the end of each opening cycle, and they are distinguished by the appearance of slightly different closing timings. The configuration may be substantially identical to the hard level, or may be different in timing at which the closing state is made to the extent that it can be distinguished visually.

  The configuration may be made such that gaming balls flowing down the right side area PA3 are surely prevented from flowing downstream of the first special electric winning device 291 when the first electric special winning device 291 is in the open state. For example, like the induction plates 271 and 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, the opening and closing member 202 has a plate shape having no opening 213, and when the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, the game board is In the state of being sunk behind the board of 24 and being arranged in the open position, the opening and closing member 202 may be present between the board of the game board 24 and the window panel 52. As a result, except for the game ball placed on the opening / closing member 202 at the timing when the first special electric potential prize winning device 291 switches from the open state to the closed state, the right side when the first special electric potential prize winning device 291 is in the open state The gaming ball flowing down the area PA3 will surely win the first special electric power winning device 291.

  Further, in addition to or in place of the above configuration, it is certain that the gaming ball flowing down the right side area PA3 flows downstream more than the second special electric winning device 292 when the second special electric winning device 292 is in the open state. May be blocked. For example, like the induction plates 271 and 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, the opening and closing member 202 has a plate shape having no opening 213, and when the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, the game board is In the state of being sunk behind the board of 24 and being arranged in the open position, the opening and closing member 202 may be present between the board of the game board 24 and the window panel 52. As a result, except for the game ball placed on the opening / closing member 202 at the timing when the second special electric potential prize winning device 292 switches from the open state to the closed state, the right side when the second special electric potential prize winning device 292 is in the open state The gaming ball flowing down the area PA3 will surely win the second special electric power winning device 292.

  The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the lower guiding nail group 293 is provided between the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292, and the lower guiding nail 293 is not provided. It is good also as composition. Even in this case, the game ball reaches the distance between the first special electric pay machine 291 and the second special electric pay machine 292 from the position of the first special electric pay machine 291 to the position of the second special electric pay machine 292 The game ball that has leaked the ball to the first special electric award winning device 291 is set to the second by setting the shortest period of time required to be longer than the interval period of the opening times of the special electric award winning devices 291 and 292. It is possible to cause the special power winning device 292 to enter the ball.

Seventeenth Embodiment
The present embodiment is different from the sixteenth embodiment in the configuration for allowing all the game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 to win the special power winning device in the open / close execution mode. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the sixteenth embodiment is basically omitted. In the present embodiment, there is no small hit result.

  FIG. 87 is a longitudinal sectional view of the game board 24 for illustrating the configuration of the special power winning device 301, 302 in the present embodiment.

  In the right side area PA3 of the game board 24, a first special electric potential winning device 301 and a second special electric potential winning device 302 are vertically arranged in parallel. Each special power winning device 301, 302 has a large winning opening 301a, 302a through which game balls can enter, and an open / close door 301b, 302b for opening and closing the large winning opening 301a, 302a. The open / close doors 301b and 302b can be switched and arranged between the open position and the closed position by being driven by the drive units 301c and 302c for special power. When the open / close door 301b, 302b is disposed at the closed position, entry of the gaming ball into the big winning opening 301a, 302a is not possible, and the open / close door 301b, 302b is disposed by the open position It becomes possible to enter the gaming ball into the mouth 301a, 302a. The game balls having entered the special winning opening 301a and 302a are detected by the detection sensors 301d and 302d. Even in the present embodiment, as in the sixteenth embodiment, both the first electric power winning apparatus 301 and the second electric power winning apparatus 302 are simultaneously open at the start of the round game, and the first electric power at the end of the round game. Both the winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are simultaneously closed.

  Although not shown in the present embodiment, when the first special power prize device 301 is in the open state, the gaming ball that has flowed into the right side area PA3 will surely win the first special power prize device 301. In the right side area PA3, an area on the upstream side of the first power special winning device 301 is set. In addition, the gaming ball that has flowed down below the first special electric winning device 301 is the right area so that the second special electric winning device 302 will surely win when the second special electric winning device 302 is in the open state at that time An area between the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 is set in PA3.

  A flow-down blocking member 303 is provided between the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 in the right side area PA3. The flow-down blocking member 303 is driven by the blocking drive unit 304 so that it can move between a retracted position not projecting forward of the board of the gaming board 24 and a blocking position projecting forward of the board of the gaming board 24. ing. When the flow-down blocking member 303 is disposed at the retracted position, the gaming ball that has flowed down to the lower part of the first power special prize device 301 is not disturbed by the flow-down blocking member 303 to the side of the second power special prize device 302 And flow down. On the other hand, when the flow-through blocking member 303 is disposed at the blocking position, all gaming balls having flowed downward to the first special electric prize winning device 301 are placed on the upper surface of the flow-through blocking member 303. It is prevented from flowing down to the side.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the flow-down prevention control process executed by the main CPU 63. The flow-down prevention control process is repeatedly executed in the open / close execution mode.

  This round game is a round game different from the final round game (step S4301: YES), and a blocking start period (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of this round game (Step S4302: YES), drive control processing for blocking start is executed (step S4303). As a result, the flow-down blocking member 303 is disposed at the blocking position from the retracted position. In addition, because the blocking start period is set to a period shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball (specifically, 0.6 seconds) and the winning upper limit number of each round game (specifically, 10 pieces) The round game never ends before the blocking start period has elapsed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4301, a negative determination is made in step S4302, or if the process of step S4303 is executed, the blocking end period (specifically, 1 second) elapses from the start timing of the round game. It is determined whether or not (step S4304). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4304, drive control processing for blocking termination is executed (step S4305). As a result, the flow-down blocking member 303 is disposed at the retracted position from the blocking position. The blocking end period is set to a period shorter than the blocking start period.

  Next, the relationship between the open / close state of each special electric power winning device 301, 302 and the operation position of the flow-down blocking member 303 will be described. FIG. 89 is a time chart for illustrating the relationship. FIG. 89 (a) shows the execution period of the round game, FIG. 89 (b) shows the period during which the first special electric winning device 301 is in the open state, and FIG. 89 (c) shows the second special electric winning device 302. FIG. 89 (d) shows a period in which the flow-down blocking member 303 is disposed in the blocking position. FIGS. 90 (a) to 90 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the relationship between the open / close state of each of the special electric winning devices 301, 302 and the operation position of the flow-down blocking member 303. FIG. In addition, the case of the opening / closing execution mode in which a round game occurs three times will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 89 (a), the first round game is executed at the timing of t1. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 89 (b) and 89 (c), the first power special prize device 301 and the second power special prize device 302 are simultaneously opened. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), both of the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are in the open state, and the flow-down blocking member 303 is in the retracted position.

  At the timing t2 which is the timing when the blocking start period has elapsed from the timing t1 when the first round game is started, as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), both of the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are in the open state, and the downstream blocking member 303 is in the blocking position.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the first round game ends at the timing of t3. At the timing t3, as shown in FIGS. 89 (b) and 89 (c), the first power special prize device 301 and the second power special prize device 302 are simultaneously closed. However, even in this situation, the state in which the downflow blocking member 303 is disposed at the blocking position is maintained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), both of the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are in the closed state, and the flow-down blocking member 303 is in the blocking position. As a result, the gaming ball that has passed the front of the first special electric winning device 301 at the timing when the first special electric winning device 301 is in the closed state and the gaming ball that has passed the front of the first special electric winning device 301 in the interval period are flowing down While falling on the upper surface of the blocking member 303, further downward flow is blocked.

  Thereafter, the next round game is started as shown in FIG. 89 (a) at the timing of t4, and as shown in FIG. 89 (b) and FIG. The device 301 and the second special electric award winning device 302 are simultaneously opened. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), both of the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are in the open state, and the downstream blocking member 303 is in the blocking position.

  Thereafter, when the blocking end period elapses after the round game is started at the timing of t5, the flow-down blocking member 303 is disposed at the retracted position from the blocking position as shown in FIG. 89 (d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), both of the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are in the open state, and the flow-down blocking member 303 is in the retracted position. As a result, the gaming balls placed on the upper surface of the flow blocking member 303 start flowing downward, and all the gaming balls win the second special electric power winning device 302.

  Thereafter, in the timing t6 to the timing t9, the same operation as the timing t2 to the timing t5 is repeated. Then, at the timing of t10, the final round game is finished as shown in FIG. 89 (a). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 89 (b) and 89 (c), the first special electric award winning apparatus 301 and the second special electric special award winning apparatus 302 are simultaneously closed. Further, as shown in FIG. 89 (d), the flow-down blocking member 303 is disposed at the retracted position.

  According to the present embodiment described above, even if leakage to the first special electric winning device 301 occurs, the outflow blocking member 303 blocks the flow of the leaking gaming balls to the downstream side. Then, the blocking by the flow-down blocking member 303 is canceled under the condition that the second special electric potential winning device 302 is in the open state, the gaming ball in which the flow-down blocking member 303 is blocking the flow toward the downstream The second special electric potential winning device 302 will enter the ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the leakage into the special electric winning device 301, 302 in the opening / closing execution mode.

Eighteenth Embodiment
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the position where the combination of the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35 is provided. Moreover, the ball entry part used as the acquisition opportunity of the reservation information by the side of common use is provided also other than the through gate 35. FIG. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 91 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the combination of the special power winning device 32 and the through gate 35 is provided in the right side area PA3 of the gaming area PA, but in the present embodiment, the special electric winning device 32 is provided in the left side area PA2 of the gaming area PA. A combination with the through gate 35 is provided. The configuration of the special power winning device 32 is the same as that of the first embodiment except that the positional relationship between the left and right is reversed. That is, the special electric winning device 32 extends from the left end of the left side area PA2 to the left end of the center frame 36a at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the left side area PA2, and a passage forming body in which the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed. Reference numeral 201 is provided in the left frame portion 36d of the center frame 36a, and the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 is present at the left end of the left side area PA2. And the upper surface of the induction | guidance | derivation board part 214 of the opening-and-closing member 202 becomes a downward inclination toward right direction. The game balls flowing down the left side area PA2 reach the area where the special power prize device 32 is provided except for the game balls entering the entrance 36e of the warp passage.

  The induction nail group 241 is provided by arranging a plurality of nails 24 b above the special electric award winning device 32 in the left side area PA2. The guiding nail group 241 flows into the left side area PA2 and guides the gaming ball which has not entered the entrance 36e of the warp passage to the receiving unit 231. As a result, the gaming balls that flow down the left side area PA2 and reach the special power winning device 32 are first guided to the receiving portion 231 and thereafter reach the left end of the opening and closing member 202. When the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, the fourth discharge passage 45 can be made winning by lowering the upper surface of the guiding plate 214 of the opening and closing member 202 to the right. On the other hand, when the opening and closing member 202 is disposed in the closed position, the opening and closing member 202 flows downward through the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) of the opening and closing member 202. Also, when the opening and closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closing position with the gaming ball resting on the guiding plate portion 214, the gaming ball flows downward from the resting position to the lower side of the opening and closing member 202.

  A through gate 35 is provided at a position below the special electric award winning device 32 in the left side area PA2 and near the center frame 36a. In addition, a restriction nail group 242 for guiding the game ball existing in the predetermined range on the right side on the induction plate portion 214 to the through gate 35 is provided between the special electric potential winning device 32 and the through gate 35. . Thereby, when the opening and closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the gaming ball is present in the predetermined range on the right side on the guiding plate portion 214, the gaming ball wins the through gate 35. It becomes. Then, similar to the first embodiment, the winning gate for the through gate 35 is generated, and the common drawing holding area of the common drawing holding area 65c has the upper limit number of holding information on the common drawing side not being held and stored. Hold information of the side is acquired.

  In the present embodiment, a gate for emergency 311 is provided in addition to the through gate 35 as a ball entry unit that is a trigger for acquiring reservation information on the side of a general drawing. The emergency gate 311 is provided above the guiding nail group 241 in the left side area PA2. In the case where a winning on the outburst gate 311 occurs, as in the case where a winning on the through gate 35 occurs, pending information of the upper limit number of popular drawing sides is not stored in the common drawing reserve area 65c. The reservation information on the side of the drawing is acquired on condition of. In addition, although the sudden gate 311 has a penetration gate penetrating in the vertical direction in the same manner as the through gate 35 and the winning game balls continue to flow down the game area PA as it is, the present invention is limited thereto. The game ball that has won the emergency gate 311 may be discharged to the back side of the game board 24 without being hit.

  Here, on the upstream side of the emergency gate 311, a restriction nail 312 is provided to make it difficult for the emergency gate 311 to win a prize. Due to the provision of the restriction nail 312, the probability that the gaming ball flowing down the left side area PA2 wins the sudden gate 311, the probability that the gaming ball supplied to the lower side area PA4 wins the first operation opening 33 It has a lower probability than that. In addition, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left area PA2 wins the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability that the game ball flowing down the special power winning device 32 in the left area PA2 wins the general winning opening 31 It has become. In addition, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 wins the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability that the game ball wins in the special power prize device 32 when the special power prize device 32 is in the open state. In the open / close execution mode, the probability is lower than the probability that the game ball will win the through gate 35. In addition, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 wins the sudden gate 311 is higher than the probability that the game ball wins in the second operation opening 34 when the second operation opening 34 is in the open state. It has a low probability. For example, when 1000 game balls flow into the left side area PA2, one game ball has a probability of winning in the emergency gate 311.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the hold information on the general drawing side is acquired, the general electric power release state is surely generated in response to the hold information on the general drawing side. That is, when a winning on the through gate 35 or the sudden gate 311 occurs and the information on the side of the drawing is obtained, the second operation port 34 is surely opened thereafter. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of the general drawing side from having the pending information acquired.

  As described above, even if the special power winning device 32, the through gate 35 and the sudden gate 311 are provided in the left side area PA2, the condition is that the gaming balls flowing down the left side area PA2 do not win the special electric potential winning device 32 As the lower area PA4. Then, the gaming ball having flowed into the lower area PA4 can reach the position where it is possible to win the first operation port 33, and if the second operation port 34 is in the open state, the game operation ball 34 wins Possible positions can be reached. In addition, it is possible to reach the position where it is possible to win the general winning opening 31. Thereby, by continuing the firing operation of the gaming ball so as to flow down the left area PA2, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34, the through gate 35 and for sudden occurrence It becomes possible to aim for winning for all of the gates 311.

  On the other hand, although the nail 24b is provided in the right side area PA3, the ball entering portion is not provided. In addition, the game ball which has flowed down the right area PA3 flows into the lower area PA4, and the flowed-in game ball can reach a position where it is possible to win the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 is opened. If it has become, it is possible to reach the position where it is possible to win the second operation opening 34. In this case, the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the right side area PA3 more than the case where the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the left side area PA2 because of the absence of the ball entering portion in the right side area PA3 as described above. In the case of performing the above, a winning on the second operation port 34 which is in the open state is more likely to occur. Thus, for example, when a winning on the emergency gate 311 occurs and the open state of the second operation port 34 suddenly occurs, the game ball is released so as to flow down the right area PA3. It becomes possible to make it easy to generate a win on the 2 operation opening 34.

  FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing the acquisition processing of the general drawing side hold information executed by the main CPU 63. It should be noted that the acquisition processing of the suspension information on the general drawing side is executed in step S1101 in the general drawing general power control processing (FIG. 37).

  If a winning on the through gate 35 has occurred (step S4401: YES), and the number of holding information on the general drawing side stored in the general drawing holding area 65c is less than the upper limit storage number (step S4402: YES) And the value of the common drawing hold counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 in order for the main CPU 63 to grasp the number of unprocessed common drawing side holding information stored in the common drawing hold area 65 c. (Step S4403). Incidentally, in accordance with the value of the common drawing suspension counter, the display content of the common drawing suspension display unit 38b in the common drawing unit 38 is adjusted. As a result, the display content of the common drawing hold display unit 38b corresponds to the number of common drawing side holding information stored in the common drawing hold area 65c. Thereafter, the value of the common random number counter C4 is stored in the first storage area of the common drawing reserve area 65c, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages added by 1 in step S4403 (step S4404).

  Thereafter, a common drawing suspension command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step S4405). When the voice emission control device 81 receives the drawing stop command, the voice emission control device 81 transmits the corresponding command to the display control device 82. In the symbol display device 41, image display is performed to notify the number of the general drawing side holding information stored in the common drawing holding area 65c, and the display control device 82 displays a command corresponding to the general drawing holding command. By receiving the content, the content of the image display is updated to content corresponding to an increase in the number of pieces of pending information on the common drawing side. In addition, when the variable display of the pattern in the common drawing display section 38a triggered by the holding information on the common drawing side is started, the content of the image display corresponds to the decrease in the number of the holding information on the common drawing side. Will be updated to

  The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. 93 (a). The first hold display area 313 for notifying the number of the first hold information stored in the first special view hold area 85 at the lower edge of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the second special view A second hold display area 314 for notifying of the number of pieces of second hold information stored in the hold area 86 is set. In the first hold display area 313, unit display areas equal in number to the number of first hold information that can be stored in the first special view hold area 85 are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction, and the number of first hold information increases. While the hold image 315 is sequentially displayed from the unit display area on the left side according to, the hold image 315 is erased sequentially from the unit display area on the right side as the number of first hold information decreases. In the second hold display area 314, unit display areas equal in number to the number of second hold information that can be stored in the second special view hold area 86 are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction, and the number of second hold information is While the reserve image 315 is displayed sequentially from the unit display area on the left side as it increases, the reserve image 315 is erased sequentially from the unit display area on the right side as the number of second reserve information decreases. By setting the first hold display area 313, the number of first hold information can be clearly grasped through the display contents of the symbol display device 41, and the second hold display area 314 is set. Thus, the number of pieces of second hold information can be clearly grasped through the display content of the symbol display device 41.

  In the upper left corner of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, a common drawing hold display area 316 for notifying of the number of holding information on the common drawing side stored in the common drawing holding area 65c is set. There is. In the common drawing reservation display area 316, unit display areas of the same number as the number of drawing information holding information that can be stored in the common drawing reservation area 65c are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. While the reserve image 315 is displayed sequentially from the unit display area on the left side as it increases, the reserve image 315 is erased sequentially from the unit display area on the right side as the number of reserve information on the general drawing side decreases. By setting the common drawing reservation display area 316, the number of pieces of held information on the common drawing side can be clearly grasped through the display contents of the symbol display device 41.

  The display control device 82 increases the number of the hold images 315 displayed in the common view hold display area 316 by one when the command corresponding to the common view hold command is received. In addition, the display control device 82 transmits from the voice emission control device 81 based on the fact that the main CPU 63 transmits a command indicating that the variable display of the pattern in the common view display unit 38a is started to the voice emission control device 81. When the command to be received is received, the number of pending images 315 displayed in the common view pending display area 316 is decreased by one.

  Returning to the description of the acquisition processing (FIG. 92) of the general drawing side holding information, if a negative determination is made in step S4401, a negative determination is made in step S4402, or the process of step S4405 is executed, It is on condition that the winning a prize for the emergency gate 311 has occurred (step S4406: YES), and the number of holding information on the general drawing side stored in the general drawing holding area 65c is less than the upper limit memory number ( Step S4407: YES), the value of the general drawing hold counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S4408). As described above, in accordance with the value of the common drawing suspension counter, the display content of the common drawing suspension display unit 38b in the common drawing unit 38 is adjusted. Thereafter, the value of the common random number counter C4 is stored in the first storage area of the common drawing reserve area 65c, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages added by 1 in step S4408 (step S4409).

  Thereafter, if the current state is the open / close execution mode (step S4410: YES), or if the value of the common drawing hold counter of the main side RAM 65 is not less than 2 although it is not the open / close execution mode, ie, the common drawing hold area 65c If two or more pieces of hold information on the side are stored (steps S4410 and S4411: NO), a general drawing hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S4412). The processing contents of the audio light emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 in this case are the same as in the case where the common drawing suspension command is transmitted in step S4405.

  On the other hand, if the current state is not the open / close execution mode (step S4410: NO), and the value of the common drawing hold counter of the main RAM 65 is "1", that is, the common drawing hold area 65c holds one common drawing side hold information. If only the number is stored (step S4411: YES), the sudden on hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S4413). When the voice emission control device 81 receives the sudden release hold command, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the command, the display control device 82 updates the display content of the common drawing suspension display area 316 as in the case of receiving the command corresponding to the common drawing suspension command. In addition, when the display control device 82 receives a command corresponding to a sudden command, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 93 (b), a winning on the second operation port 34 on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 as a special notification. A special notification image 317 is displayed to urge the user to perform a shooting operation aimed at. Since the special notification image 317 is displayed, the player performs a shooting operation aiming at winning in the second operation port 34, and it becomes possible to cause an acquisition opportunity of the second hold information.

  When it is time to display the special notification image 317 in a situation where the display control device 82 is executing the effects for the game run on the symbol display device 41, in the upper right corner of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. The reduction display area 318 is set, and the effects for the game cycle are continued to be reduced and displayed in the reduction display area 318. As a result, even when the sudden-on-hold command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 in a situation where effects for a game are being executed, the special notification image 317 can be displayed in a predetermined size, and the special It becomes possible to make it easy for the player to recognize the notification image 317.

  Next, the situation in which the general drawing side hold information is acquired will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 94 (a) shows the execution period of the open / close execution mode, FIG. 94 (b) shows the period during which the special power prize device 32 is in the open state, and FIG. 94 (c) shows the occurrence of winning on the through gate 35. FIG. 94 (d) shows the timing of occurrence of winning on the outburst gate 311, and FIG. 94 (e) shows the timing at which the suspension information on the common drawing side is acquired.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (d), winning at the emergency gate 311 occurs at the timing of t1 which is a state where the open / close execution mode is not executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94 (e), the general drawing side hold information is acquired at the timing of the time t1. The second operation port 34 is opened in response to the acquired reservation information on the side of the drawing, and the second suspension information acquired based on the winning on the second operation port 34 in the open state is played for the game As the target game is ended and the game is ended, the open / close execution mode triggered by the second small hit result is executed over the timing t2 to the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 94 (a). . Here, in the present embodiment, when the second small hit result is obtained, the number of times of opening of the special power prize device 32 is set to two.

  In the open / close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the special power winning device 32 is in the open state over the timing t3 to the timing t4 and the timing t6 to the timing t7. In this case, the open / close member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position with the gaming ball resting on the induction plate portion 214 at timing t4 and timing t7. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 94 (c), winning on the through gate 35 occurs at each of the timing t5 and the timing t8, and as shown in FIG. 94 (e) at each of the timing t5 and the timing t8. On the other hand, the information on the side of the computer is obtained. As a result, a trigger for the second operation port 34 to be in the open state occurs again, and a winning on the second operation port 34 in the open state is generated, and the second hold information is acquired, as shown in FIG. As shown in (a), an open / close execution mode triggered by the second small hit result is generated again from the timing t10 to the timing t16.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the special power winning device 32 is in the open state over timing t11 to timing t12 and timing t13 to timing t14. Further, at timing t14, the open / close member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position with the gaming ball resting on the induction plate portion 214. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 94 (c), a winning on the through gate 35 occurs at the timing of t15, and the reservation information on the common drawing side is obtained at the timing of the t15, as shown in FIG. 94 (e). As a result, an opportunity for the second operation port 34 to be in the open state is generated again, and a winning on the second operation port 34 in the open state is generated, and the second hold information is acquired. Occurs.

  According to the present embodiment described above, in addition to the effects of the first embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

  Even when the opening / closing execution mode is not in effect, the game ball enters the emergency gate 311 to acquire the hold information on the side of the drawing, and the second operation port 34 can be opened. Then, based on the game ball entering the second operation port 34 in the open state, the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode. Thereby, not only in the opening and closing execution mode but also in the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to generate a situation in which the opening and closing execution mode is generated based on the game ball entering the second operation port 34.

  A restriction nail 312 is provided on the upstream side of the emergency gate 311 such that the probability of entering the gaming ball to the emergency gate 311 is lower than the probability of entering the gaming ball to the through gate 35 in the open / close execution mode. ing. This makes it possible to reduce the probability that the open / close execution mode will be generated based on the game ball entering the emergency gate 311 in a situation other than the open / close execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the occurrence of the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the entry of the gaming ball to the emergency gate 311 in a situation other than the open / close execution mode.

  In addition, a restriction nail 312 is provided such that the ball entry probability of the game ball to the sudden gate 311 is lower than the ball entry probability of the game ball to the first operation opening 33. From this point as well, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the occurrence of the transition to the opening / closing execution mode based on the ball entry of the gaming ball to the sudden generation gate 311 in a situation other than the opening / closing execution mode.

  When the second operation port 34 is opened by entering the game ball to the sudden generation gate 311 and acquiring the hold information on the side of the general drawing, the special notification image 317 corresponding thereto is the symbol display device Displayed at 41. As a result, the game ball enters the second operation port 34 without being aware of it even though the second operation port 34 is opened, due to the game ball entering the burst gate 311. It becomes possible to make it hard to generate an event that the ball opportunity is lost.

  In the open / close execution mode, since the game ball can enter the through gate 35, there is a high possibility that the player is conscious that the second operation port 34 will be in the open state, but in the open / close execution mode Under no circumstances, since the game ball does not enter the through gate 35, there is a possibility that the player's awareness of the opening of the second operation port 34 may be low. In this case, the special notification image 317 is displayed when the game ball enters the emergency gate 311 in the open / close execution mode and the holding information on the side of the general drawing is acquired, so the second in the situation It is possible to make the player conscious of the fact that the operation port 34 is in the open state. In addition, the special notification image 317 is not displayed in the opening / closing execution mode where there is a high possibility that the player is conscious that the second operation opening 34 is in the open state, thereby displaying the special notification image 317. It is possible for the player not to be bothersome.

  A special notification image 317 is displayed in the case where the hold information on the general drawing side is acquired based on the ball entry of the gaming ball to the emergency gate 311 in the situation where the general drawing side holding information is not acquired. As a result, the special notification image 317 can be displayed in a situation where the player is not conscious of the second operation port 34 being in the open state.

  In the area where the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 or the flowed down game ball can enter, the special power winning device 32, the through gate 35, and the emergency gate 311 are provided. As a result, it becomes possible to aim for winning on the special electric winning device 32, the through gate 35 and the sudden gate 311 in the same manner of the firing operation.

  It is easier for the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to reach the position of the second operation opening 34 than the game balls flowing down the left area PA2. As a result, when the second operation port 34 is opened in a state other than the open / close execution mode, the game ball is released to the second operation port 34 by performing a game ball emission operation to flow down the right area PA3. It becomes possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the ball.

<Another form of the eighteenth embodiment>
The combination of the special power winning device 32 and the through gate 35, and the sudden generation gate 311 may be set to a positional relationship in which it is not possible to aim for the other prize if aiming for one prize. For example, the combination of the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35 may be provided in the left side area PA2 and the sudden gate 311 may be provided in the right side area PA3, or the combination of the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35 May be provided in the right side area PA3 and the sudden gate 311 may be provided in the left side area PA2.

  The common electric power open lottery process is executed on the stock information on the common drawing side as in the first embodiment, and when the common electric power open state is won, the common electric power open state is established and the second operation port 34 is open. It may be configured to be in the state. In this case, even if the game ball enters the emergency gate 311, a situation may occur in which the second operation opening 34 is not in the open state. In the configuration, the information on the computer side obtained based on the game ball entering the through gate 35 and the information on the computer side obtained based on the game ball entering the emergency gate 311 In the former and the latter, the probability of becoming a common power open status winning in the common power open lottery process may be different.

  For example, the holding information on the side of the drawing-out obtained based on the game ball entering the gate 311 for bursting is more common than the holding information on the side of the drawing obtained based on the game ball entering the through gate 35 The configuration may be such that it is easy for the user to be in the general electric power open state by the electric power open lottery process. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the game ball entering the emergency gate 311.

  On the other hand, the reservation information on the side of the spread map acquired based on the game ball entering the burst gate 311 is more than the reservation information on the side of the spread image acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35 It is good also as composition which is hard to become a state where a general public open state is won by a general public open lottery process. In this case, since the probability of the game ball entering the emergency gate 311 becoming a common electric power release state decreases, the probability of entering the game ball into the emergency gate 311 may not be lowered.

  -The block diagram side's hold information obtained based on the game ball entering the through gate 35 and the game station's hold information obtained based on the game ball entering the sudden gate 311 are divided. Besides being handled separately, one of the pending information is not subjected to the public power open lottery process, and the second operation port 34 is put into the normal power open state, and the other is the public power open state elected by the public power open lottery process. As a result, the second operation port 34 may be in a state in which the common charge is released. For example, with regard to the holding information on the computer-program-side side acquired based on the game ball entering the sudden-use gate 311, the second operation port 34 is put into the state of computer-programmable release without executing the program control lottery process. The second operating port 34 is released by the common power release status winning in the normal power release lottery processing for the stock information on the common position side acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35 It may be configured to be in the state. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the game ball entering the emergency gate 311.

  ・ The entering probability of the emergency gate 311 is the entering probability of the general winning opening 31, the entering probability of the special electric winning device 32 in the open state, the entering probability of the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34 Ball entry probability and the entry probability to the through gate 35 in the open / close execution mode is not limited to a configuration lower than, for example, a configuration in which the entry probability of the sudden gate 311 is higher than the general winning opening 31 It may be In addition, the emergency gate 311 may have a higher probability of entering the ball than the first operation opening 33.

  In place of the emergency gate 311, an emergency second operation port may be provided. In this case, by not providing the opening / closing member for preventing or allowing the game ball to enter the second operating opening for sudden operation in the second operating opening for emergency, the game for the second operating opening for emergency The ball entry probability does not change according to the game state, and when the game ball enters the second operation port for sudden occurrence, the same as when the game ball enters the second operation port 34 The second hold information is to be acquired. This makes it possible to generate a situation where the open / close execution mode is suddenly generated with the game ball entering the second operation port for sudden occurrence as a trigger.

  In addition, the average variation display period of the game round triggered by the second hold information acquired based on the game ball entering the second operation opening for sudden occurrence in the configuration, the game ball to the second operation opening 34 It may be configured to be shorter than the average fluctuation display period of the game times triggered by the second hold information acquired based on having entered the ball. As a result, it becomes possible to shorten the time required for the opening / closing execution mode to be started after the game ball enters the sudden second operation port.

The Nineteenth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, a special power winning device 321 is provided in place of the special power winning device 32. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 95 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  In the right side area PA3 of the game area PA, a special power winning device 321 is provided instead of the special power winning device 32. The special power winning device 321 is provided across the entire horizontal direction at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the right side area PA3. Therefore, the gaming ball flowing down the right side area PA3 will surely pass through the area provided with the special power winning device 321. In addition, a through gate 35 is provided below the special electric award winning device 321 in the right side area PA3 and near the variable display unit 36.

  The configuration of the special power winning device 321 will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b). 96 (a) and 96 (b) are cross-sectional views taken along line AA of FIG.

  A large winning opening 322 is formed in the game board 24 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the big winning opening 322 is formed is a position closer to the variable display unit 36 in the right side area PA3. A special power winning device 321 is provided to prevent or allow the game ball to enter the big winning opening 322. The special power winning device 321 is provided with a guiding plate 323 provided so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction at a position below the big winning opening 322. The guide plate 323 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction by being driven by a drive unit (not shown), and a blocking position where the amount of protrusion of the pachinko machine 10 from the front side of the game board 24 is minimum The pachinko machine 10 is moved to a position where it is slid forward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the blocking position, and the guidance position where the amount of projection of the pachinko machine 10 from the front side of the game board 24 to the front is maximum.

  A ball receiving portion 324 is provided above the right end of the induction plate 323 in the game board 24 and further flows from the upper area PA1 to the right area PA3 above the special power prize device 321 in the right area PA3. A guiding nail group 241 is provided to guide all the balls to the ball receiving portion 324 (see FIG. 95). The guide nail group 241 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b so as to be inclined downward in the right direction. The gaming balls having flowed into the right side area PA3 are all guided to the ball receiving portion 324 by the guiding nail group 241. The distance dimension between the front end of the ball receiving portion 324 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. Further, the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 is inclined downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the gaming ball having reached the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 will flow downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by its own weight.

  When the guide plate 323 is disposed in the blocking position, as shown in FIG. 96 (a), the distance dimension between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is larger than the diameter of the gaming ball and Become. And in this blocking position, the front end of the guiding plate 323 is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the ball receiving portion 324. Therefore, the gaming ball which has reached the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 in the situation where the guiding plate 323 is disposed at the blocking position basically lowers the ball receiving portion 324 through the space between the ball receiving portion 324 and the window panel 52 Will fall into Further, the dimension of the guide plate 323 disposed at the blocking position and projecting forward from the surface of the game board 24 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, even if the game ball induced by the induction nail group 241 bounces on the ball receiving portion 324 and goes to the side of the induction plate 323 disposed at the blocking position, the induction plate 323 and the window are not mounted on the induction plate 323 It will fall below the guide plate 323 through the space between the panel 52 and it. With the above configuration, when the induction plate 323 is disposed at the blocking position, the occurrence of winning on the big winning opening 322 is blocked. Further, as described above, the through gate 35 is provided at a position close to the variable display unit 36, and the position is to the left with respect to the ball receiving portion 324 so that the game ball bounced in the ball receiving portion 324 is difficult to reach. It is in a separated position. Therefore, when the guide plate 323 is disposed at the blocking position, the occurrence of winning on the through gate 35 is also blocked.

  When the induction plate 323 is disposed at the induction position, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), the distance between the front end of the induction plate 323 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball and Become. In this guiding position, the front end of the guiding plate 323 is present on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the front end of the ball receiving portion 324. Therefore, the gaming ball which has reached the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 in the situation where the guiding plate 323 is disposed at the guiding position is on the upper surface of the area projecting to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 in the guiding plate 323 rather than the board of the game board 24 It will be put on.

  On the upper surface of the projecting area 325 protruding to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24 when disposed at the induction position in the induction plate 323, two partition walls 326 and 327 Is provided. The first partition wall 326 present on the right side among the partition walls 326 and 327 extends from the front end of the guide plate 323 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and the guide plate 323 is disposed at the guide position In the above situation, the rear end of the first partition wall 326 and the surface of the game board 24 are separated by a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second partition wall 327 present on the left side extends from the board surface of the game board 24 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where the induction plate 323 is disposed at the induction position. However, the front end of the second partition wall 327 is present on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 by a size larger than the diameter of the gaming ball than the front end of the induction plate 323. As described above, in the configuration in which the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 are formed, the upper surface of the projecting region 325 is generally inclined downward to the left. Further, the upper surface of the projecting region 325 is inclined leftward to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 to the left of the ball receiving portion 324 and to the position of the first partition wall 326, from the position of the first partition wall 326 to the second The position of the dividing wall 327 is inclined downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the position of the second dividing wall 327 to the position of the large winning opening 322 is inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. That is, in the situation where the upper surface of the projection area 325 is placed at the induction position, the gaming block placed on the upper surface of the projection area 325 flows downward to the left while the first partition wall 326 and the game board It is inclined so as to flow downward while meandering in the back and forth direction so as to pass through the space between the plate 24 and the space between the second partition wall 327 and the front end of the guide plate 323.

  Since the distance between the front end of the induction plate 323 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the gaming ball in the situation where the induction plate 323 is disposed at the induction position, the induction plate 323 is at the induction position. It is blocked by the window panel 52 that the gaming ball resting on the upper surface of the projecting area 325 falls from the front end of the guiding plate 323 to the lower side of the guiding plate 323 in the arranged situation. The left end of the induction plate 323 faces the center frame 36a of the variable display unit 36 at a position close to the center frame 36a, and the distance between the left end of the induction plate 323 and the center frame 36a is the radius of the game ball It is less than. Therefore, in the situation where the induction plate 323 is disposed at the induction position, the gaming ball resting on the upper surface of the projecting region 325 may drop from the left end of the induction plate 323 to the lower side of the induction plate 323 It is blocked by the frame 36a.

  With the above configuration, when the guiding plate 323 is disposed at the guiding position, the gaming ball runs a prize by the gaming ball flowing down the projecting region 325 by its own weight along the meandering passage on the projecting region 325 It will enter the mouth 322. The game ball that has won the special winning opening 322 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the special winning opening 322. The detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies the presence or absence of a winning on the special winning opening 322 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the round game or the small hit result in which the large winning opening 322 is targeted for opening, when it is specified that one gaming ball has entered the large winning opening 322, the main The value of the winning counter on the side RAM 65 is decremented by one. When the value of the winning counter becomes "0", it determines that the winning has occurred for the upper limit number of winning as in the first embodiment, and the open / close execution mode triggered by the round game or the small hitting result End.

  In the situation where the game ball is placed on the induction plate 323 placed at the induction position, when the game ball entering the winning upper limit number of eyes is generated in the large winning opening 322, the induction plate 323 with the game ball on Move from the guiding position to the blocking position. In this case, the gaming ball placed on the induction plate 323 follows the movement of the induction plate 323 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 and moves toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 to hit the board of the game board 24 from the front. As a result, the further backward movement is prevented, and finally, the guide plate 323 loses its support from below and falls downward.

  As described above, the through gate 35 is provided below the special electric power winning device 321, but the position of the through gate 35 is in the horizontal positional relationship with the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 of the induction plate 323. The same position as the area between In addition, the gaming ball, which was on the inter-zone region Y between the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 of the induction plate 323, is allowed between the special electric potential winning device 321 and the through gate 35 A regulation nail group 242 for guiding the falling gaming ball toward the through gate 35 is provided to win the through gate 35 when falling along with the movement from the position to the blocking position (see FIG. 95). . Thus, when the guiding plate 323 moves from the allowable position to the blocking position in a situation where the gaming ball is in the inter-zone area Y, a winning on the through gate 35 occurs. Incidentally, the inter-zone area Y is spaced apart from the ball receiving portion 324 to the left by a size larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, more specifically, by a size larger than three times the diameter of the gaming ball. Therefore, it is prevented that the game ball which reached ball receiving part 324 in the situation where guidance board 323 is arranged at blocking position will be won by through gate 35.

  The game ball that has won the through gate 35 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the through gate 35. The detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies the presence or absence of a winning on the through gate 35 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, when it is specified that one gaming ball has entered the through gate 35, the common charge random number counter is provided on the condition that the hold information on the common drawing side of the upper limit number is not stored in the common drawing hold area 65c. The numerical value information of C4 is stored in the common drawing reservation area 65c as holding information of the common drawing side.

  Here, when the gaming ball is fired at the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds) by the same firing mode in which the gaming ball is allowed to flow down the right area PA3, the guiding plate 323 is at the guiding position The inter-zone area Y is such that there is a high possibility that the game ball in the next firing order is present in the inter-zone area Y with respect to the gaming ball having entered the large winning opening 322 in the situation of being arranged in The position of is set. Thus, when the game ball is placed on the large winning opening 322 in the situation where the gaming ball is placed on the guiding plate 323 disposed at the guiding position, if the game ball entering the winning upper limit number of balls is generated, it is placed on the guiding plate 323 It becomes easy for the game ball to win the through gate 35.

  In addition, a meandering passage not only extending in the lateral direction but also meandering in the front-back direction is formed in the projecting region 325 of the induction plate 323, and in this meandering passage, the inter-zone region Y is located on the upstream side of the big winning opening 322. It is set. Thus, it is possible to set the inter-zone area Y that facilitates the occurrence of winning on the through gate 35 while suppressing the increase in the dimension of the induction plate 323 in the lateral direction.

<Another form of the nineteenth embodiment>
-Both the combination of the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35 in the first embodiment and the combination of the special electric winning device 321 and the through gate 35 in the nineteenth embodiment are provided, and the execution trigger of the open / close execution mode The type of the special power winning device 32, 321 to be subjected to the opening / closing control may be changed according to the type of the game result which has become. In this case, if the special power winning device 321 in the nineteenth embodiment is the execution target of the opening / closing control, it is more to the through gate 35 than the special electric winning device 32 in the first embodiment is the execution target of the opening / closing control The player is expected to be the target of execution of the open / close control in the special power pay device 321 in the nineteenth embodiment.

Other Embodiments
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) In each of the above embodiments, all of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 are storage targets of history information (or ball entry history). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 is an object for storing history information. It may be configured as For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, and the second operation opening 34 may be configured to store history information, and only the general winning opening 31 may be configured to store history information. It is good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball in a predetermined period for the ball entry unit for which history information is to be stored.

  (2) In the above embodiments, the information corresponding to the ball entry result of the game ball is transmitted corresponding to each of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. Signal paths 118a to 118c for setting are set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and information corresponding to the ball entry results for the same type of ball entry unit is the same type of ball entry unit There may be a plurality of the ball-in-hole detecting sensors according to the present invention, and the plurality of ball-in-hole detecting sensors may be transmitted as one type of information. As a result, the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 can be reduced.

  (3) In the first embodiment, the main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122 a to 122 o to the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence relationship information may be stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, since it is not necessary to execute the process for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, the processing load of the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  (4) In the first embodiment, the main CPU 63 transmits from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o. However, the configuration is performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 can be bi-directionally communicated, and the management IC 66 responds The correspondence relationship information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when the signal requesting the transmission of the relation information is received. In this case, the correspondence relationship memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main CPU 63. Even when the supply of the operating power is stopped, the correspondence relationship memory 116 stores and holds the same. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of transmitting the correspondence information.

  (5) In the first embodiment, the main CPU 63 transmits to the management IC 66 correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o. However, although the configuration is performed using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information on detection results of the respective ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information is mainly used. A configuration may be provided in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is received from the main CPU 63 by the types of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

  (6) In the first embodiment and the like, while the information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, the information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63, but is limited to this Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notification means as in the eleventh embodiment so that notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. The main CPU 63 transmits a command corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the voice emission control device 81, so that the contents of the various parameters are displayed using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker 54 and the symbol display device 41. The corresponding notification may be executed.

  (7) When supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculation is performed. The contents of various parameters may be notified using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the symbol display device 41, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball entry mode of the game balls in the game area PA on the business day immediately before the start of the business of the game hall was normal.

  (8) If the various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 can not start the game until the prohibition release operation is performed. It may be For example, the configuration may be such that the game ball may not be launched, or may be configured such that each ball detection sensor 42a to 49a is disabled, and the first operation opening Even if a winning is generated in the 33 or the second operation port 34, the success or failure determination process may not be executed. In addition, as the prohibition release operation, the power of the pachinko machine 10 may be turned on again while the RAM erase switch is turned ON, and the operation can be performed when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11 It is good also as operation of the operation means which becomes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being performed as it is in a situation where the ball entry mode of the game balls of the game area PA is an abnormal mode.

  (9) Although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, the calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed in either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 May not be executed. In this case, the history information is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and the operator of the reading operation performs calculation of various parameters using the read history information. The configuration may be such that calculation of various parameters using the read history information is executed in the reading device. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced.

  (10) The main CPU 63 may have a configuration in which the management IC 66 is not provided and the function to execute storage processing of history information and the function to calculate various parameters in each of the above embodiments may be provided. The CPU 92 may have a configuration, or the sound emission control device 81 may have a configuration. When the payout side CPU 92 or the sound emission control device 81 has these functions, the information of the detection result of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control entity having the function. It will be.

  (11) The management IC 66 is provided with a power supply different from that of the main CPU 63, and even if the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters using history information. Or, it may be configured to be able to output information of history information or various parameters. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to read history information and various parameters by the reading device.

  (12) Although the reading terminal 102 used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters by the reading device, the present invention is limited thereto. Alternatively, a terminal used to read history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, terminals used to read history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62 or may be provided in a position different from the MPU 62 in the main control board 61.

  (13) The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 in the above embodiments are provided as a non-volatile storage unit such as a flash memory. One of 116, 117, and 131 is provided as a volatile storage unit that requires supply of power to store and hold information, and backup power is supplied to the memory to operate power to the main CPU 63. The information may be stored and held even if the supply of the information is stopped. In this case, a backup power device dedicated to the memory may be provided, and the backup power may be supplied to the memory from the power / fire control device 78 supplying the backup power to the main RAM 65. It is also good.

  (14) The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which various parameters are calculated using history information, and the game ball does not store and hold the history information, and the game ball can be used in any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. The various parameters may be calculated and updated each time a new detection is performed. In this case, although the calculation frequency of various parameters increases, it becomes possible to extract various parameters at an arbitrary timing.

  (15) There is no limitation to the configuration in which the management IC 66 includes the management CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU and executes storage processing of history information and arithmetic processing of various parameters based on programs and data stored in the management ROM 113 Alternatively, a hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, in the case of the first embodiment, for example, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that the game ball has been detected by the detection sensor 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63, specifically, in the case of the first embodiment. The correspondence relationship information corresponding to the buffer having received the signal is stored from the correspondence relationship memory 116 in the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that point is stored in the history memory 117. Do. In the ninth embodiment, for example, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that the game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by one. Further, when the operation trigger in the first embodiment or the like occurs, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that time. In addition, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters that are calculation results and externally outputs history information.

  (16) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the information of the detection results of the ball entering detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as history information, the configuration that the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs is stored as history information The transition timing to the opening / closing execution mode and the end timing may be stored as history information, or the transition to the high frequency support mode may be stored as history information, or a predetermined abnormality may be stored. It may be configured to be stored as history information that an event has occurred. Further, the transition probability to the open / close execution mode may be calculated by using the history information as described above, or the transition probability to the high frequency support mode may be calculated. The frequency of occurrence may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by the reading device.

  (17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate substrates, or may be provided as separate control devices.

  (18) In the first embodiment and the like, while the number of balls entered into the out slot 24a is measured, the number of balls entered is measured, while the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and The history information including the RTC information may be stored with regard to the payout of the game ball such as the second operation opening 34 and the entering of the bonus trigger into the winning portion as a trigger of the determination processing. Thereby, while making it possible to extract the ball game history of the game ball to the bonus opportunity ball entering unit, it is possible to calculate the ball entering frequency of the game ball to each bonus opportunity ball entering unit with respect to the total discharged number of game balls Become.

  (19) A configuration may be adopted in which objects other than those in the above embodiments are included as targets to be left as history information. For example, the tank 75 may be configured to store at least one of the fact that the lower tray 56a is full, the timing when the full condition was started, and the timing when the full condition was canceled, as history information. The payout device 76 may be in an abnormal state in which at least one of the non-ball state, the timing when the non-ball state is started, and the timing when the non-ball state is released may be stored as history information. Alternatively, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is canceled may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

  (20) In the first embodiment and the like described above, the configuration in which the sixteenth buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I / F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the sixteenth buffer 122 p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by the type identification command being transmitted from the main CPU 63 It is good also as composition. In this case, it is not necessary to set in advance in the management IC 66 the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p.

  (21) The number of ball entry to the predetermined ball entry portion generated in a state where the front door frame 14 is in the open state is stored as history information, and the number of ball entry determined using the history information May be externally output to the reader. This makes it possible to grasp the number of gaming balls that have entered a predetermined ball entry portion in a state in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and to grasp the presence or absence of fraud or the like. In addition, the number of ball entry into the predetermined ball entry portion generated in a state where the front door frame 14 is in the open state is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the calculated number of ball entry is an abnormal number In this case, an alarm may be issued. Thereby, it becomes possible to open the front door frame 14 illegitimately and to cope with the injustice which makes a predetermined ball entry part enter a game ball.

  (22) The management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

  (23) In the first embodiment and the like, the order of executing the confirmation process of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o in the management side CPU 112 may be reversed to that in the first embodiment and the like. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the process of changing the output state of each signal coincides with the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the process of checking the buffers 122a to 122o.

  (24) When the information stored in the main ROM 64 is externally output using the reading terminal 102, one of the program and data may be selectively output to the outside, and the predetermined program may be used. It may be possible to output only the signal. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reader. In addition, as a configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside, the main CPU 63 selects information to be externally output from selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and externally outputs the selected information. Is considered.

  (25) The separate information to be externally output through the reading terminal 102 for outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 to the outside is not limited to the history information and various parameters, for example, when an abnormality occurs. Alternatively, the history information of the abnormality occurrence may be stored, and the stored history information may be externally output through the reading terminal 102.

  (26) Detection sensors 42a to 48a are individually provided for each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a are provided. Although the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA is grasped by totaling the number of gaming balls detected, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, all of the discharging from the gaming area PA It is good also as composition provided with an ejection detection sensor which detects a game ball which passes through the passage field concerned while providing a passage field where each game ball passes. In this case, it is possible to grasp the total number of gaming balls discharged from the game area PA by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor. Moreover, in the said structure, it is a detection sensor for detecting the number of ball entry of each game ball of the general winning a prize opening 31, the special power prize winning device 32, the 1st operation opening 33, and the 2nd operation opening 34 similarly to said each embodiment. By providing 42a to 47a, it becomes possible to calculate the ratio of the number of gaming balls entered in each ball entry to the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA.

  (27) In the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is not provided on the downstream side of the special electric power winning device 32, but an operation port is provided as an acquisition trigger for holding information on the special view side. It is also good. For example, there is provided an operation opening which is an operation opening provided with a member for which the common utility product 34a is defective and is not provided with a member for directly blocking or allowing the ball to enter the game ball The configuration may be In this case, the acquisition trigger of the second hold information is generated by opening and closing the special power prize device 32 in the open / close execution mode. Further, in the configuration, the opening / closing execution mode is surely generated when the second hold information is a target of the determination of the success or failure, whereby the game ball enters the operation opening in the opening / closing execution mode. Will surely generate the open / close execution mode. Thereby, the importance of the game ball entering the operation opening in the open / close execution mode is enhanced. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (28) In the first embodiment, by providing the through gate 35 on the downstream side of the special electric winning device 32, when the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed, it is possible to enter the gaming ball into the through gate 35 However, the configuration for providing the ball entry portion that enables the game ball to enter in the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to this. For example, the special electric power opening and closing member of the special electric potential prize winning device 32 is configured as the common electric utility 34a of the second operation opening 34, and the special electric power opening and closing member is arranged from the closed position to the open position It is possible for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry portion by pressing the ball entry / closing member of the predetermined ball entry portion and moving the ball entry / closing member from the closed position to the open position. It is also good. In this case, when the electric power switching member returns from the open position to the closing position, the pressing of the ball entrance opening / closing member by the electric power switching member is released and the ball entrance opening member returns from the open position to the closing position. . Even with this configuration, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion in the opening / closing execution mode.

  (29) Even if the special power prize device 32 is not opened or closed, the gaming ball can reach the position where the gaming ball can reach, and the special electric potential winning device 32 is aimed at the firing operation. The through gate 35 may be provided at the position, and a motorized open / close member may be provided to prevent or allow the game ball to enter the through gate 35. Then, when the open / close execution mode is started, the motorized open / close member blocks the entry of the gaming ball to the through gate 35 at a predetermined cycle, and the entry position of the game ball to the through gate 35 To move to and from the allowable position. Even in this configuration, the game ball can enter the through gate 35 in the open / close execution mode. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (30) In the first embodiment, when the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the information on the computer side is acquired, the general operation open state of the second operation port 34 is surely generated. It may be Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (31) In the first embodiment, the game ball placed on the induction plate 214 is configured to be able to enter the through gate 35 when the special power prize device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state, but The configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the game ball on the induction plate 214 can enter the through gate 35 when the special electric winning device 32 switches from the closed state to the open state. That is, even if the special power winning device 32 is in the closed state, the game ball can be placed on the guiding plate portion 214 although the special power winning device 32 is not able to win even if the special power winning device 32 is closed. The game ball can be dropped toward the through gate 35 when the special power prize device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state in a situation where the game ball is placed on the game ball. In this case, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball is placed on the induction plate portion 214 in a state where the special power prize device 32 is in the closed state, and the special power prize device 32 is in the closed state. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the winning device 32. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (32) The game ball placed on the induction plate portion 214 can enter the through gate 35 when the special electric potential prize device 32 switches from the closed state to the open state, and the special electric potential prize device 32 is closed from the open state The game ball placed on the induction plate portion 214 may be able to enter the through gate 35 when switching to the above. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to each of the start timing and the end timing of the opening time of the special power winning device 32. In addition, it becomes possible to generate many opportunities for the game ball to enter the through gate 35. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (33) In the first embodiment, when special power winning device 32 is in the open state, the configuration is such that gaming balls flowing down right side area PA3 are surely prevented from flowing downstream of special power winning device 32 It may be For example, like the induction plates 271 and 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, the opening and closing member 202 has a plate shape having no opening 213, and when the opening and closing member 202 is disposed at the closed position, the game board is In the state of being sunk behind the board of 24 and being arranged in the open position, the opening and closing member 202 may be present between the board of the game board 24 and the window panel 52. As a result, except for the game ball placed on the opening / closing member 202 at the timing when the special power prize device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state, when the special power prize device 32 is in the open state, it flows down the right area PA3. The game ball to be played will surely win the special power winning device 32. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (34) In the first embodiment, when the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the power is released, the second operation port 34 is opened by electric operation. For example, when the game ball enters the through gate 35, the second operation port 34 is opened by mechanically interlocking using the pressing force of the entered game ball. The second operating port 34 is returned to the closed state by mechanically interlocking using the pressing force of the game ball by one or two game balls entering the second operating port 34 It may be Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (35) In the first embodiment, the gaming ball having entered the through gate 35 is configured to continue the flow of the gaming area PA thereafter, but the invention is not limited thereto. The game ball may be discharged from the game area PA by being derived to the back side of the game board 24. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (36) The configuration of the special power winning device 32 of the first embodiment and the configuration of the special power winning devices 261 and 262 of the fifteenth embodiment are applied to the second operation opening 34, and the second operation opening It is good also as composition provided with a predetermined ball entering part in a position which can enter a ball only when 34 is opened and closed. In this case, the predetermined ball entering part may be a ball entering part in which the payout of the game ball is executed by entering the game ball, and the holding information of the special view side or the hold of the general drawing side by entering the game ball. It may be a ball entry where information is acquired.

  (37) In the open / close execution mode, the general drawing side may not be configured to digest the held information. As a result, the transition to the pressure release state of the second operation port 34 for the acquisition of the hold information on the common drawing side in the open / close execution mode occurs after the end of the open / close execution mode. It becomes possible to aim the player to enter the game ball into the second operation opening 34. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (38) Even in the open / close execution mode, although the saving information of the common drawing side is digested, the fluctuation display of the pattern in the common view display unit 38a started in the open / close execution mode is continued until the open / close execution mode is ended. It is good also as composition. Even in this case, it is possible to cause the player to aim the game ball into the second operation opening 34 after the open / close execution mode. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (39) The configuration may be such that not only the jackpot result and the small hit result but also an outlier result when the second hold information becomes a target of the pass / fail judgment processing. In addition, even when the first hold information is a target of the pass / fail determination process, a small hit result may be obtained.

  (40) A plurality of types of support modes may be set such that the modes of support by the commercial power products 34a differ from one another. In detail, in the support mode, when compared with the situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner in the game area PA, the commercial battery 34a of the second operation opening 34 is opened per unit time. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set such that the frequency of state becoming relatively high and low.

  In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the common power open status in the common power open lottery using the common power random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5), but high In the frequency support mode, the number of times the common power utility piece 34a is released when the common power release state is won is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode, and one open time is set longer. There is. In this case, when the general electric power release state is won in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the general power utility item 34a occurs a plurality of times, it is from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set to be shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the securing time minimumly secured in performing the next public power release lottery after the first public power release lottery is performed rather than the low frequency support mode One display continuation time in the display unit 38a is set to be short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the first operation port 33 is higher than that of the second operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than the first operation port 33. There is a high probability that a winning on the mouth 34 will occur. And, when the winning a prize to the 2nd operation opening 34 occurs, because the payout of the game sphere of specified number is executed, in the high frequency support mode, the game while the player does not decrease the ball very much It can be carried out.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the common power release state occurs per unit time in the high-frequency support mode rather than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described one. It is good also as composition which makes high the probability of being in a state where the general public is released. In addition, a securement time (for example, based on winning on the through gate 35) is performed in the generalization display portion 38a, which is secured when the next general public open lottery is performed after one public open public lottery is performed. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that the short securing time is easier to be selected or the average securing time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It is also good. Furthermore, the number of opening times is increased, the opening time is extended, and the securing time secured in performing the next public power release lottery after the one public power opening lottery is performed, the securing time to be related, The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among the shortening of the average time of and the increase of the winning probability.

  (41) When special power winning device 32 is in the open state, it is possible to enter the game ball to special power winning device 32, and when special power winning device 32 is in the closed state, gaming ball to special power winning device 32 It is not limited to the configuration in which entering the ball is not possible, and even if the special power winning device 32 is in the closed state, it is in the open state although it is possible to enter the gaming ball to the special power winning device 32 The configuration may be such that entry of the game ball to the special power prize device 32 is less likely to occur than in the case. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (42) When the second operation port 34 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second operation port 34 and when the second operation port 34 is in the closed state, the second operation port 34 It is not limited to the configuration in which the game ball can not enter the game ball, and even if the second operation port 34 is in the closed state, the game ball can enter the second operation port 34 The configuration may be such that entry of the gaming ball into the second operation opening 34 is less likely to occur than in the open state of certain objects. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

  (43) It is impossible for the player to replenish the gaming ball in the pachinko machine 10, and the gaming ball circulates in the pachinko machine 10, and information on the number of gaming balls usable by the player is stored and held. The configuration of each of the above embodiments may be applied to a configuration in which the game balls can be fired within the range of the information of the number of usable game balls stored and held.

  (44) The display control is performed based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 81 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60 The device 82 may control the sound emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and one function of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated into the main control unit 60, and both functions of both control units may be integrated into the main control unit 60. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

  (45) Other types of pachinko machines and the like different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which a motorized role opens a predetermined number of times when gaming balls enter a specific area of a special device The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a right enters and becomes a jackpot, a pachinko machine equipped with other features, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a ball ball, and the like.

  A non-ball-ball type game machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of kinds of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by the passage of a predetermined time, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported in an openable and closable manner by the outer frame is provided with the storage section and the loading device, and the start lever is operated after the predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated by starting to rotate the reels.

  In the case of applying the present invention to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, for example, history information of a result of lottery processing of a combination executed when starting one game based on operation of a start lever. It is also possible to store as, and use the history information to calculate the actual winning probability of each combination, and when a transition to a special control state such as a bonus game occurs, store it as history information and store that history The information may be used to calculate the actual transition probability to the special control state, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special control state to the total number of digested games may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by the reading device, or a notification corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters may be performed by the gaming machine itself.

  (46) The characteristic configurations of the first to nineteenth embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic of the first embodiment The configuration, the characteristic configuration of the thirteenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the fourteenth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment and the fifteenth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment may be combined with the characteristic configuration of the nineteenth embodiment. Moreover, you may apply the structure of the said another form by arbitrary combinations with respect to the structure which applied the characteristic structure of the said 1st 19 embodiment by a predetermined | prescribed combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Predetermined ball entry means (the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
When the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the specific storage executing means (main side CPU 63 executes the ball entry detection process so that the information corresponding thereto is stored in the specific memory means (main side RAM 65) Function),
A privilege for executing a process for enabling a player to be given a privilege based on the fact that information corresponding to the game ball having entered the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means Giving means (a function of executing the processing of step S217 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of step S408 in the payout CPU 92);
In a gaming machine provided with
When the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage of the information corresponding thereto is the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the memory 117 for history, tenth embodiment) Then, the main RAM 65) is made to be executed, and the predetermined information (the first information that makes it possible to specify the number of balls or the frequency of ball entry to the predetermined ball entry means by the game machine or the device outside the game machine) -Predetermined storage execution means (first method for storing history information in the twelfth embodiment, numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means In the ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function to execute history setting processing in the management side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, step S3202, step S3205, and step S3208 in the main CPU 63. Step S3212, step S3216, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S3220 and step S3223).

  According to the feature A1, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the specific memory means, and when the information is stored in the specific memory means, a privilege is given to the player Be done. As a result, the player plays a game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined entry means. In the configuration, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, storage of the corresponding information is executed to the predetermined storage means, and the number or frequency of ball entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means The predetermined storage means stores predetermined information that makes it possible to specify the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of balls or the frequency of ball entry into the predetermined ball entry means by the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, predetermined It becomes possible to appropriately manage the ball entry mode of the game ball to the ball entry means. Further, the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, so that it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined information does not become an execution trigger of a process for giving a privilege to a player.

  According to the feature A2, the predetermined information does not become an execution trigger of the process for giving the privilege to the player, thereby aiming to appropriately manage the ball entering mode of the game ball to the predetermined ball entering means. It becomes possible to store and hold predetermined information in the form of information.

Feature A3. It has a specific ball entry means (out port 24a, a general winning port 31, a special power winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the gaming area,
When the game ball enters the specified ball entry means, the predetermined memory execution means causes the storage of the corresponding information to be executed by the predetermined memory means, and the game ball is inserted into the specified ball entry means. Specific information which makes it possible to specify the number of balls by means of the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein numerical information being measured is stored in the predetermined storage means.

  According to the feature A3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means, but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to manage not only the management of the entering manner of the gaming balls to the predetermined entering means but also the management of the entering manner of the gaming balls to the specific entering means. In addition, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the frequency of entering the ball between the predetermined ball entering means and the specific ball entering means.

  Feature A4. All the ball entering means that discharges the entered game ball from the game area, including the predetermined ball entering means, becomes the storage target of the information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball entered into the predetermined storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A3 characterized by being a ball entering means.

  According to the feature A4, all the ball entering means for discharging the game balls from the game area is the target of management using the information stored in the predetermined storage means, and the ball entering frequency for any ball entering means Can be managed using information stored in predetermined storage means. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls to be entered into the predetermined ball entry means with respect to the number of game balls discharged from the game area, using the information stored in the predetermined storage means.

  Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to a timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

  According to the feature A5, the predetermined information includes the information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the ball in the predetermined ball entry means, thereby utilizing the predetermined information, the game ball to the predetermined ball entry means It becomes possible to grasp ball entering history in detail.

  Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined information is counting information of the number of gaming balls having entered the predetermined ball entry means.

  According to the feature A6, the predetermined information is the count information of the number of gaming balls having entered the predetermined ball entry means, thereby suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information, and entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means Management of the

  Feature A7. The predetermined storage execution means is a means for storing in the predetermined storage means information enabling specification of whether or not the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means is in a predetermined situation. In the first to seventh embodiments, a function of executing the processing of step S804 and step S809 in the management CPU 112, in the eighth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3004 in the management CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, management The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A6, comprising: a function of executing the process of step S3103 in the side CPU 112).

  According to the feature A7, it is possible to manage whether or not the game ball is entering the predetermined ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the predetermined situation is present.

  Feature A8. Any one of the features A1 to A7 characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

  According to the feature A8, it is possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage unit from the gaming machine and analyze the entering aspect of the gaming ball into the predetermined ball entry unit using the read information.

Feature A9. Program output means (function to execute the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102);
The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the external output unit outputs the information stored in the predetermined storage unit to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit.

  According to the feature A9, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  Feature A10. Means for specifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is any one of the information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program, and outputting information corresponding to the specified result The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that the CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of step S902.

  According to the feature A10, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage unit is externally output using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be the target of the external output is the control program and the predetermined The game machine side identifies which of the information stored in the storage means, and the identified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only necessary information even if the information output unit is also used.

Characteristics A11. First control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, comprising:

  According to the feature A11, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific storage execution means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load of the first control means is extremely increased. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while preventing the user from doing so.

  Feature A12. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

  According to the feature A12, by providing the first control means and the second control means on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means can be realized. It is possible to block.

Feature A13. It has a specific ball entry means (out port 24a, a general winning port 31, a special power winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the gaming area,
When the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the predetermined memory execution means causes the storage of the corresponding information to be executed by the predetermined memory means, whereby the game to the specific ball entry means is performed. Specific information (in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, history information, ninth to ninth, etc.) that enables identification of the number of balls or the frequency of ball entry by means of the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine In the eleventh embodiment, the numerical value information measured at the counter is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means is
When the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first transmission means (of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) transmits the first information to the second control means using the first signal path. Function to output either)
The second transmission means (of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) transmits the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the game ball enters the specified ball entering means Function to output either)
The gaming machine according to feature A11 or A12, comprising:

  According to the feature A13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entering means, but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entering means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to manage not only the management of the entering manner of the gaming balls to the predetermined entering means but also the management of the entering manner of the gaming balls to the specific entering means. In addition, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the frequency of entering the ball between the predetermined ball entering means and the specific ball entering means.

  Also, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry means Second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the second control means can simplify the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information.

  Feature A14. Third transmission means for transmitting identification information for making it possible to specify by the second control means whether or not the first situation is a predetermined situation to the second control means using a third route (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, an open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, a signal The gaming machine according to feature A13, comprising: a function of outputting either a high frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.

  According to the feature A14, it is possible to manage whether the gaming ball is entering the predetermined ball entry means and the entering manner of the gaming ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the predetermined situation is present. In addition, since the identification information for specifying whether or not it is the predetermined situation is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the second control means causes the identification information to be the first information and the second information. It becomes possible to simplify the structure for distinguishing with other information, such as 2 information.

  Feature A15. The first control means corresponds to the second control means with identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entering means. A game machine according to feature A13 or A14, comprising identification information transmission means (function to execute recognition processing in the main CPU 63) to transmit.

  According to the feature A15, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means Therefore, there is no need to store the correspondence of these pieces of information in the second control means in advance. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the second control means.

  Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein the identification information transmission unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit when the supply of operation power to the first control unit is started.

  According to the feature A16, when the supply of the operation power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the predetermined ball entering means and the specific ball entering means In a situation where entering the game ball may occur, it is possible to make it possible to specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the entering means by the second control means. Become.

  Feature A17. The identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, according to feature A15 or A16. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A17, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration relating to communication as compared to FIG.

  Feature A18. When the second control means receives the identification information, it can be specified that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entering means A means for storing correspondence relationship information in the correspondence relationship storage means (the correspondence relationship memory 116) (a function for executing the correspondence relationship setting process in the management side CPU 112), any one of the features A15 to A17 The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A18, the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entering means is stored in the second control means. Thereby, the information which makes it possible to specify the ball entering means corresponding to the information to be transmitted by the second control means is provided to the second control means every time when the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. There is no need to Thus, the amount of information of the first information and the second information can be suppressed.

Features A19. Third transmission means for transmitting, to the second control means, third information for making it possible to specify by the second control means whether or not the first control means is in a predetermined situation. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, an open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, a signal Function to output either a high frequency support mode signal or a door open signal)
The feature A15 is characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information can identify whether the third situation is the predetermined situation without receiving the identification information. To the gaming machine according to any one of A18.

  According to the feature A19, it is possible to manage whether the game ball is entering the predetermined ball entry means and the ball entering mode of the game ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the predetermined situation is present. In addition, it is possible to specify that the third information is information that can specify whether the predetermined situation or not, by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

  Feature A20. The second control means, as a receiving unit capable of receiving information from the first control means, is more than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. A gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, characterized in that a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

  According to the feature A20, the second control means is provided with a number of receiving units, the number of which is larger than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Accordingly, even when the number of types of the information increases or decreases, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration related to the reception unit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A21. A first external output means (management means for outputting information of a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information making it possible to recognize that the information corresponds to the predetermined ball entering means to a device outside the gaming machine Function for executing the process for external output in the side CPU 112),
A second external output unit (management unit for outputting information of a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage unit and information making it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the specific ball entry unit to a device outside the gaming machine (management Function for executing the process for external output in the side CPU 112),
A game machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, comprising:

  According to the feature A21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and using the read information, the ball entering mode of the game ball to the predetermined ball entering means and the game ball to the specific ball entering means It becomes possible to specify the ball landing mode. Moreover, when the said external output is performed, while the information of the combination of the information which makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to a predetermined information and a predetermined ball entering means is outputted outside, it respond | corresponds to a specific information and a specific ball entering means The information of the combination with the information that makes it possible to recognize is output to the outside. Thereby, it is possible to specify each ball entry aspect using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

  Feature A22. Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth, etc.) for calculating mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball in the game area using the predetermined information In the 10th and 12th embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, execute the processing of step S2308, step S2313 and step S2317 in the management side CPU 112 Function, function to execute the processing of step S2502 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, function to execute the processing of step S2702 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and in the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment An eleventh function of executing the process of step S2905; The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A21, characterized in that the facilities embodiment has a function) for executing the process of step S3503 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature A22, the gaming machine calculates mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the gaming ball using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the game machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information .

Feature A23. A means for causing the predetermined storage means to make it possible to specify whether or not the game ball's entering the predetermined ball entering means is in a predetermined situation, in the predetermined memory executing means is the predetermined memory means (first In the seventh embodiment, a function to execute the processing of step S804 and step S809 in the management side CPU 112, a function to execute the processing of step S3004 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, management side in the ninth embodiment Function to execute the processing of step S3103 in the CPU 112),
The information computing means is means for computing the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the ball entry to the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined situation (first, second, In the sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, step S2308 in the management side CPU 112, Function to execute the processing of step S2313 and step S2317, function to execute the processing of step S2502 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, function to execute the processing of step S2702 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, In the seventh embodiment, step S2905 in the management CPU 112 Ability to run the process, the gaming machine according to the features A22 in the eleventh embodiment which is characterized in that a function) for executing the process of step S3503 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature A23, it is possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the ball entering mode of the gaming ball by discriminating whether or not it is a predetermined situation.

  Feature A24. A unit (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit when the aspect information is calculated by the information operation unit) In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112, and the function of executing the process of step S2505 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment are provided. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A24, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, so that it is difficult to generate an event that the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is exceeded by the predetermined information. It is possible to

  Feature A25. Even if the aspect information is computed by the information computing means, the condition that the predetermined information used when computing the aspect information is stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained. Or the gaming machine described in A23.

  According to the feature A25, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, thereby reading the aspect information and entering the game ball When analyzing an aspect, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to predetermined information on which the calculation of the aspect information is based.

  Feature A26. The information calculating means is configured to stop supplying the operating power to the control means having the specific storage executing means, or to start supplying the operating power to the control means having the specific storage executing means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A22 to A25, which calculates the aspect information.

  According to the feature A26, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operation power to the control means is stopped or the supply of the operation power to the control means is stopped, the mode information is calculated in each business day unit. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature A27. The information processing means calculates the aspect information when an operation trigger that can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of A26.

  According to the feature A27, the mode information is calculated each time the operation trigger which is repeatedly generated in the situation where the operation power is supplied to the control means, so that the mode information is finely managed within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature A28. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period,
The period measurement means stops measurement of a period in a situation where a game is not executed, and restarts measurement of the period from a state before the suspension when a game is started in a situation where measurement of a period is stopped. A game machine according to any one of features A22 to A27, characterized in that

  According to the feature A28, since the mode information is calculated each time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the operation frequency of the mode information only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped in a situation where the game is not executed, and the measurement of the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop when the game is started. Thereby, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is executed.

  Feature A29. Features A22 to A28 characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A29, it is possible to easily grasp the entering mode of the gaming ball by outputting the mode information to the device outside the gaming machine.

  Characteristics A30. When the said external output means outputs the said aspect information to the apparatus of the said game machine outside, the said predetermined information is output to the apparatus of the said game machine, The game machine of the feature A29 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature A30, when not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, the mode information is read and the ball entering mode of the gaming ball is analyzed, not only the mode information but also the mode information It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the operation of the aspect information.

Characteristics A31. First control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
When the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, the external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in A30.

  According to the feature A31, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the aspect based on the instruction from the first control means Information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature A32. The information calculating means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined operation trigger occurs,
Result storing and executing means (in the third embodiment, step S2310, step S2314 and step S2318 in the management side CPU 112) to sequentially store the mode information computed by the information computing means in the computation result storage means (memory for operation result 131) A game machine according to any one of features A22 to A31, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of (4) and a function of executing the process of step S2504 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature A32, it is possible to accumulate the mode information in the gaming machine. Thereby, when managing the ball entry mode of the game ball, it becomes possible to read out a plurality of mode information collectively.

Feature A33. The result storage execution means is
A unit that determines whether or not the mode information is storage target information (a function of executing the process of step S2503 in the management CPU 112);
A unit (function to execute the processing of step S2504 in the management side CPU 112) for storing the mode information in the operation result storage unit when the mode information is the storage target information;
The gaming machine according to feature A32, comprising:

  According to the feature A33, when the mode information of the operation result corresponds to the storage target information, the mode information is stored in the operation result storage unit. As a result, it becomes possible to limit the aspect information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

  Feature A34. The game according to the feature A32 or A33, wherein the result storage execution means stores information that enables specifying the time when the mode information is calculated, in the operation result storage means, with information associated with the mode information. Machine.

  According to the feature A34, information for specifying the time when the mode information is calculated is attached to the mode information. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of mode information while grasping the time when each piece of mode information is calculated.

Feature A35. First control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
The information processing unit according to any one of the features A22 to A34, wherein the information processing unit calculates the aspect information when the second control unit receives the operation trigger information transmitted from the first control unit. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature A35, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the aspect based on the instruction from the first control means Information can be calculated by the second control means.

  Feature A36. Notification control means (function to execute the processing of step S3505, step S3507 and step S3508 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (light emission unit 151 for notification) to notify the content corresponding to the mode information A game machine according to any one of features A22 to A35, characterized in that:

  According to the feature A36, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thus, it becomes possible for the game hall manager or the like to grasp the management result of the entering mode of the game ball without reading the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature A37. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is accommodated in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature A36, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

  According to the feature A37, it is possible to make it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature A38. First control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means comprises the information calculation means and the notification control means.

  According to the feature A38, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result It is possible to integrate the function for causing the notification corresponding to the above to be executed to the first control means.

  Features A39. The notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the aspect information is information in a first range, and when the aspect information is information in a second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features A36 to A38, characterized in that the notification means is controlled such that a second notification is performed.

  According to the feature A39, the mode information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the mode information is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

  Feature A40. A feature characterized in that the predetermined ball entering means has means for externally outputting the corresponding information corresponding to the game ball entering the ball (a function for executing the process of step S 218 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of A39.

  According to the feature A40, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means in the configuration in which the corresponding information corresponding to the game ball is externally output. In this way, by using the correspondence information, while simply grasping the number of ball entry into the predetermined ball entry means and the ball entry frequency, it is possible to use the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to obtain the predetermined number of balls. It becomes possible to correctly grasp the number of ball entry of the game ball to the ball means and the pitch frequency.

  Feature A41. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature A41, in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as the dedicated circuit, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A41, the feature B1 to B20, the feature C1 to C4, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E7, the feature F1 to F45, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature A1 to A41 Any one or more configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the information corresponding to that is the predetermined storage means (the memory for history 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the main side in the tenth embodiment) The predetermined information (the history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and the numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by the RAM 65). The predetermined storage execution means (the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the main side CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) to be stored in the storage means Step S3202, step S3205, step S3208, step S3212, step S3216, step S3220, and step S3223. To function),
Information operation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments) for calculating aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the predetermined information Then, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S2308, step S2313 and step S2317 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment The function of executing the processing of step S2502 in the management side CPU112, the function of executing the processing of step S2702 in the management side CPU112 in the fifth embodiment, and the processing of step S2905 in the management side CPU112 in the seventh embodiment Function, main side CP in the eleventh embodiment Processing in step S3503 and the ability to perform) in 63,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of corresponding information is executed to the predetermined storage unit, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, management of the occurrence mode of the predetermined event is appropriately performed. It is possible to do Further, the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, so that it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the gaming machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. Thus, for example, the game machine itself can perform processing corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output aspect information which is a result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

Feature B2. Means for causing the predetermined storage execution means to cause the predetermined storage means to be able to specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments) The function of executing the processing of step S804 and step S809 in the management CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S3004 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and the processing of step S3103 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment Function to execute)
The information calculation means is a means for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation (first, second, sixth, eighth, eighth 9, 10 and 12 functions to execute the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management CPU 112, and in the third embodiment the processing of step S2308, step S2313 and step S2317 in the management CPU 112 Function of executing the process of step S2502 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2702 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, management in the seventh embodiment Execute the process of step S2905 in the CPU 112 Function, the gaming machine according to the features B1 in the eleventh embodiment which is characterized in that a function) for executing the process of step S3503 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to calculate aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by distinguishing whether or not the predetermined situation is present.

  Feature B3. A unit (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit when the aspect information is calculated by the information operation unit) In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112, and the function of executing the process of step S2505 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment are provided. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B3, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult to generate an event that the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is exceeded by the predetermined information. It is possible to

  Feature B4. Even if the aspect information is computed by the information computing means, the state where the predetermined information used when computing the aspect information is stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained. Or the game machine as described in B2.

  According to the feature B4, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, thereby reading the aspect information and playing the game for the predetermined period. When analyzing the result of, it becomes possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the mode information.

  Feature B5. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the supply of the operation power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or the supply of the operation power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of B4.

  According to the feature B5, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operation power to the control means is stopped or the supply of the operation power to the control means is started, the mode information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature B6. The information calculating means calculates the aspect information when an operation trigger which can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where the operation power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62), any one of the features B1 to B5 The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature B6, the mode information is calculated each time the operation trigger which is repeatedly generated in the situation where the operation power is supplied to the control means, so that the mode information is finely managed within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature B7. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period,
The period measurement means stops measurement of a period in a situation where a game is not executed, and restarts measurement of the period from a state before the suspension when a game is started in a situation where measurement of a period is stopped. A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that

  According to the feature B7, since the mode information is calculated each time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the mode information only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped in a situation where the game is not executed, and the measurement of the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop when the game is started. Thereby, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is executed.

  Feature B8. Features B1 to B7 characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature B8, it is possible to easily grasp the entering mode of the gaming ball by outputting the mode information to the device outside the gaming machine.

  Feature B9. When the said external output means outputs the said aspect information to the apparatus of the said game machine outside, the said predetermined | prescribed information is output to the apparatus of the said game machine, The game machine of the feature B8 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature B9, when not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, the mode information is read out and the ball entering mode of the gaming ball is analyzed, not only the mode information but also the mode information It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the operation of the aspect information.

Feature B10. First control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
When the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, the external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine, or the feature B8 or The gaming machine described in B9.

  According to the feature B10, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the aspect based on the instruction from the first control means Information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature B11. The information calculating means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined operation trigger occurs,
Result storing and executing means (in the third embodiment, step S2310, step S2314 and step S2318 in the management side CPU 112) to sequentially store the mode information computed by the information computing means in the computation result storage means (memory for operation result 131) The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B10, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of (4) and a function of executing the processing of step S2504 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature B11, it is possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. Thereby, when managing the mode of the game result in a predetermined period, it becomes possible to read out a plurality of mode information collectively.

  Feature B12. The result storage execution means is provided with means for storing the mode information in the operation result storage means when the mode information is storage target information (function to execute the process of step S2504 in the management side CPU 112) The gaming machine according to feature B11, characterized in that

  According to the feature B12, when the mode information of the operation result corresponds to the storage target information, the mode information is stored in the operation result storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to limit the aspect information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

  Feature B13. The game according to the feature B11 or B12, wherein the result storage execution means stores information for specifying the time when the aspect information is calculated, in association with the aspect information, and storing the information in the operation result storage means. Machine.

  According to the feature B13, information for specifying the time when the mode information is calculated is attached to the mode information. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of mode information while grasping the time when each piece of mode information is calculated.

Feature B14. First control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
The information processing means according to any one of the features B1 to B13, wherein the information processing means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives the operation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature B14, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the aspect based on the instruction from the first control means Information can be calculated by the second control means.

  Feature B15. Notification control means (function to execute the processing of step S3505, step S3507 and step S3508 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (light emission unit 151 for notification) to notify the content corresponding to the mode information A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, characterized in that:

  According to the feature B15, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thus, it becomes possible for the game hall manager or the like to grasp the game management result in a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature B16. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is accommodated in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature B15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

  According to the feature B16, it is possible to make it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature B17. A first control unit (main CPU 63) having the information calculation unit and the notification control unit;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature B15 or B16, comprising:

  According to the feature B17, the function of calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means. It is possible to integrate the function for causing the notification corresponding to the above to be executed to the first control means.

  Feature B18. The notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the aspect information is information in a first range, and when the aspect information is information in a second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features B15 to B17, characterized in that the notification means is controlled to execute a second notification.

  According to the feature B18, the mode information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the mode information is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature B19. Predetermined ball entry means (the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
When the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, storage of the information corresponding thereto is the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the history memory 117, the tenth embodiment) In this case, predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by being executed on the main side RAM 65). Means to be stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment The processing of step S3202, step S3205, step S3208, step S3212, step S3216, step S3220 and step S3223 in the main CPU 63 is performed. To function),
Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth, etc.) for calculating mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball in the game area using the predetermined information In the 10th and 12th embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, execute the processing of step S2308, step S2313 and step S2317 in the management side CPU 112 Function, function to execute the processing of step S2502 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, function to execute the processing of step S2702 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and in the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment An eleventh function of executing the process of step S2905; And functions) for executing the process of step S3503 in the main side CPU63 in facilities form,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B19, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, storage processing of the corresponding information is executed to the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of balls or the frequency of ball entry into the predetermined ball entry means by the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, predetermined It becomes possible to appropriately manage the ball entry mode of the game ball to the ball entry means. Further, the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, so that it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, the game machine calculates mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the game machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information .

  Feature B20. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B19, wherein the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature B20, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B20, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Program output means (function of executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102);
Information output means for outputting special information using the information output unit (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, it is possible to externally output the special information by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. This makes it possible to externally output the special information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  Feature C2. Selection means for specifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is either the special information or the control program, and for outputting information corresponding to the specification result (step S902 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of

  According to the feature C2, in the configuration in which the special information is output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be the target of the external output is any of the control program and the special information The game machine side is identified, and the identified information is externally output. This makes it possible to read out only necessary information even if the information output unit is also used.

  Feature C3. The selection means determines which of the special information and the control program the information to be output from the information output unit is based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit. The gaming machine according to the feature C2, which is characterized by specifying.

  According to the feature C3, based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit, it is specified which information the information to be output from the information output unit is. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the selection of the information to be output from becoming complicated.

  Feature C4. A chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output unit and the information output means any one of the features C1 to C3 The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature C4, it is possible to integrate signal paths for the information output unit in the chip. This makes it possible to achieve excellent effects as described above while making it difficult to make unauthorized access to the signal path for the information output unit.

  Note that for the configuration of the features C1 to C4, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A first control unit (main CPU 63) and a second control unit (management CPU 112);
The first control means is
Privilege giving means (a function of executing the processing of step S217 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of step S408 in the payout CPU 92) for giving a privilege to the player when a predetermined event occurs;
Information transmitting means (function for executing management output processing in the main CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event;
Equipped with
When the second control means receives the predetermined event information, the storage of the information corresponding to the predetermined event information is the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the history memory 117, the tenth) In the embodiment, by being executed in the main side RAM 65), predetermined information (first to eighth) which makes it possible to specify the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine. , And 12th embodiment: predetermined storage execution means (first to ninth) for storing history information and numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments in the predetermined storage means In the eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, step S3202, step S3205, and step S3 in the main CPU 63. 08, step S3212, step S3216, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S3220 and step S3223).

  According to the feature D1, when the predetermined event occurs, a bonus is given to the player. As a result, the player plays a game while expecting a predetermined event to occur. In the configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of corresponding information is executed to the predetermined storage means, and the occurrence frequency or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine The predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, management of the occurrence mode of the predetermined event is appropriately performed. It is possible to do Further, the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, so that it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege giving means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load of the first control means does not extremely increase. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to the feature D1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

  According to the feature D2, by providing the first control means and the second control means on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means can be realized. It is possible to block.

Feature D3. When the specific event occurs, the predetermined storage execution means executes the storage process of the information corresponding to that to the predetermined storage means, so that the number or frequency of occurrence of the specific event is outside the gaming machine or the gaming machine. Specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) which can be specified by the apparatus is stored in the predetermined storage means To be
The first control means is
A first transmission unit (a function of outputting one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits the first information to the second control unit using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs )When,
A second transmission unit (a function of outputting one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits second information to the second control unit using the second signal path when the specific event occurs )When,
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, comprising:

  According to the feature D3, not only predetermined information corresponding to a predetermined event but also specific information corresponding to a specific event is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the mode of occurrence of a predetermined event but also the mode of occurrence of a specific event. In addition, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of occurrence frequency between the predetermined event and the specific event.

  In addition, when the predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. It is sent to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the second control means can simplify the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information.

  Feature D4. Third transmission means for transmitting identification information for making it possible to specify by the second control means whether or not the first situation is a predetermined situation to the second control means using a third route (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, an open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, a signal The gaming machine according to the feature D3, further comprising: a function of outputting either a high frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.

  According to the feature D4, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by discriminating whether or not it is the predetermined situation. In addition, since the identification information for specifying whether or not it is the predetermined situation is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the second control means causes the identification information to be the first information and the second information. It becomes possible to simplify the structure for distinguishing with other information, such as 2 information.

  Feature D5. Identification information for transmitting, to the second control means, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event. The gaming machine according to the feature D3 or D4, further comprising transmission means (a function for executing the recognition process in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature D5, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. There is no need to store in advance the correspondence of these pieces of information in the second control means. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the second control means.

  Feature D6. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the identification information transmission unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit when the supply of operation power to the first control unit is started.

  According to the feature D6, when the supply of the operation power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the predetermined event and the specific event may occur. In the situation, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entering means can be specified by the second control means.

  Feature D7. The identification information transmission unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, according to the feature D5 or D6. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration relating to communication as compared to FIG.

  Feature D8. When the second control means receives the identification information, it is possible to specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event. Are provided in the correspondence relationship storage means (the correspondence relationship memory 116) (a function for executing the correspondence relationship setting process in the management side CPU 112) according to any one of the features D5 to D7. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D8, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event is stored in the second control means. Thereby, the information that makes it possible to specify the type of the event corresponding to the information to be transmitted by the second control means is provided to the second control means every time when the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. There is no need to Thus, the amount of information of the first information and the second information can be suppressed.

Feature D9. Third transmission means for transmitting, to the second control means, third information for making it possible to specify by the second control means whether or not the first control means is in a predetermined situation. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, an open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, a signal Function to output either a high frequency support mode signal or a door open signal)
A feature D5 characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information can be specified whether it is the predetermined situation or not, without receiving the identification information To the game machine according to any one of D8.

  According to the feature D9, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by discriminating whether or not it is the predetermined situation. In addition, it is possible to specify that the third information is information that can specify whether the predetermined situation or not, by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

  Feature D10. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature D10, in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D10, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, and the feature group D, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, management of the gaming machine needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. First control means (main CPU 63);
Second control means (management side CPU 112) for receiving the information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means is
A first transmission unit (a function of outputting one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits the first information to the second control unit using the first signal path when the first event occurs )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the second event occurs (function for outputting any of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Identification information transmitting means for transmitting identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means (main side A function of executing recognition processing in the CPU 63),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, when the first event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the second event occurs, the second signal path is used The second information is then sent to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the second control means can simplify the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information.

  Further, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. There is no need to store in advance the correspondence relationship in the second control means. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the second control means.

  Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the identification information transmission unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit when the supply of operating power to the first control unit is started.

  According to the feature E2, when the supply of the operation power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the predetermined ball entering means and the specific ball entering means In a situation where entering the game ball may occur, it is possible to make it possible to specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the entering means by the second control means. Become.

  Feature E3. The identification information transmission unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, according to the feature E1 or E2. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature E3, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, so that a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration relating to communication as compared to FIG.

  Feature E4. When the second control means receives the identification information, it can be specified that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. A means (a function for executing correspondence setting processing in the management side CPU 112) for storing the relation information in the correspondence storage means (the correspondence memory 116) is provided in any one of the features E1 to E3. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature E4, the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entering means is stored in the second control means. Thus, it is necessary to provide the second control means with the information for making it possible to specify the event corresponding to the information to be transmitted by the second control means, from the first control means to the first information or the second information. There is no Thus, the amount of information of the first information and the second information can be suppressed.

Feature E5. Third transmission means for transmitting, to the second control means, third information for making it possible to specify by the second control means whether or not the first control means is in a predetermined situation. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, an open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, a signal Function to output either a high frequency support mode signal or a door open signal)
A feature E1 characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information can be specified whether it is the predetermined situation or not, without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of E4.

  According to the feature E5, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the first event and the occurrence mode of the second event by distinguishing whether or not the predetermined situation is present. In addition, it is possible to specify that the third information is information that can specify whether the predetermined situation or not, by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

  Feature E6. As a signal path capable of transmitting information from the first control means to the second control means, the number of the signal paths which is larger than the number of types of information which needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that a signal path is provided.

  According to the feature E6, since the number of signal paths greater than the number of types of information which needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is provided, Even when the number of types increases or decreases, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration regarding the signal path. Therefore, it is possible to improve the versatility of the second control means.

  Feature E7. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature E7, in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A41, the feature B1 to B20, the feature C1 to C4, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E7, the feature F1 to F45, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature E1 to E7. Any one or more configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the group of features E, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., it is necessary to make the configuration regarding communication suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. It is provided in the game area (game area PA) where the game ball flows down, and it is possible to enter the game ball or the first state where the game ball is easy to enter and the game ball is not allowed to enter the ball or the game ball is hard to enter Variable ball entering means provided so as to be switchable with each of the second states (in the first through fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the special electric symbol winning device 32, in the fifteenth embodiment, the first special electric symbol winning device 261 and the second Special power winning device 262),
Special control means for executing special control to bring the variable ball entry means into the first state and then to the second state (perform opening setting processing for special power and closing setting processing for special power in the main CPU 63 Function),
Transition means (function to execute processing during special figure determination in the main CPU 63) to shift the gaming state to the special control state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed;
Special entering means (first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments) in which the entering of the gaming ball is restricted in the predetermined gaming state which is not the special control state, and the entering of the gaming ball is possible in the special control state In the embodiment, the through gate 35, and the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 in the fourteenth embodiment, and the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264 in the fifteenth embodiment,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature F1, the game state can shift to the special control state and the game ball can enter the variable ball entry means or can easily enter the game ball, but also the game ball to the special ball entry means It is possible to enter the As a result, it is possible to enhance the profit of the transition of the gaming state to the special control state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that the game ball can enter the special ball entry means when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special control state.

  According to the feature F2, even if the gaming state is shifted to the special control state, entering of the gaming ball into the special ball entry means does not occur if the predetermined condition is not satisfied. In this way, the player can expect the predetermined condition to be established separately from the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state It becomes.

  Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein at least one condition necessary for generating the special control state is established based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means.

  According to the feature F3, the occurrence of the special control state enables the game ball to enter the special ball entering means, and the special ball entering the special ball entering means may cause the special control state to occur again. . This makes it possible to create a situation in which the special control state occurs continuously, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F4. The transition means is a means for generating the special control state regardless of the game ball entering the special ball entering means (The result of the determination process of step S1405 on the first hold information in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to the feature F3, characterized in that it has a function to shift to the open / close execution mode.

  According to the feature F4, the special control state may occur even if the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means. And, having the configuration of the above-mentioned feature F3, when the special control state occurs, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means and the special control state is achieved by the game ball entering the special ball entry means It can occur again. In this case, the player expects the special control state to be started in the non-special control state, and expects the special control state to be continuously executed in the special control state. .

Feature F5. It has a predetermined ball entry means (first operation port 33) that enables the game ball to enter the ball in at least the predetermined gaming state,
At least one of the special control states required to generate the special control state based on the game ball having entered the predetermined ball entry means even if the game ball has not entered the special ball entry means. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4 characterized in that a condition holds.

  According to the feature F5, in the predetermined gaming state which is not the special control state, the special control state may occur based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means. And, having the configuration of the above-mentioned feature F3, when the special control state occurs, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means and the special control state is achieved by the game ball entering the special ball entry means It can occur again. In this case, the player expects the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined game state which is not the special control state, and in the special control state, not only the variable ball entry means but also the special ball entry The player will expect the game ball to enter the means.

  Feature F6. More than the probability that the special control state occurs based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means, the probability that the special control state occurs based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means The gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized in that the height is higher.

  According to the feature F6, the game ball is in the special ball entry means in the special control state than the probability that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined game state which is not the special control state and the special control state occurs. The probability that the special control state occurs continuously after entering the ball is higher. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means in the special control state.

Feature F7. A means for acquiring special trigger information when the game ball enters the special ball entering means (in the first to fifteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1101 in the main CPU 63, in the eighteenth embodiment Function in the main CPU 63 to execute the process of step S4404),
At least one condition necessary to generate the special control state is satisfied when the special trigger information is acquired,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F3 to F6, wherein the expected value for which the special control state occurs after the acquisition of the special trigger information does not change according to the game state.

  According to the feature F7, the expected value for which the special control state occurs after the acquisition of the special trigger information does not change according to the gaming state, thereby changing the expected value according to the gaming state As compared with the above, simplification of the processing configuration can be achieved, and management of the expected value can be facilitated. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not change according to the game state, it becomes difficult to give intonation to the game. On the other hand, since it has a configuration of the above-mentioned feature F1 and is capable of entering the game ball to the special ball entry means in the special control state, to give an occasion where special trigger information is acquired. As a result, it becomes possible to give intonation to a game.

Feature F8. The special ball entering means is provided with a trigger ball entering means (second operation port 34) that enables the game ball to enter based on the game ball entering the ball,
The game machine according to any one of the features F1 to F7, wherein a transition trigger to the special control state occurs based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entry means.

  According to the feature F8, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means by entering the game ball into the trigger ball entry means, and the special control state can be achieved by entering the game ball into the trigger ball entry means An opportunity for transition to Thus, in order to generate the special control state continuously, it is necessary to cause the special ball entry means to enter the game ball in the special control state, and further to cause the trigger ball entry means to enter the game ball. Become. Therefore, the uncertainty with respect to the continuous occurrence of the special control state increases, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F9. The feature F8 is characterized in that the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means are provided in the area where the gaming ball flows down when the firing operation is performed in a predetermined mode. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature F9, entering the gaming ball into the variable entering means, entering the gaming ball into the special entering means, and playing the game into the trigger entering means by continuing the firing operation according to the predetermined aspect It becomes possible to aim at the ball entering the ball.

Feature F10. Means for controlling the trigger ball entering means to be in the ball entry possible state where ball entry of the game ball is possible, under at least one condition that the game ball enters the special ball entering means (main side CPU 63 Function to execute the processing of step S1108 to step S1110 in
The frequency at which the trigger entering means becomes the enterable state with respect to entering the game ball into the special entry means is constant regardless of the gaming state as described in feature F8 or F9 Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature F10, the frequency at which the trigger ball entering means can enter the ball for entering the game ball to the special ball entering means is constant regardless of the game state, so the game for the special ball entering means The expected value for which the special control state occurs after the ball enters the ball does not change according to the game state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the expected value is changed according to the gaming state, and the management of the expected value is facilitated. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not change according to the game state, it becomes difficult to give intonation to the game. On the other hand, since it has a configuration of the above-mentioned feature F1 and is capable of entering the game ball into the special ball entry means in the special control state, the opportunity to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means It becomes possible to give intonation and, as a result, it becomes possible to give intonation to a game.

Feature F11. The special control state includes a first special control state (for example, 2R high probability result) and a second special control state (for example, 16R high probability result),
The game according to any one of the features F1 to F10, wherein the ease of entering the game ball into the special ball entry means differs between the first special control state and the second special control state. Machine.

  According to the feature F11, since the ease of entering the gaming ball into the special entering means is different between the first special control state and the second special controlling state, the entering of the game ball into the special entering means The player who expects the player is expected to generate the special control state in which the game ball is likely to enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F12. The game ball can enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other,
The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the number of times the special control is performed is different between the first special control state and the second special control state.

  According to the feature F12, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other. It becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the state switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the target to which the player should pay attention in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

  In this case, the number of times of switching of the above state in the variable ball entry means is different between the first special control state and the second special control state. As a result, the ease of entering the gaming ball into the special entering means is different in the first special control state and the second special controlling state, and the entering of the gaming ball into the special entering means is expected. The player expects the occurrence of a special control state in which the game ball is likely to enter the special ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F13. The game ball can enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other,
The game machine is
A unit that executes a round game in which the special control is executed in the special control state a predetermined number of times (a function for executing a special power start process, a special power open process and a special power close process in the main CPU 63);
A unit for ending the round game (a function to make a positive determination in step S3703 in the main CPU 63) when the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means in one round game is a predetermined number;
Execution means for executing the special control a plurality of times in a predetermined round game (function of executing the process of step S3707 when the round counter = 1 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F12, comprising:

  In the feature F13, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the switching timing of this state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the target to which the player should pay attention in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

  In this case, in the predetermined round game, switching of the above state in the variable ball entry means occurs a plurality of times. As a result, it becomes possible to generate a predetermined round game in which entering of the game ball into the special ball entry means is likely to occur as the round game. Therefore, the player expects the occurrence of a predetermined round game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F14. As the execution mode of the special control, at least a high expectation degree mode and a low expectation degree mode in which the expectation degree of entering the game ball to the variable ball entry means is relatively high and low are set,
The plurality of execution means is characterized in that the special control to be the high expectation degree mode is executed after the special control to be the low expectation degree mode is executed in the predetermined round game. The gaming machine according to feature F13.

  According to the feature F14, since the special control to be the high expectation degree mode is executed after the special control to be the low expectation degree mode is executed in the predetermined round game, the state in the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game It is possible to allow a plurality of gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game, while ensuring that the switching occurs a plurality of times.

  Feature F15. In the feature F14, the high expectation degree mode is a mode in which the upper limit period in which the variable ball entry means becomes the first state is a period equal to or more than the product of the game ball firing period and the predetermined number. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature F15, a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game while ensuring that switching of the state in the variable ball entry means occurs a plurality of times in the predetermined round game It is possible to get it.

  Feature F16. A feature is characterized in that the game ball can enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other. The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F15.

  According to the feature F16, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other. It becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the state switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the target to which the player should pay attention in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

  Feature F17. The special ball entering means is downstream of the variable ball entering means in the flow direction of the gaming ball in the gaming area, and the variable ball entering means is one of the first state and the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F16, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the inflow of gaming balls is possible at a timing of switching to.

  According to the feature F17, the special ball-in means is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in at the timing when the variable ball-in means switches from the first state to the other in the second state, When the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the switching timing of this state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the target to which the player should pay attention in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state. Further, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved only by setting the positional relationship of the special ball entering device to the variable ball entering device as the above relationship.

Feature F18. In the variable ball entering means, the game ball having flowed from the upstream side of the variable ball entering means is placed on the variable ball entering means in the first corresponding state in one of the first state and the second state. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by being in the second state, and the variable ball entering means is brought into the second corresponding state in the other state among the first state and the second state. It has a displacement part (induction board part 214) which enables the gaming ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The special ball entering means causes the gaming ball to flow down in the predetermined direction when the displacement portion is switched from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state while the gaming ball is placed on the displacement portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F17, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the game ball can flow.

  According to the feature F18, when the displacement portion switches from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special ball entry means. Thereby, in the special control state, the player is not only whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, but the displacement portion is the first correspondence with the game ball resting on the displacement portion. It becomes possible to pay attention to whether or not to switch from the state to the second correspondence state, and to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

  Feature F19. The gaming machine according to Feature F18, wherein the one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means.

  According to the feature F19, when the variable entering means switches from the first state to the second state, an entering opportunity of the game ball to the special entering means is generated. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention level not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state.

Feature F20. The displacement portion is formed such that the gaming ball placed on the displacement portion flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion in the first corresponding state,
The special ball entering means is in a state where the gaming ball is placed in a predetermined range which is a partial range of the displacement portion, when the displacement portion is switched from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state. The gaming machine according to feature F18 or F19, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature F20, in order to cause the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion which is in the first corresponding state, but the game on which the game ball is placed It is necessary to switch the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at an exquisite timing in which a ball is present in a predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the gaming ball placed on the displacement portion and the switching timing of the state of the displacement portion, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

Feature F21. A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area toward the specific range of the displacement section is provided on the upstream side of the flow direction of the gaming ball from the displacement section,
The gaming machine according to Feature F20, wherein the predetermined range is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

  According to the feature F21, the predetermined range, which is a range that enables entering the special ball entry means in the displacement portion, is on the displacement portion rather than the specific range in which the game ball first reaches the displacement portion. It exists on the tip side of the flow direction of the game ball. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement portion is secondly compatible from the first corresponding state at an exquisite timing during the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. It is necessary to switch to the state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

Feature F22. The one state is the first state of the variable entering means, and the other state is the second state of the variable entering means.
The gaming machine according to the feature F21, wherein the ball entering portion (the inlet 45b) of the variable ball entering means is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the predetermined range.

  According to the feature F22, when the variable entering means switches from the first state to the second state, an entering opportunity of the game ball to the special entering means is generated. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention level not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state.

  In this case, the ball entering portion of the variable ball entering means is located on the tip side of the flow direction of the game ball on the displacement portion, rather than the predetermined range which is a range enabling entering the special ball entering means in the displacement portion. Existing. As a result, the game ball which has been on the displacement portion but does not reach the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means enters the special ball entry means. Therefore, the player's sense of disadvantage for the game ball placed on the displacement portion not entering the variable ball entry means, conversely, for a sense of profit for the occurrence of ball entry to the special ball entry means It is possible to change.

  Feature F23. The predetermined range is a range in which the game ball of the next firing order is present at the timing when one game ball reaches the ball entry portion when the game ball is supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle. The gaming machine according to feature F22, wherein the gaming machine is set to

  According to the feature F23, there is a possibility that the game ball is present in the predetermined range of the displacement portion at the timing when the game ball enters the ball entry portion of the variable entry means and the displacement portion switches to the second correspondence state. Becomes higher. Therefore, when the displacement part changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game ball entering the special ball entering means.

Feature F24. As the special ball entering means, a first special ball entering means (first special ball entry port 251) and a second special ball entering means (second special ball entry port 252) are provided,
The gaming machine is means for giving a first profit when the game ball enters the first special ball entry means (a function of executing the process of step S3902 in the main CPU 63);
A means for providing a second benefit when the game ball enters the second special ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
When the first condition is established in the special control state, it becomes possible to enter the game ball to the first special ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F23, characterized in that when the second condition is satisfied in the special control state, the game ball can enter the second special ball entry means.

  According to the feature F24, the first special ball entering means and the second special ball entering means are subject to special ball entering means depending on whether the condition established in the special control state is the first condition or the second condition. And will be different. And the profit provided when the game ball enters the first special ball entry means is different from when the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. Thus, the player not only expects the first condition or the second condition to be established in the special control state, but also enables the player to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means with higher profit. It is expected that the condition to be satisfied will be satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature F25. In the variable ball entering means, the game ball having flowed from the upstream side of the variable ball entering means is placed on the variable ball entering means in the first corresponding state in one of the first state and the second state. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by being in the second state, and the variable ball entering means is brought into the second corresponding state in the other state among the first state and the second state. It has a displacement part (induction board part 214) which enables the gaming ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The displacement portion is formed such that the gaming ball placed on the displacement portion flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion in the first corresponding state,
The first special ball entering device is configured such that, in a state where the gaming ball is placed on a first predetermined range (first range X1) which is a partial range of the displacement portion, the displacement portion is the first corresponding state from the first corresponding state When the game ball is switched to the 2 compatible state, the game ball is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction,
The second special ball entering device is configured such that, in a state where the gaming ball is placed in a second predetermined range (second range X2) which is a range of a part of the displacement portion, the displacement portion is the first corresponding state The gaming machine according to the feature F24, characterized in that the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction when switching to the 2 compatible state.

  According to the feature F25, when the gaming ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first correspondence state, the displacement is performed in a situation where the ball can be entered into the special ball entry means with higher profit. The position of the game ball placed on the displacement part will be focused on in anticipation of the part switching from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state.

Feature F26. The one state is the first state of the variable entering means, and the other state is the second state of the variable entering means.
The game ball entering the first special ball entry means is more advantageous for the player than the game ball enters the second special ball entry means,
A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area toward the specific range of the displacement section is provided on the upstream side of the flow direction of the gaming ball from the displacement section,
The second predetermined range is on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range is on the side of the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to feature F25, wherein the ball entering portion of the variable ball entering means is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

  According to the feature F26, when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state, a trigger for entering the game ball to the special ball entry means occurs. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention level not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state.

  In this case, the first predetermined range, which is a range that enables entry to the first special ball entry means in the displacement portion, is a range that enables entry to the second special ball entry means in the displacement portion. (2) It is on the tip side of the flow direction of the game ball on the displacement portion more than the predetermined range, and the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means is the tip of the flow direction of the game ball on the displacement portion Exist on the side. The game ball entering the first special ball entry means is more advantageous for the player than the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. In this case, the game ball existing at a position closer to the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means on the displacing portion becomes easier to enter the first special ball entry means advantageous to the player, so the variable ball entry means It is possible to make the profit for the player higher as the situation in which the game ball does not enter the ball in the ball entry part of the game becomes stronger.

  Feature F27. In any one of the features F1 to F26, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means is in the first state. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature F27, when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means, so that the variable ball entry means is in the first state In this case, the player expects both the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means and the entry of the game ball into the special entry means. Therefore, it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of the game in the condition where the variable ball entry means is in the first state.

Feature F28. The variable ball entry means is
A ball entry section (the first large winning opening 265, the second large winning opening 266) to which game balls can enter;
It is possible for a game ball flowing down from the upstream side to be placed, and a guiding state capable of guiding the placed game ball onto the ball entry portion, and a game ball flowing down from the upstream side forward Guiding means (first guiding plate 271, second guiding plate 281) switchably provided in each of the non-inducing states which do not lead to the writing ball portion;
Equipped with
When the guiding means is in the guiding state, the variable entering means is in the first state, and when the guiding means is in the non-inducing state, the variable entering means is in the second state.
When the guiding means is in the guiding state, the special ball is placed at a position where the gaming ball placed on the guiding means can flow in a different area different from the ball entering area. A game machine according to any one of the features F1 to F27, characterized in that means are provided.

  According to the feature F28, when the variable entering means is in the first state by the guiding means being in the inducing state, either of the variable entering means and the special entering means is the game ball placed on the induction means. It is induced to the heel. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the gaming ball placed on the guiding means, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F29. Means for guiding the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area toward the guidance start range of the guiding means on the upstream side of the flowing direction of the gaming ball than the guiding means (first guiding nail group 267, second guiding nail Group 268),
The guiding means is formed such that in the guiding state, the gaming ball mounted on the guiding means flows down along the guiding means in a predetermined guiding direction.
The gaming machine according to feature F28, wherein the ball receiving portion and the separate area are present on the side of the predetermined induction direction with respect to the induction start range.

  According to the feature F29, both the ball entrance and the separate area exist on the leading side of the flow direction of the gaming ball in the guiding means, rather than the induction start range in which the gaming ball first reaches in the guiding means. There is. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game balls flowing down in the guiding means.

  Feature F30. The gaming machine according to Feature F29, wherein the separate area is present on the side of the predetermined guiding direction relative to the ball entry part.

  According to the feature F30, the game ball having passed through the ball entering portion without being placed in the ball entering part of the guiding means in the guiding state enters the special ball entering means. As a result, the player's sense of disadvantage for the game ball placed on the guiding means not entering the variable ball entering means, on the contrary, a feeling of profit for entering the special ball entering means. It is possible to change.

Feature F31. As the variable ball entering means, a first variable ball entering means (a first special electric symbol winning device 261) and a second variable ball entering means (a second special electric symbol winning device 262) are provided,
A first special ball entering means (first through gate 263) and a second special ball entering means (second through gate 264) are provided as the special ball entering means,
It is a game ball placed on the first guiding means when the first guiding means (the first guiding plate 271) which is the guiding means of the first variable ball entering means is in the guiding state, and the first ball The first special ball entering means is provided at a position where game balls flowed down to a first separate area different from the first ball entering part which is the ball entering part of the variable ball entering means can enter the ball,
It is a game ball placed on the second guiding means when the second guiding means (second guiding plate 281) which is the guiding means of the second variable ball entering means is in the guiding state, and the second It is provided that the second special ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball which has flowed down to a second separate area different from the second ball entering part which is the ball entering part of the variable ball entering means can enter the ball The game machine according to any one of features F28 to F30, which is a feature.

  According to the feature F31, there is a combination of the first variable entering means and the first special entering means, and a combination of the second variable entering means and the second special entering means. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the ball entering ratio of the game ball to each of a variable ball entering means and a special ball entering means different by making the kind of combination used as an execution object of special control different in a special control state .

  Feature F32. The probability that the game ball on the first guidance means in the induction state enters the first special ball entry means, and the game ball on the second guidance means in the induction state The gaming machine according to feature F31, characterized in that the probability of entering the second special ball entry means is different.

  According to the feature F32, it is possible to make the ball entry probability of the gaming ball to the special ball entry means different by differentiating the type of the combination to be subjected to the special control in the special control state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the execution target of the special control.

Feature F33. The special control state includes a first special control state (for example, 2R low probability result) and a second special control state (for example, 2R high probability result),
In the first special control state and the second special control state, the type of the variable ball entering means to be subjected to the special control or the selection mode of the variable ball entering means to be subjected to the special control is The gaming machine according to feature F32, which is characterized by being different.

  According to the feature F33, it is possible to make the ball entry probability of the gaming ball to the special ball entry means different according to the type of the special control state. In this case, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the type of special control state.

  Feature F34. The gaming machine according to any one of features F31 to F33, wherein the second special ball entry means is provided on the downstream side of the flow direction of the gaming ball with respect to the first special ball entry means.

  According to the feature F34, since the second special ball entry means is provided on the downstream side of the first special ball entry means in the flow direction of the gaming ball, the first variable ball entry means is the target for executing the special control. When it becomes, the game ball can not only enter the first special ball entry means, but also the game ball can enter the second special ball entry means. Thus, the player expects the first variable ball entry means to be subject to special control.

  Feature F35. If the game ball enters the first special ball entry means, and if the game ball enters the second special ball entry means, the same benefit is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features F31 to F34.

  According to the feature F35, the same benefit is given regardless of whether the game ball enters the first special ball entry means or the game ball enters the second special ball entry means, Even if the execution target of the special control is any one of the first variable entering means and the second variable entering means, it is possible to suppress the sense of disadvantage felt by the player.

  Feature F36. The game ball number that can be used by the player is increased based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the player can be used based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means A game machine according to any one of features F1 to F35, comprising means for increasing the number of game balls (a function of executing the processing of step S3902 and step S3904 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature F36, when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the number of game balls usable by the player increases and the game ball enters the special ball entry means as well. The number of game balls that can be used increases. And, by having the configuration of the above-mentioned feature F1, not only the game ball can enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means by shifting to the special control state, but also it becomes easy to enter the ball, Entry of game balls to special entry means becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of increase in the special control state of the number of gaming balls usable by the player, and it is possible to increase the degree of advantage in the special control state.

Feature F37. Acquisition corresponding ball entry means (burst gate 311) that enables game ball entry at least in the predetermined gaming state,
Information acquisition means (main side CPU 63) which acquires special trigger information when the game ball enters the special ball entry means and acquires the special event information when the game ball enters the acquisition-compatible ball entry means And the function of executing acquisition processing of pending information on the side of the drawing shown in FIG.
A trigger entering ball means (second operation port 34) that is capable of entering a ball capable of entering a game ball based on the acquisition of the special trigger information;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F36, wherein a transition trigger to the special control state occurs based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entry means.

  According to the feature F37, even in the predetermined gaming state which is not the special control state, the special trigger information is acquired by the game ball entering the acquisition-compatible ball entry means, and the special trigger information is acquired. When the game ball enters the ball entering means, the transition to the special control state occurs. Thereby, not only in the special control state but also in the predetermined gaming state, the trigger ball entering means becomes capable of entering the ball triggered by the acquisition of the special trigger information, and the game ball enters the ball entering means. It is possible to cause a situation where a special control state occurs based on

  Feature F38. It is provided with a control means (limit nail 312) which makes the ball entry probability of the game ball to the acquisition corresponding ball entry means lower than the probability that the game ball enters the special ball entry means in the special control state. The gaming machine according to feature F37, characterized in that:

  According to the feature F38, it is possible to suppress the probability that the transition to the special control state will occur based on the ball entry of the gaming ball to the acquisition corresponding ball entry means in the predetermined gaming state. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the occurrence of the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the gaming ball to the acquisition corresponding entry means in the predetermined gaming state.

Feature F39. It has a predetermined ball entry means (first operation port 33) that enables the game ball to enter the ball in at least the predetermined gaming state,
The transition trigger to the special control state occurs without the special trigger information being acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means,
In the feature F38, the restriction means is configured such that the ball entering probability of the gaming ball to the acquisition corresponding ball entering means is lower than the probability of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature F39, it is possible to enter the gaming ball in a predetermined gaming state, and the generation of the gaming ball entering the special control state is triggered by the transition to the special control state. The probability of entering the game ball is lower. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the occurrence of the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the gaming ball to the acquisition corresponding entry means in the predetermined gaming state.

  Feature F40. Acquisition correspondence notification is executed in a situation where the trigger ball entering means becomes the ball entry enable state based on the acquisition of the special trigger information by the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F37 to F39, comprising: notification execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S4413 in the main CPU 63; display control device 82).

  According to the feature F40, when the game ball enters the acquisition corresponding ball entry means and special trigger information is acquired, the trigger ball entering means can enter the ball, the execution of the acquisition correspondence notification It is possible to notify the player through As a result, entering the game ball to the acquisition corresponding entry means has occurred and the trigger entry means is in the state capable of entering the ball, but it is possible to enter the game sphere to the trigger entry means without noticing it. It becomes possible to make it hard to generate the event of losing the chance to hit the ball.

  Feature F41. The notification execution means executes the acquisition correspondence notification on the condition that the special trigger information is acquired by the game ball entering the acquisition correspondence ball entry means in a situation not in the special control state. The gaming machine according to feature F40, which is characterized in that.

  In the special control state, it is possible that the player is conscious that the trigger ball entering means can enter the ball because the game ball can enter the special ball entering means, but the special control is special. In a predetermined gaming state which is not the state, since the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means, the player may be less aware that the trigger ball entry means is in the ball entry enable state. In this case, according to the feature F41, the acquisition correspondence notification is executed when the special trigger information is acquired by the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entry means in a situation not in the special control state, It becomes possible to make the player conscious of the fact that the ball entering means is in the state capable of entering the ball. In addition, acquisition response notification is not executed in a special control state where it is highly likely that the player is conscious that the trigger ball entry means is in the ball entry enable state, whereby execution of the acquisition response notification is performed. It becomes possible for the player not to be bothersome.

  Feature F42. The notification execution unit is configured to acquire the notification corresponding to acquisition of the special trigger information on the condition that the special trigger information is acquired by the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entry unit in a situation where the special trigger information is not acquired. The gaming machine according to feature F40 or F41, which is to be executed.

  According to the feature F42, it is possible to execute the acquisition correspondence notification in a situation where the player is not aware that the trigger ball entering means is in the state capable of entering the ball.

  Feature F43. The variable ball entering means, the special ball entering means, and the acquisition corresponding ball entering means are provided in an area where the gaming ball flows down when the firing operation is performed in a predetermined mode. To the gaming machine according to any one of F42.

  According to the feature F43, entering the gaming ball into the variable entering means, entering the gaming ball into the special entering means, and entering the acquisition corresponding entering means by continuing the firing operation according to the predetermined mode. It becomes possible to aim at entering a game ball.

  Feature F44. The trigger ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball can more easily reach the trigger ball entering means when the shooting operation is performed in a specific mode than when the shooting operation is performed in the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to feature F43, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature F44, when the trigger ball entering means becomes capable of entering the ball in a situation not in the special control state, the game ball is inserted into the trigger ball entering means by performing the firing operation in the specific mode. It becomes possible to make it easy to generate a ball.

Feature F45. A trigger ball entry means (second operation port 34), which enables the game ball to enter the ball based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means;
Provision determination means (function of executing the process of step S1405 in the main CPU 63) that executes the determination on the basis of the game ball entering the trigger ball entering means;
Based on the result of the awarding determination being the first awarding correspondence result, transition to the special control state, and the gaming state after the end of the special control state is the gaming state before the start of the special control state And means capable of changing to a different gaming state (a function of executing the processing of step S1904 and step S1905 in the main CPU 63);
Based on the result of the awarding determination being the second awarding correspondence result, it is shifted to a predetermined gaming state in which the special control is executed by the special control means, and the gaming state after the predetermined gaming state is said is said A unit for maintaining the gaming state before the predetermined gaming state is executed (a function that makes a negative determination in step S1902 of the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F44, wherein the probability that the result of the assignment determination will be the second assignment correspondence result is higher than the probability that the first assignment correspondence result will be.

  According to the feature F45, when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means, not only the first award response result but also the second award response result is obtained, and the probability of the second award response result is It is higher than the probability of becoming the first grant correspondence result. As a result, by causing the game ball to enter the trigger entry means, it is possible to generate many opportunities for the variable entry means to be in the first state. In this case, having the configuration of the feature F1 and being capable of entering the gaming ball into the special ball entry means in the special control state, the variable ball entry means is triggered by the occurrence of the special control state. It is possible to give rise to a situation where there are many opportunities to be in the first state.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A41, the feature B1 to B20, the feature C1 to C4, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E7, the feature F1 to F45, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature F1 to F45 Any one or more configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. It is provided in the game area (game area PA) where the game ball flows down, and it is possible to enter the game ball or the first state where the game ball is easy to enter and the game ball is not allowed to enter the ball or the game ball is hard to enter Variable ball entering means provided so as to be switchable with each of the second states (in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the special electric award winning device 32, in the fifteenth embodiment, the first special electric award winning device 261 and the second Special power winning device 262),
Special control means for executing special control to bring the variable ball entry means into the first state and then to the second state (perform opening setting processing for special power and closing setting processing for special power in the main CPU 63 Function),
The special ball entering means (the through gate 35 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the first through gate 263 in the fifteenth embodiment, and the second through in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments) in which the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can enter Gate 264),
Trigger ball entering means (second operation port 34) that can enter the state capable of entering the game ball based on the game ball entering the special ball entering means;
Provision determination means (function of executing the process of step S1405 in the main CPU 63) that executes the determination on the basis of the game ball entering the trigger ball entering means;
Based on the result of the assignment determination being the first assignment correspondence result, transition to the special control state (the open / close execution mode triggered by the big hit result) in which the special control is executed, A unit capable of setting the gaming state after the end of the control state to a gaming state different from the gaming state before the start of the special control state (a function of executing the processing of step S1904 and step S1905 in the main CPU 63);
A predetermined gaming state in which the special control is executed by the special control means based on the result of the awarding determination being the second awarding correspondence result (open / close execution mode triggered by the small hitting result) Means for shifting to the game state and maintaining the gaming state after the termination of the predetermined gaming state in the gaming state before the predetermined gaming state is executed (function to make a negative determination in step S1902 of the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The configuration in which the probability of the second assignment response result in the assignment determination is higher than the probability of the first assignment response result,
A game machine characterized in that the game ball can enter the special ball entry means in a predetermined situation.

  According to the feature G1, when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means, not only can it become the first grant correspondence result but also the second grant correspondence result, and the probability of becoming the second grant correspondence result is It is higher than the probability of becoming the first grant correspondence result. As a result, it is possible to generate an opportunity for the variable ball entry means to be in the first state by causing the game ball to enter the trigger ball entry means. In this case, it is possible to enter the special ball entering means which causes the trigger entering means to enter the ball capable state in a predetermined situation. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the trigger ball entering means is expected to generate a predetermined situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature G2. A game according to feature G1 characterized in that the frequency at which the trigger ball entering means becomes the ball entry enable state is constant regardless of the game state with respect to the game ball entering the special ball entering means. Machine.

  According to the feature G2, the frequency at which the trigger ball entering means can enter the ball for entering the game ball to the special ball entering means is constant regardless of the game state, so the game for the special ball entering means The expected value at which the special control is executed after the ball enters the ball does not change according to the gaming state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the expected value is changed according to the gaming state, and the management of the expected value is facilitated. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not change according to the game state, it becomes difficult to give intonation to the game. On the other hand, since it is configured to have the configuration of the above-mentioned feature G1 and enables the game ball to enter the special ball entry means in a predetermined situation, the special ball entry means has the opportunity to enter the ball. As a result, it becomes possible to give intonation to the game.

Feature G3. It has a predetermined ball entry means (first operation port 33) which allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball,
The provision determination means executes the determination based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entering means, and executes the determination based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means And
A high probability state and a low probability state are set such that the probability that the first assignment correspondence result will be relatively high or low in the assignment determination, as a state in which the assignment determination by the assignment determination means is performed,
In the gaming machine, the game operation is started based on the determination of the addition, and the game operation control means is controlled to end the game operation when the operation continuation period has elapsed. Times control means (a special figure variation start process in the main CPU 63, a special figure variation in-process process and a special figure in-process execution process);
Period determination means for determining the operation continuation period (function of executing the processing of step S1414 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The said period determination means is the said game circulation operation triggered by the said provision determination performed based on the ball of the game ball to the said ball entering means in the said low probability state, The result of the said determination is the said The average determination period of the operation continuation period of the game circulation operation in the case where it does not become the first awarding correspondence result is the awarding determination executed based on the entering of the gaming ball to the predetermined entering means in the low probability state. It is the same as, or substantially the same as, or less than the average duration of the operation continuation period of the game circulation operation when the game circulation operation is a trigger and the result of the assignment determination does not become the first assignment correspondence result. Is configured to
The gaming machine according to Feature G2, wherein the predetermined situation is a situation different from the situation in which the assignment determination is performed in the low probability state.

  According to the feature G3, the game operation is triggered by the awarding determination performed based on the game ball entering the trigger entering means in the low probability state, and the result of the awarding is the result of the first awarding correspondence The average period of the operation continuation period of the game circulation operation in the case where it does not become a game circulation operation triggered by the grant determination performed based on the entering of the gaming ball to the predetermined ball entry means in the low probability state It becomes the same as, substantially the same as, or less than the average period of the operation continuation period of the game circulation operation when the result of the assignment determination does not become the first assignment correspondence result. This makes it possible to prevent the digest rate of the former game operation from becoming extremely worse than the digest rate of the latter game operation. However, while having the above configuration, the feature G2 has a configuration in which the frequency at which the trigger ball entering means can enter the ball for entering the game ball to the special ball entering means is constant regardless of the game state. In the case where it is, it is assumed that the game is performed aiming at entering the game ball to the trigger entering means in the low probability state. On the other hand, in the situation where the award determination is performed in the low probability state, the game ball can not enter the special ball entry means. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to aim for the game ball to be played by aiming the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means.

  Feature G4. The variable ball entering means, the special ball entering means, and the trigger ball entering means are provided in an area where the gaming ball flows down when the firing operation is performed in a predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to any one of G3.

  According to the feature G4, by continuing the firing operation according to the predetermined aspect, the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the game ball enters the special ball entry means, and the game enters the trigger ball entry means It becomes possible to aim at the ball entering the ball.

  Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G4, wherein the predetermined situation is a state in which the special control is executed.

  According to the feature G5, the transition to the state in which the special control is executed enables not only the entry of the gaming ball to the variable entry means becomes possible or the entry becomes easy, but the game to the special entry means It becomes possible to enter the ball. As a result, it is possible to enhance the profit of shifting to the state in which the special control is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature G6. The gaming machine according to the feature G5, characterized in that the game ball can enter the special ball entry means when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the special control is executed.

  According to the feature G6, even if the special control is executed, if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means. As a result, the player expects the predetermined condition to be established separately from the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the state where the special control is executed, and the game in the state where the special control is executed It is possible to improve the interest of

  Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G5 or G6, wherein the ease of entering the gaming ball into the special ball entry means differs between the special control state and the predetermined gaming state.

  According to the feature G7, the game is expected to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means by the difference in the ease of entering the game ball into the special ball entry means in the special control state and the predetermined game state The person expects the occurrence of a state in which the game ball is likely to enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G8. The game ball can enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other,
The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein the number of times the special control is performed is different between the special control state and the predetermined gaming state.

  According to the feature G8, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other. It becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the state switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the target to which the player should pay attention in the state in which the special control is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the state in which the special control is performed.

  In this case, the number of times of switching of the state in the variable ball entry means differs between the special control state and the predetermined gaming state. As a result, the ease of entering the gaming ball into the special entering means is different between the special control state and the predetermined gaming state, and the player who expects the entering of the gaming ball into the special entering means is special It is expected that the special control execution state in which the game ball is likely to enter the ball entry means is generated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G9. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by being in a state corresponding to the first corresponding state and being placed with the game ball having flowed down from the upstream side, and the game ball is in the predetermined direction by being in the second corresponding state A displacement portion (induction plate portion 214) that allows the
The special ball entering means causes the gaming ball to flow down in the predetermined direction when the displacement portion is switched from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state while the gaming ball is placed on the displacement portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G8, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the game ball can flow.

  According to the feature G9, when the displacement portion switches from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to focus attention on whether or not the displacement part switches from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state while the gaming ball is placed on the displacement part, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G10. The displacement portion is formed such that the gaming ball placed on the displacement portion flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion in the first corresponding state,
The special ball entering means is in a state where the gaming ball is placed in a predetermined range which is a partial range of the displacement portion, when the displacement portion is switched from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state. The gaming machine according to feature G9, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature G10, in order to cause the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion which is in the first corresponding state, but the game on which the game ball is placed It is necessary to switch the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at an exquisite timing in which a ball is present in a predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the displacement portion and the switching timing of the state of the displacement portion, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G11. A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area toward the specific range of the displacement section is provided on the upstream side of the flow direction of the gaming ball from the displacement section,
The gaming machine according to feature G10, wherein the predetermined range is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

  According to the feature G11, the predetermined range, which is a range that enables entering the special ball entry means in the displacement portion, is on the displacement portion rather than the specific range in which the gaming ball first reaches the displacement portion. It exists on the tip side of the flow direction of the game ball. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement portion is secondly compatible from the first corresponding state at an exquisite timing during the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. It is necessary to switch to the state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G12. The target ball entry means, which is either the variable ball entry means or another ball entry means,
A ball entry section (the first large winning opening 265, the second large winning opening 266) to which game balls can enter;
It is possible for a game ball flowing down from the upstream side to be placed, and a guiding state capable of guiding the placed game ball onto the ball entry portion, and a game ball flowing down from the upstream side forward Guiding means (first guiding plate 271, second guiding plate 281) switchably provided in each of the non-inducing states which do not lead to the writing ball portion;
Equipped with
When the guiding means is in the guiding state, the special ball is placed at a position where the gaming ball placed on the guiding means can flow in a different area different from the ball entering area. A game machine according to any one of features G1 to G11, characterized in that means are provided.

  According to the feature G12, when the guiding means is in the guiding state, the gaming ball placed on the guiding means is guided to either the ball entering portion of the target ball entering means or the special ball entering means. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the gaming ball placed on the guiding means, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G13. Means for guiding the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area toward the guidance start range of the guiding means on the upstream side of the flowing direction of the gaming ball than the guiding means (first guiding nail group 267, second guiding nail Group 268),
The guiding means is formed such that in the guiding state, the gaming ball mounted on the guiding means flows down along the guiding means in a predetermined guiding direction.
The gaming machine according to the feature G12, wherein the ball receiving portion and the separate area exist on the side of the predetermined induction direction with respect to the induction start range.

  According to the feature G13, both of the ball entering portion and the separate region which enables the ball to enter the special ball entering means are in the guiding means rather than the guiding start range in which the gaming ball first reaches in the guiding means. It exists on the tip side of the flow direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game balls flowing down in the guiding means.

  Feature G14. The gaming machine according to Feature G13, wherein the separate area is present on the side of the predetermined guiding direction relative to the ball entry part.

  According to the feature G14, the game ball that has passed through the ball entering portion of the guiding means in the induction state without entering the ball entering the ball entering the special ball entering means. This changes the player's sense of disadvantage for the game ball placed on the guiding means not entering the ball into a sense of profit for the occurrence of entering the special ball entering means. It becomes possible.

Feature G15. As the target ball entering means, a first target ball entering means (first special electric symbol winning device 261) and a second target electric ball entering means (second special electric symbol winning device 262) are provided,
A first special ball entering means (first through gate 263) and a second special ball entering means (second through gate 264) are provided as the special ball entering means,
It is a game ball placed on the first guiding means when the first guiding means (first guiding plate 271) which is the guiding means of the first target ball entering means is in the guiding state, and the first ball The first special ball entering means is provided at a position where game balls flowed down to a first separate area different from the first ball entering part which is the ball entering part of the target ball entering means can enter the ball,
The second guiding means (the second guiding plate 281), which is the guiding means of the second target ball entering means, is a gaming ball placed on the second guiding means when the second guiding means (the second guiding plate 281) is in the guiding state. It is provided that the second special ball entering means is provided at a position where game balls flowed down to a second separate area different from the second ball entering part which is the ball entering part of the target ball entering means can enter the ball The gaming machine according to any one of features G12 to G14.

  According to the feature G15, there is a combination of the first target ball entry means and the first special ball entry means, and a combination of the second object ball entry means and the second special ball entry means. Thus, by making the types of combinations to be subjected to the guidance control different in the state where the guidance control is performed, it is possible to make the ball entering ratio of the gaming ball to each of the target ball entry means and the special ball entry means different. Is possible.

  Feature G16. The probability that the game ball on the first guidance means in the induction state enters the first special ball entry means, and the game ball on the second guidance means in the induction state The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the probability of entering the second special ball entry means is different.

  According to the feature G16, it becomes possible to make the ball entry probability of the gaming ball to the special ball entry means different by differentiating the kind of combination to be subject to the guidance control in the state where the guidance control is executed. . This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the execution target of the guidance control.

  Feature G17. The gaming machine according to feature G15 or G16, wherein the second special ball entry means is provided downstream of the first special ball entry means in the flow direction of the gaming ball.

  According to the feature G17, since the second special ball entry means is provided downstream of the first special ball entry means in the flow-down direction of the gaming ball, the first object ball entry means is the target for executing the special control. When it becomes, the game ball can not only enter the first special ball entry means, but also the game ball can enter the second special ball entry means. Thus, the player expects the first target ball entry means to be subject to the guidance control.

  Feature G18. If the game ball enters the first special ball entry means, and if the game ball enters the second special ball entry means, the same benefit is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features G15 to G17.

  According to the feature G18, the same benefit is provided regardless of whether the game ball enters the first special ball entry means or the game ball enters the second special ball entry means, Even when the execution target of the guidance control is any of the first target entering means and the second target entering means, it is possible to suppress the sense of disadvantage felt by the player.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A41, the feature B1 to B20, the feature C1 to C4, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E7, the feature F1 to F45, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature G1 to G18. Any one or more configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by being in a state corresponding to the first corresponding state and being placed with the game ball having flowed down from the upstream side, and the game ball is in the predetermined direction by being in the second corresponding state. A displacement portion (induction plate portion 214) that allows the
When the game ball is switched from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state in a state where the game ball is placed on the displacement part, the game ball flows in the predetermined direction so that the game ball flows in Special ball entry means (in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the through gate 35, and in the fourteenth embodiment, the first special ball inlet 251 and the second special ball inlet) 252, and the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264) in the fifteenth embodiment,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, when the displacement portion switches from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special ball entry means. Thus, the player pays attention to whether or not the displacement part switches from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state in a state where the gaming ball is placed on the displacement part, and aims to improve the interest of the game. Is possible.

Feature H2. The displacement portion is formed such that the gaming ball placed on the displacement portion flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion in the first corresponding state,
The special ball entering means is in a state where the gaming ball is placed in a predetermined range which is a partial range of the displacement portion, when the displacement portion is switched from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state. The gaming machine according to the feature H1, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature H2, in order to cause the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion which is in the first corresponding state, but the game on which the game ball is placed It is necessary to switch the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at an exquisite timing in which a ball is present in a predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the displacement portion and the switching timing of the state of the displacement portion, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H3. A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area toward the specific range of the displacement portion is provided on the upstream side of the flow direction of the gaming ball from the displacement portion,
The gaming machine according to the feature H2, wherein the predetermined range is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

  According to the feature H3, the predetermined range, which is a range that enables entering the special ball entry means in the displacement portion, is on the displacement portion rather than the specific range in which the game ball first reaches the displacement portion. It exists on the tip side of the flow direction of the game ball. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement portion is secondly compatible from the first corresponding state at an exquisite timing during the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. It is necessary to switch to the state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature H4. The gaming machine according to the feature H3, wherein the predetermined ball storage portion (the inlet portion 45b) is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the predetermined range.

  According to the feature H4, the predetermined ball entering portion is present on the downstream side of the flowing direction of the gaming ball on the displacement portion, rather than the predetermined range which is a range enabling entering the special ball entering means in the displacement portion. doing. As a result, the gaming ball that has been on the displacement portion but has not reached the predetermined ball entry portion enters the special ball entry means. Therefore, the player's sense of disadvantage for the game ball placed on the displacement portion not entering the predetermined ball entry, conversely, a sense of benefit for the ball entering the special ball entry means It is possible to change to

  Feature H5. When the gaming sphere is supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle in the specific range, the gaming sphere of the next firing order is present at the timing when one gaming sphere reaches the predetermined ball entry portion The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the gaming machine is set to a range.

  According to the feature H5, there is a high possibility that the game ball is present in the predetermined range of the displacement portion at the timing when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion and the displacement portion switches to the second correspondence state. . Therefore, when the displacement part changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game ball entering the special ball entering means.

Feature H6. As the special ball entering means, a first special ball entering means (first special ball entry port 251) and a second special ball entering means (second special ball entry port 252) are provided,
The gaming machine is means for giving a first profit when the game ball enters the first special ball entry means (a function of executing the process of step S3902 in the main CPU 63);
A means for providing a second benefit when the game ball enters the second special ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The first special ball entering device is configured such that, in a state where the gaming ball is placed on a first predetermined range (first range X1) which is a partial range of the displacement portion, the displacement portion is the first corresponding state from the first corresponding state When the game ball is switched to the 2 compatible state, the game ball is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction,
The second special ball entering device is configured such that, in a state where the gaming ball is placed in a second predetermined range (second range X2) which is a range of a part of the displacement portion, the displacement portion is the first corresponding state 2) Any one of features H1 to H5 characterized in that the game ball is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction when switching to the compatible state The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature H6, when the gaming ball is placed on the displacement portion which is in the first corresponding state, the displacement is performed in a situation where the ball can be entered into the special ball entry means with higher profit. The position of the game ball placed on the displacement part will be focused on in anticipation of the part switching from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state.

Feature H7. The displacement portion is formed such that the gaming ball placed on the displacement portion flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion in the first corresponding state,
The game ball entering the first special ball entry means is more advantageous for the player than the game ball enters the second special ball entry means,
A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area toward the specific range of the displacement portion is provided on the upstream side of the flow direction of the gaming ball from the displacement portion,
The second predetermined range is on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range is on the side of the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to the feature H6, wherein a predetermined ball entry portion is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

  According to the feature H7, the first predetermined range, which is a range that enables entry to the first special ball entry means in the displacement portion, is a range that enables entry to the second special ball entry means in the displacement portion. A predetermined ball entry portion is located on the tip side of the flow direction of the gaming ball on the displacement portion above the second predetermined range, and the predetermined ball entry portion is on the tip side of the flow direction of the gaming ball on the displacement portion Exists in The game ball entering the first special ball entry means is more advantageous for the player than the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. In this case, the game ball existing at a position closer to the predetermined ball entry portion on the displacement portion is more likely to enter the first special ball entry means advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the profit to the player higher as the situation in which the sense of disadvantage that the game ball has not entered becomes stronger.

  Feature H8. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H7, wherein a plurality of types of operation modes of the displacement portion are set.

  According to the feature H8, when the operation mode of the displacement portion is set to a plurality of types, there are a plurality of types of predetermined situations in which the frequency of entering the ball into the special ball entry means is different.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A41, the feature B1 to B20, the feature C1 to C4, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E7, the feature F1 to F45, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature H1 to H8. Any one or more configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. It is provided in the game area (game area PA) where the game ball flows down, and it is possible to enter the game ball or the first state where the game ball is easy to enter and the game ball is not enterable or the game ball is hard to enter Variable ball entering means provided so as to be switchable with each of the second states (in the first through fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the special electric symbol winning device 32, in the fifteenth embodiment, the first special electric symbol winning device 261 and the second Special power winning device 262),
Special control means for executing special control to bring the variable ball entry means into the first state and then to the second state (perform opening setting processing for special power and closing setting processing for special power in the main CPU 63 Function),
Transition means (function to execute processing during special figure determination in the main CPU 63) to shift the gaming state to the special control state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed;
In the predetermined game state which is not the special control state, the entering of the gaming ball is limited, and the special entering means (the first special entering port 251 and the second) which enables the entering of the gaming ball in the special control state Special ball entrance 252),
The game ball number that can be used by the player is increased based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the player can be used based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means A means for increasing the number of game balls (a function of executing the processing of step S3902 and step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I1, not only is it possible for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means by the transition of the game state to the special control state, or it becomes easy to enter the game ball, the game ball to the special ball entry means It is possible to enter the As a result, it is possible to enhance the profit of the transition of the gaming state to the special control state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the number of game balls usable by the player increases, and the player uses even when the game ball enters the special ball entry means The number of possible game balls increases. And, by having the above-described configuration, the game state can shift to the special control state, and the game ball can enter the variable ball entry means or can easily enter the ball, as well as the special ball entry. Entry of the game ball to the means becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of increase in the special control state of the number of gaming balls usable by the player, and it is possible to increase the degree of advantage in the special control state.

  Feature I2. The special ball entering means is downstream of the variable ball entering means in the flow direction of the gaming ball in the gaming area, and the variable ball entering means is one of the first state and the second state. The gaming machine according to feature I1, characterized in that the gaming ball is provided at a position where it is possible to flow in the gaming ball at the timing of switching to.

  According to the feature I2, when the variable entering means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball which has not entered the variable entering means enters the special entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, the game ball leaked as the ball entry target of the variable ball entry means enters the special ball entry means, and the game ball enters the special ball entry means, and the number of usable game balls increases. It is possible to suppress the player's sense of disadvantage for the occurrence of the game ball leaked from the ball entry target of the variable ball entry means.

Feature I3. In the variable ball entering means, the game ball having flowed from the upstream side of the variable ball entering means is placed on the variable ball entering means in the first corresponding state in one of the first state and the second state. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by being in the second state, and the variable ball entering means is brought into the second corresponding state in the other state among the first state and the second state. It has a displacement part (induction board part 214) which enables the gaming ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The special ball entering means causes the gaming ball to flow down in the predetermined direction when the displacement portion is switched from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state while the gaming ball is placed on the displacement portion. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the game ball can flow.

  According to the feature I3, when the displacement portion switches from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special ball entry means. Thereby, in the special control state, the player is not only whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, but the displacement portion is the first correspondence with the game ball resting on the displacement portion. It becomes possible to pay attention to whether or not to switch from the state to the second correspondence state, and to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

  Feature I4. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means.

  According to the feature I4, when the variable entering means switches from the first state to the second state, an entering opportunity of the game ball to the special entering means is generated. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention level not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state.

Feature I5. The displacement portion is formed such that the gaming ball placed on the displacement portion flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion in the first corresponding state,
The special ball entering means is in a state where the gaming ball is placed in a predetermined range which is a partial range of the displacement portion, when the displacement portion is switched from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state. The gaming machine according to the feature I3 or I4, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature I5, in order to cause the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion which is in the first corresponding state, but the game on which the game ball is placed It is necessary to switch the displacement portion from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at an exquisite timing in which a ball is present in a predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the gaming ball placed on the displacement portion and the switching timing of the state of the displacement portion, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

Feature I6. A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area toward the specific range of the displacement section is provided on the upstream side of the flow direction of the gaming ball from the displacement section,
The gaming machine according to Feature I5, wherein the predetermined range is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

  According to the feature I6, the predetermined range, which is a range that enables entering the special ball entry means in the displacement portion, is on the displacement portion rather than the specific range in which the game ball first reaches the displacement portion. It exists on the tip side of the flow direction of the game ball. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement portion is secondly compatible from the first corresponding state at an exquisite timing during the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. It is necessary to switch to the state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

Feature I7. The one state is the first state of the variable entering means, and the other state is the second state of the variable entering means.
The gaming machine according to the feature I6, wherein the ball entry portion (the inlet 45b) of the variable ball entry means is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the predetermined range.

  According to the feature I7, when the variable entering means switches from the first state to the second state, an entering opportunity of the game ball to the special entering means is generated. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention level not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state.

  In this case, the ball entering portion of the variable ball entering means is located on the tip side of the flow direction of the game ball on the displacement portion, rather than the predetermined range which is a range enabling entering the special ball entering means in the displacement portion. Existing. As a result, the game ball which has been on the displacement portion but does not reach the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means enters the special ball entry means. Therefore, the player's sense of disadvantage for the game ball placed on the displacement portion not entering the variable ball entry means, conversely, for a sense of profit for the occurrence of ball entry to the special ball entry means It is possible to change.

  Feature I8. The predetermined range is a range in which the game ball of the next firing order is present at the timing when one game ball reaches the ball entry portion when the game ball is supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle. The gaming machine according to feature I7, wherein the gaming machine is set to

  According to the feature I8, there is a possibility that the game ball is present in the predetermined range of the displacement portion at the timing when the game ball enters the ball entry portion of the variable entry means and the displacement portion switches to the second correspondence state. Becomes higher. Therefore, when the displacement part changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game ball entering the special ball entering means.

Feature I9. As the special ball entering means, a first special ball entering means (first special ball entry port 251) and a second special ball entering means (second special ball entry port 252) are provided,
The gaming machine is means for giving a first profit when the game ball enters the first special ball entry means (a function of executing the process of step S3902 in the main CPU 63);
A means for providing a second benefit when the game ball enters the second special ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
When the first condition is established in the special control state, it becomes possible to enter the game ball to the first special ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I8, wherein when the second condition is satisfied in the special control state, the game ball can enter the second special ball entry means.

  According to the feature I9, the special entering means to be subject to entering the ball is the first special entering means and the second special entering means depending on whether the condition established in the special control state is the first condition or the second condition. And will be different. And the profit provided when the game ball enters the first special ball entry means is different from when the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. Thus, the player not only expects the first condition or the second condition to be established in the special control state, but also enables the player to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means with higher profit. It is expected that the condition to be satisfied will be satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature I10. In the variable ball entering means, the game ball having flowed from the upstream side of the variable ball entering means is placed on the variable ball entering means in the first corresponding state in one of the first state and the second state. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by being in the second state, and the variable ball entering means is brought into the second corresponding state in the other state among the first state and the second state. It has a displacement part (induction board part 214) which enables the gaming ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The displacement portion is formed such that the gaming ball placed on the displacement portion flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion in the first corresponding state,
The first special ball entering device is configured such that, in a state where the gaming ball is placed on a first predetermined range (first range X1) which is a partial range of the displacement portion, the displacement portion is the first corresponding state from the first corresponding state When the game ball is switched to the 2 compatible state, the game ball is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction,
The second special ball entering device is configured such that, in a state where the gaming ball is placed in a second predetermined range (second range X2) which is a range of a part of the displacement portion, the displacement portion is the first corresponding state The gaming machine according to feature I9, characterized in that the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction when switching to the 2 compatible state.

  According to the feature I10, when the gaming ball is placed on the displacement portion which is in the first corresponding state, the displacement is performed in a situation where the ball can be entered into the special ball entry means with higher profit. The position of the game ball placed on the displacement part will be focused on in anticipation of the part switching from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state.

Feature I11. The one state is the first state of the variable entering means, and the other state is the second state of the variable entering means.
The game ball entering the first special ball entry means is more advantageous for the player than the game ball enters the second special ball entry means,
A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area toward the specific range of the displacement section is provided on the upstream side of the flow direction of the gaming ball from the displacement section,
The second predetermined range is on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range is on the side of the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to feature I10, wherein the ball entering portion of the variable ball entering means is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

  According to the feature I11, when the variable entering means switches from the first state to the second state, an entering opportunity of the game ball to the special entering means is generated. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention level not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state.

  In this case, the first predetermined range, which is a range that enables entry to the first special ball entry means in the displacement portion, is a range that enables entry to the second special ball entry means in the displacement portion. (2) It is on the tip side of the flow direction of the game ball on the displacement portion more than the predetermined range, and the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means is the tip of the flow direction of the game ball on the displacement portion Exist on the side. The game ball entering the first special ball entry means is more advantageous for the player than the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. In this case, the game ball existing at a position closer to the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means on the displacing portion becomes easier to enter the first special ball entry means advantageous to the player, so the variable ball entry means It is possible to make the profit for the player higher as the situation in which the game ball does not enter the ball in the ball entry part of the game becomes stronger.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A41, the feature B1 to B20, the feature C1 to C4, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E7, the feature F1 to F45, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature I1 to I11 Any one or more configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. It is provided in the game area (game area PA) where the game ball flows down, and it is possible to enter the game ball or the first state where the game ball is easy to enter and the game ball is not enterable or the game ball is hard to enter Variable ball entering means provided so as to be switchable with each of the second states (in the first through fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the special electric symbol winning device 32, in the fifteenth embodiment, the first special electric symbol winning device 261 and the second Special power winning device 262),
Special control means for executing special control to bring the variable ball entry means into the first state and then to the second state (perform opening setting processing for special power and closing setting processing for special power in the main CPU 63 Function),
Transition means (function to execute processing during special figure determination in the main CPU 63) to shift the gaming state to the special control state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed;
Special ball entering means (first to thirteenth, eighteenth embodiments) in which the entering of the gaming ball is restricted in the predetermined gaming state and the entering of the gaming ball is possible in the gaming state which is not the predetermined gaming state The through gate 35, and the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 in the fourteenth embodiment, and the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264 in the fifteenth embodiment,
Acquisition corresponding ball entry means (burst gate 311) that enables game ball entry at least in the predetermined gaming state,
The special ball entering means can enter the ball capable of entering the gaming ball based on entering the gaming ball into the special ball entering means, and the gaming ball enters the ball based on the entering of the gaming ball into the acquisition corresponding ball entering means Triggered ball entering means (second operation opening 34) that can enter the ball capable of entering the ball,
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that a transition trigger to the special control state occurs on the basis of the game ball entering the trigger ball entry means.

  According to the feature J1, it is possible to enter the special ball entering means that causes the trigger entering means to enter the possible state in the gaming state which is not the predetermined gaming state. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the trigger ball entering means is expected to generate a game state that is not the predetermined game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, even in the predetermined gaming state, the trigger ball entering means can enter the ball based on the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entering means. Then, a transition trigger to a special control state occurs on the basis of the game ball entering the ball entry means that has become the ball entry enable state. As a result, the trigger ball entering means can enter the game not only in the game state which is not the predetermined game state but also in the predetermined game state, and the special control state is generated based on the ball entering the game ball entering means. It is possible to create a situation where

  Feature J2. The gaming machine according to Feature J1, wherein the special control state is included in the gaming state which is not the predetermined gaming state.

  According to the feature J2, it is possible to enter the gaming ball to the variable entering means by shifting the gaming state to the special control state or not only it becomes easy to enter the game but also the gaming ball to the special entering means It is possible to enter the As a result, it is possible to enhance the profit of the transition of the gaming state to the special control state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature J3. A restriction means (limits that the probability of entering the game ball to the acquisition corresponding ball entry means is lower than the probability that the game ball enters the special ball entry means in the gaming state which is not the predetermined game state A game machine according to feature J1 or J2, characterized in that it comprises a nail 312).

  According to the feature J3, it is possible to suppress the probability that the transition to the special control state will occur based on the ball entry of the gaming ball to the acquisition corresponding ball entry means in the predetermined gaming state. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the occurrence of the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the gaming ball to the acquisition corresponding entry means in the predetermined gaming state.

Feature J4. It has a predetermined ball entry means (first operation port 33) that enables the game ball to enter the ball in at least the predetermined gaming state,
The transition trigger to the special control state occurs based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means,
In the feature J3, the restricting means is configured such that the ball entering probability of the game ball to the acquisition corresponding ball entering means is lower than the probability of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature J4, the game ball can enter the ball in the predetermined gaming state, and the generation of the game ball enters the special control state rather than the predetermined ball entering means as the transition trigger to the special control state, the acquisition corresponding ball entering means Has a lower probability of entering the game ball. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the occurrence of the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the gaming ball to the acquisition corresponding entry means in the predetermined gaming state.

  Feature J5. Notification execution means (main side CPU 63) for executing acquisition correspondence notification in a situation where the trigger ball entering means becomes the ball entry enable state based on the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entering means A game machine according to any one of the features J1 to J4, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S4413 and a display control device 82).

  According to the feature J5, it is possible to inform the player through the execution of the acquisition correspondence notification that the game ball enters the acquisition correspondence ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means becomes an enterable state. It becomes. As a result, entering the game ball to the acquisition corresponding entry means has occurred and the trigger entry means is in the state capable of entering the ball, but it is possible to enter the game sphere to the trigger entry means without noticing it. It becomes possible to make it hard to generate the event of losing the chance to hit the ball.

  Feature J6. The notification execution means is configured to execute the acquisition correspondence notification on condition that the game ball has entered the acquisition correspondence ball entry means in the predetermined gaming state, as described in the feature J5. Of gaming machines.

  In the gaming state which is not the predetermined gaming state, it is possible for the game ball to enter the special ball entering means, and therefore it is possible that the player's consciousness is oriented that the ball entering means becomes the ball enterable state. Although high, in the predetermined gaming state, since the game ball does not occur in the special ball entering means, the player may not be aware that the trigger ball entering means can enter the ball entering enabled state. In this case, according to the feature J6, the acquisition correspondence notification is executed on the condition that the game ball has entered the acquisition correspondence ball entry means in the predetermined gaming state, so that the trigger ball entry means can enter the ball It is possible to make the player conscious of the In addition, the acquisition response notification is prevented from being executed in the gaming state other than the predetermined gaming state in which the player is likely to be conscious that the ball entering means is in the ball entering possible state. It is possible to prevent execution of the correspondence notification from being bothersome to the player.

Feature J7. A special trigger information is acquired based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means, and the special trigger information is acquired based on the game ball entering the acquisition-compatible ball entry means ,
The trigger entering means is configured to be able to enter the ball based on the acquisition of the special trigger information,
The notification execution unit is configured to acquire the notification corresponding to acquisition of the special trigger information on the condition that the special trigger information is acquired by the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entry unit in a situation where the special trigger information is not acquired. The gaming machine according to feature J5 or J6, which is to be executed.

  According to the feature J7, it is possible to execute the acquisition correspondence notification in a situation where the player is not aware that the trigger ball entering means is in the state capable of entering the ball.

  Feature J8. The variable ball entering means, the special ball entering means, and the acquisition corresponding ball entering means are provided in an area where the gaming ball flows down when the firing operation is performed in a predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to any one of J7.

  According to the feature J8, entering the gaming ball into the variable entering means, entering the gaming ball into the special entering means, and entering the acquisition corresponding entering means by continuing the firing operation according to the predetermined aspect. It becomes possible to aim at entering a game ball.

  Feature J9. The trigger ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball can more easily reach the trigger ball entering means when the shooting operation is performed in a specific mode than when the shooting operation is performed in the predetermined mode. The game machine according to Feature J8, which is characterized in that:

  According to the feature J9, when the trigger entering means becomes capable of entering the ball in the predetermined gaming state, the game ball enters the trigger entering means by performing the firing operation in the specific mode. It becomes possible to make it easy to occur.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A41, the feature B1 to B20, the feature C1 to C4, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E7, the feature F1 to F45, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature J1 to J9 Any one or more configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature F group, the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature I group, and the feature J group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, there is known a configuration in which a player is given a profit by shifting the gaming state to a special control state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

  About a pachinko machine Specifically, the composition which shifts to a special control state by becoming a winning result by internal lottery based on the game ball entering the ball entry section provided in the game area, or a predetermined ball entry A configuration is known that shifts to a special control state based on the game ball entering the unit. And when it transfers to a special control state, opening and closing of the ball entering device provided, for example in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering into the ball entering device.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. It is provided in the game area (game area PA) where the game ball flows down, and it is possible to enter the game ball or the first state where the game ball is easy to enter and the game ball is not allowed to enter the ball or the game ball is hard to enter First variable ball entry means (first special electric potential winning device 291) provided switchably to each of the second state;
The first state is provided downstream of the first variable ball entry means, the first state in which the game ball can enter or the game ball is easy to enter the first state and the game ball can not enter the ball or the game ball is difficult to enter the second state And second variable ball entry means (second special electric potential winning device 292) provided switchably in each of
Unit control means for controlling so that a period occurs in which both the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are in the first state in the unit control state (FIG. 85 (a in the main CPU 63) A function for executing the open setting process for the special power shown in FIG. 85 and a function for executing the closed setting process for the special power shown in FIG.
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature K1, the gaming ball that fails to enter the first variable ball entry means in the first state in the unit control state can enter the second variable ball entry means in the first state. This makes it easy for the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means in the unit control state.

Feature K2. It has a unit (function to execute processing during special figure determination in the main CPU 63) to shift the gaming state to a special control state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the unit control state is executed plural times,
When the unit control state of one execution cycle ends, the gaming ball which has started to flow down from the position of the first variable ball entry means to the second variable ball entry means performs the unit control state of the next execution cycle A game machine according to feature K1, characterized in that the second variable ball entering means is in the first state.

  According to the feature K2, the gaming ball which can not enter the first variable ball entry means despite having reached the position of the first variable ball entry means at the timing when the unit control state ends The second variable ball entry means is entered in the next unit control state of the execution cycle. This makes it possible to suppress the number of gaming balls that do not enter the variable ball entry means despite the fact that the game ball is shot to enter the variable ball entry means in the special control state and the shooting operation is performed.

  Feature K3. The unit control means is characterized in that, when the unit control state is started, both the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are controlled to be in the first state. The gaming machine according to K1 or K2.

  According to the feature K3, when the unit control state is started, both of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are controlled to be in the first state, whereby these variable ball entry means are The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the timing to be in the first state is individually set. In addition, the gaming ball having entered the first variable entry means in the unit control state of one execution cycle can enter the second variable entry means in the unit control state of the next execution session.

  Feature K4. When the unit control state is started, the unit control means sets both the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means into the first state, and the unit control state ends. A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, wherein both the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are controlled to be in the second state.

  According to the feature K4, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling each variable ball entry means in the unit control state. In addition, according to the present configuration, it is basically the first variable ball entry means that the game ball is subject to ball entry in the unit control state, and enters the first variable ball entry means in the unit control state of one execution cycle The game ball that has run out of balls can enter the second variable ball entry means in the unit control state of the next execution cycle.

Feature K5. The unit control state is provided with a unit for shifting the gaming state to a special control state in which the unit control state is executed a plurality of times (a function of executing processing during special figure determination in the main CPU 63)
The period from the end of the unit control state of one execution time to the start of the unit control state of the next execution time in the special control state is the second time from the position of the first variable ball entry means A game machine according to feature K3 or K4, characterized in that it is shorter than the time required for the game ball to reach the position of the variable ball entry means.

  According to the feature K5, the gaming ball that has leaked into the first variable ball entry means in the unit control state of one execution cycle can enter the second variable ball entry means in the unit control state of the next execution cycle. It becomes. Moreover, it becomes possible to implement | achieve the structure for making it hard to generate | occur | produce such a ball-entering leak by adjustment of the positional relationship of a 1st variable ball-closing means and a 2nd variable ball-closing means.

Feature K6. The first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are configured to allow the game balls flowing down a predetermined game area to enter the ball,
When the first variable ball-in means is in the first state, the first variable ball-in means is guided to the ball-in portion of the first variable ball-in means, the game ball flowing down the predetermined game area A feature K5 is characterized in that it has a first displacement portion (a guiding plate portion 214 of the first special electric potential winning device 291) for preventing game balls from flowing toward the second variable ball entry means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature K6, when the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game ball can be prevented from entering the game ball into the first variable ball entry means. In addition, by providing the configuration of the feature K5, even if the ball entry leak to the first variable ball entry means occurs at the end timing of the unit control state of one execution cycle, the game ball can be second variable It is easy to enter the ball into the ball entry means. Therefore, it is difficult to cause ball entry into the variable ball entry means in the special control state.

  Feature K7. The second variable ball entry means is a game ball that flows down the predetermined game area when the second variable ball entry means is in the first state, and flows downstream of the first variable ball entry means A second displacement unit (second special-purpose winning device 292) that prevents the game ball from flowing into the downstream side of the second variable ball entry means by being guided to the ball entry portion of the second variable ball entry means A game machine according to feature K6, characterized in that it has an induction plate portion 214).

  According to the feature K7, even if the ball entry leak to the first variable ball entry means occurs at the end timing of the unit control state of one execution cycle, the gaming ball enters the second variable ball entry means It will be.

  Feature K8. A blocking state provided downstream of the first variable ball entry means and upstream of the second variable ball entry means, and blocking further inflow of the game ball flowing down from the upstream side , Any one of the features K1 to K7 characterized by including blocking means (flow-down blocking member 303) switchably provided in a non-blocking state that does not block further downstream flow of the gaming ball. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

  According to the feature K8, even if the entry leak to the first variable ball entry means occurs, the inflow to the downstream side of the leaked game ball can be blocked by the blocking means. And, under the situation where the second variable ball entry means is in the first state, the blocking means is switched from the blocking state to the non-blocking state, so that the gaming ball in which the inflow to the downstream side is blocked by the blocking state. It becomes possible to enter the second variable ball entry means.

  Feature K9. The blocking means is brought into the blocking state at a timing prior to the timing at which the first variable entering means is switched from the first state to the second state, and the second variable entering means is the second. A block control means (function to execute a flow-down block control process in the main CPU 63) for causing the block means to be in the non-block state at a timing later than the timing when the state is switched to the first state The gaming machine according to feature K8 characterized in that:

  According to the feature K9, since the blocking means is in the blocking state at a timing prior to the timing when the first variable entering means is switched from the first state to the second state, the first variable entering means is It is possible to block the further downstream flow of the gaming ball that has entered and leaked into the first variable ball entry means at the timing when it is switched from the 1 state to the second state by the blocking means. Then, the blocking means is switched to the non-blocking state at a timing after the timing at which the second variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state, whereby the gaming ball blocked by the blocking means is second variable It will enter the ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entering leak to the variable entering means by the preventing means.

  Note that for the configuration of the features K1 to K9, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned feature K group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, there is known a configuration in which a player is given a profit by shifting the gaming state to a special control state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

  About a pachinko machine Specifically, the composition which shifts to a special control state by becoming a winning result by internal lottery based on the game ball entering the ball entry section provided in the game area, or a predetermined ball entry A configuration is known that shifts to a special control state based on the game ball entering the unit. And when it transfers to a special control state, opening and closing of the ball entering device provided, for example in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering into the ball entering device.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to make the execution mode of the special control state suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features is described below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the cause is due to the operation of the stop operation means And / or a variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped when a predetermined time elapses, and a game machine which provides a bonus to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... special electric prize winning device, 33 ... 1st operation opening, 34 ... 2nd operation opening, 35 ... through gate, 45b ... entrance part, 63 ... main side CPU, 82 ... display control device, 214 ... induction Board part, 241 ... induction nail group, 251 ... 1st special entrance, 252 ... 2nd special entrance, 261 ... 1st special electric prize winning device, 262 ... 2nd special electric prize winning device, 263 ... 1st through gate, 264: second through gate, 265: first large winning opening, 266: second large winning opening, 267: first guiding nail group, 268: second guiding nail group, 271: first guiding plate, 281: second Induction board, 291 ... 1st special electric winning device, 292 ... 2nd special electric winning device, 303 ... flow-down blocking member, 311 ... emergency gate, 312 ... restricted nail, PA ... gaming area.

Claims (2)

It is provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and the first state in which the game ball can enter or the game ball is easy to enter and the second state in which the game ball can not enter or the game ball is hard to enter Variable ball entry means provided switchably to each;
Special control means for executing special control to bring the variable entering means into the first state after putting the variable entering means into the first state;
Special ball entering means capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Trigger ball entering means which becomes a ball entry possible state where ball entering of the game ball is possible based on the game ball entering the special ball entering means,
Grant determination means for executing a grant determination based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entry means;
The special control state is shifted to the special control state in which the special control is executed based on the result of the awarding determination being the first grant correspondence result, and the gaming state after the end of the special control state is the start of the special control state A means capable of providing a gaming state different from the previous gaming state;
Based on that the application of the determination result becomes the second grant corresponding result, the is shifted to a predetermined gaming state special control is executed, initiate game state after completion of the predetermined gaming state of the predetermined gaming state A means for maintaining the previous gaming state,
Equipped with
The configuration in which the probability of the second assignment response result in the assignment determination is higher than the probability of the first assignment response result,
The target ball entry means, which is either the variable ball entry means or another ball entry means,
The ball entry part where the game ball can enter the ball,
It is possible for a game ball flowing down from the upstream side to be placed, and a guiding state capable of guiding the placed game ball onto the ball entry portion, and a game ball flowing down from the upstream side forward Guiding means switchably provided in each of the non-inducing states which do not lead to the writing ball;
Equipped with
When the guiding means is in the guiding state, the special ball is placed at a position where the gaming ball placed on the guiding means can flow in a different area different from the ball entering area. A game machine characterized in that a means is provided . The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

Images